xi DGS-3700-12/DGS-3700-12G Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Switch User Manual Intended Readers The DGS-3700 Series Manual contains information for setup and management of the Switch. This manual is intended
for network managers familiar with network management concepts and terminology. Typographical Conventions Convention Description
[ ]
In a command line, square brackets indicate an optional entry. For example: [copy
filename] means that optionally you can type copy followed by the name of the file. Do not
type the brackets. Bold font
Indicates a button, a toolbar icon, menu, or menu item. For example: Open the File menu
and choose Cancel. Used for emphasis. May also indicate system messages or prompts
appearing on your screen. For example: You have mail. Bold font is also used to
represent filenames, program names and commands. For example: use the copy
command. Boldface Typewriter
Indicates commands and responses to prompts that must be typed exactly as printed in Font
the manual.
Initial capital letter
Indicates a window name. Names of keys on the keyboard have initial capitals. For
example: Click Enter.
Italics
Indicates a window name or a field. Also can indicate a variables or parameter that is
replaced with an appropriate word or string. For example: type filename means that you
should type the actual filename instead of the word shown in italic. Menu Name > Menu Menu Name > Menu Option Indicates the menu structure. Device > Port > Port Option Properties means the Port Properties menu option under the Port menu option that is
located under the Device menu. Notes, Notices, and Cautions

A NOTE indicates important information that helps you make better use of your device.

A NOTICE indicates either potential damage to hardware or loss of data and tel s you

how to avoid the problem.

A CAUTION indicates a potential for property damage, personal injury, or death.

Introduction Al software functions of the Switch can be managed, configured and monitored via the embedded web-based (HTML)
interface. The Switch can be managed from remote stations anywhere on the network through a standard browser
such as Opera, Netscape Navigator/Communicator, or Microsoft Internet Explorer. The browser acts as a universal
access tool and can communicate directly with the Switch using the HTTP protocol. The Web-based management module and the Console program (and Telnet) are different ways to access the same
internal switching software and configure it. Thus, all settings encountered in web-based management are the same
as those found in the console program. Login to Web Manager To begin managing the Switch, simply run the browser you have installed on your computer and point it to the IP
address you have defined for the device. The URL in the address bar should read something like:
http://123.123.123.123, where the numbers 123 represent the IP address of the Switch. NOTE: The Factory default IP address for the Switch is 10.90.90.90.

This opens the management module's user authentication window, as seen below.

Figure 1 - 1 Enter Network Password dialog
Enter ‚Äúadmin‚ÄĚ in both the User Name and Passwordfields and click OK. This wil open the Web-based user interface.
The Switch management features available in the web-based manager are explained below. Web-based User Interface The user interface provides access to various Switch configuration and management windows, allows you to view
performance statistics, and permits you to graphical y monitor the system status. Areas of the User Interface The figure below shows the user interface. The user interface is divided into three distinct areas as described in the
table.

Figure 1 - 2 Main Web-Manager page Area Function Area 1
Select the folder or window to be displayed. The folder icons can be opened to display the hyper-
linked window buttons and subfolders contained within them. Click the D-Link logo to go to the D-
Link website. Area 2
Presents a graphical near real-time image of the front panel of the Switch. This area displays the
Switch's ports and expansion modules, showing port activity, duplex mode, or flow control,
depending on the specified mode. Various areas of the graphic can be selected for performing management functions, including port
configuration. Area 3
Presents switch information based on your selection and the entry of configuration data.

NOTICE: Any changes made to the Switch configuration during the
current session must be saved in the Save Changes web menu (explained

below) or use the command line interface (CLI) command save.

Web Pages When you connect to the management mode of the Switch with a web browser, a login window is displayed. Enter a
user name and password to access the Switch's management mode.

6 DGS-3700-12/DGS-3700-12G Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Switch User Manual Device Information Thiswindow contains the main settings for all major functions on the Switch and appears automatically when you log
on. To return to the Device Information window, click the DGS-3700-12/DGS-3700-12G Web Management Tool
folder. The Device Information window shows the Switch‚Äôs MAC Address (assigned by the factory and
unchangeable), the Boot PROM Version, Firmware Version, Hardware Version and Serial Number as well as
other information about different settings on the Switch. This information is helpful to keep track of PROM and
firmware updates and to obtain the Switch's MAC address for entry into another network device's address table, if
necessary. In addition, this window displays the status of functions on the Switch to quickly assess their current global
status. Some functions are hyper-linked to their configuration window for easy access from the Device Information
window. Figure 2 - 1 Device Information window System Information Thiswindow contains the System Information details. The user may enter a System Name, System Location and System Contact to aid in defining the Switch, to the user's preference. This window displays the MAC Address, Firmware Version and Hardware Version. To view this window, click Configuration>System Information as shown below:

Figure 2 - 2 System Information window
The fields that can be configured are described below: Parameter Description System Name
Enter a system name for the Switch, if so desired. This name wil identify it in the Switch
network. System Location
Enter the location of the Switch, if so desired. System Contact
Enter a contact name for the Switch, if so desired.
Click Apply to implement changes made. Serial Port Settings The following window contains information about the Serial Port Settings including the Baud Rate and the Auto Logout
settings. To view this window, click Configuration >Serial Port Settings as shown below:

Figure 2 - 3 Serial Port Settings window
The fields that can be configured are described below: Parameter Description Baud Rate
This field specifies the baud rate for the serial port on the Switch. There are four possible
baud rates to choose from, 9600, 19200, 38400 and 115200. For a connection to the Switch
using the CLI interface, the baud rate must be set to 115200, which is the default setting. Auto Logout
Select the logout time used for the console interface. This automatically logs the user out after
an idle period of time, as defined. Choose from the following options: 2 Minutes, 5 Minutes, 10 Minutes, 15 Minutes or Never. The default setting is 10 minutes.
Click Apply to implement changes made. NOTE: If a user configures the serial port‚Äôs baud rate, the baud rate wil take effect and save
immediately. Baud rate settings wil not change even if the user resets or reboots the Switch. The
Baud rate wil only change when the user configures it again. The serial port‚Äôs baud rate set ing is

not stored in the Switch‚Äôs configuration file. Resetting the Switch wil not restore the baud rate to
the default setting.

8 DGS-3700-12/DGS-3700-12G Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Switch User Manual IP Address The IP address may initially be set using the console interface prior to connecting to it through the Ethernet. If the
Switch IP address has not yet been changed, read the introduction of the DGS-3700 Series CLI Manual for more
information. To view this window, click Configuration> IP Address as shown below:

Figure 2 - 4 IP Address Settings window
The upper part of the page allows you to manually assign the Switch's IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway
address:
1. Select Static at the top of the screen. 2. Enter the appropriate IP Address and Subnet Mask. 3. If you want to access the Switch from a different subnet from the one it is instal ed on, enter the IP address of
the Gateway. If you wil manage the Switch from the subnet on which it is instal ed, you can leave the default
address (0.0.0.0) in this field.
4. If no VLANs have been previously configured on the Switch, you can use the default VLAN Name. The default VLAN contains all of the Switch ports as members. If VLANs have been previously configured on the Switch,
you wil need to enter the Management VLAN Name of the VLAN that contains the port connected to the
management station that wil access the Switch. The Switch wil al ow management access from stations with
the same VID listed here.

NOTE: The Switch's factory default IP address is 10.90.90.90 with a
subnet mask of 255.0.0.0 and a default gateway of 0.0.0.0.

To use the BOOTP or DHCP protocols to assign the Switch an IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway
address: Select BOOTP or DHCP, this wil determine how the Switch wil be assigned an IP address.

9 DGS-3700-12/DGS-3700-12G Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Switch User Manual Parameter Description Static
Al ows the entry of an IP address, Subnet Mask, and a Default Gateway for the Switch. These
fields should be of the form xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx, where each xxx is a number (represented in decimal
form) between 0 and 255. This address should be a unique address on the network assigned for
use by the network administrator. DHCP
The Switch wil send out a DHCP broadcast request when it is powered up. The DHCP protocol
allows IP addresses, network masks, and default gateways to be assigned by a DHCP server. If
this option is set, the Switch wil first look for a DHCP server to provide it with this information
before using the default or previously entered settings. BOOTP
The Switch wil send out a BOOTP broadcast request when it is powered up. The BOOTP
protocol allows IP addresses, network masks, and default gateways to be assigned by a central
BOOTP server. If this option is set, the Switch wil first look for a BOOTP server to provide it with
this information before using the default or previously entered settings. IP Interface
This field displays the IP Interface that is currently being used on the Switch. Management
This allows the entry of a VLAN Name from which a management station wil be allowed to VLAN Name
manage the Switch using TCP/IP (in-band via web manager or Telnet). Management stations that
are on VLANs other than the one entered here wil not be able to manage the Switch in-band
unless their IP addresses are entered in the Security IP Management window. If VLANs have
not yet been configured for the Switch, the default VLAN contains all of the Switch's ports. There
are no entries in the Security IP Management table, by default, so any management station that
can connect to the Switch can access the Switch until a management VLAN is specified or
Management Station IP Addresses are assigned. Interface Admin This field enables or disables the Interface Admin State. When the state is enabled, the IPv4 State
processing wil be started when the IPv4 address is configured on the IPIF. The IPv6 processing
wil be started when the IPv6 address is explicitly configured on the IPIF. IPv4 Address
The address should specify a host address and length of the network prefix. There can be
multiple IPv4 addresses defined on an interface. Thus, as a new address is defined, it is added on
this IP Interface. Subnet Mask
A Bitmask that determines the extent of the subnet that the Switch is on. Should be of the form
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx, where each xxx is a number (represented in decimal) between 0 and 255. The
value should be 255.0.0.0 for a Class A network, 255.255.0.0 for a Class B network, and
255.255.255.0 for a Class C network, but custom subnet masks are allowed. Gateway
IP address that determines where packets with a destination address outside the current subnet
should be sent. This is usually the address of a router or a host acting as an IP gateway. If your
network is not part of an Intranet, or you do not want the Switch to be accessible outside your
local network, you can leave this field unchanged.
Click Apply to implement changes made.

10 DGS-3700-12/DGS-3700-12G Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Switch User Manual Setting the Swith‚Äôs IP Address using the Console Interface Each Switch must be assigned its own IP Address, which is used for communication with an SNMP network manager
or other TCP/IP application (for example BOOTP, TFTP). The Switch‚Äôs default IP address is 10.90.90.90. You can
change the default Switch IP address to meet the specification of your networking address scheme.
The IP address for the Switch must be set before it can be managed with the Web-based manager. The Switch IP
address can be automatically set using BOOTP or DHCP protocols, in which case the actual address assigned to the
Switch must be known. The IP address may be set using the Command Line Interface (CLI) over the console serial
port as follows:
Starting at the command line prompt, enter the commands config ipif System ipaddress
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx/yyy.yyy.yyy.yyy, where the x‚Äôs represent the IP address to be assigned to the IP interface named
System and the y‚Äôs represent the corresponding subnet mask.
Alternatively, you can enter config ipif System ipaddress xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx/z, where the x‚Äôs represents the corresponding
number of subnets in CIDR notation.
The IP interface named System on the Switch can be assigned an IP address and subnet mask which can then be
used to connect a management station to the Switch‚Äôs Telnet or Web-based management agent.
The system message Success indicated that the command was executed successfully. The Switch can now be
configured and managed via Telnet and the CLI or via the Web-based management agent using the above ip address
to connect to the Switch.

Interface Settings This window al ows the user to create and configure interfaces on the Switch. To view this window, click Configuration> Interface Settings as shown below:

Figure 2 - 5 Interface Settings window
The following parameters can be configured: Parameter Description Interface Name
Enter the name you wish to give the IP Interface. VLAN Name
Enter the name of the VLAN corresponding to the System interface. Interface Admin. Al ows the user to enable or disable the interface administration state. State
Click Create to create the entry or Delete Al to delete all the current IP Interface entries. To edit the VLAN Name or Admin. State click the IPv4 Edit or IPv6 Edit button as shown below.

Figure 2 - 6 Interface Settings Edit window

11 DGS-3700-12/DGS-3700-12G Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Switch User Manual
Enter the new VLAN Name and Admin. State and click Apply. To edit an entry for IPv4 features click the
corresponding IPv4 Edit button.

Figure 2 - 7 IPv4 Interface Settings Edit window
The following parameters can be configured: Parameter Description Interface Name
Displays the interface being edited. VLAN Name
Enter the name of the VLAN corresponding to the interface. IPv4 Address
Enter an alternative IPv4 address. Currently an interface can only have one IPv4 address defined.
Therefore multinetting configuration of IPv4 must be done through creation of a secondary
interface on the same VLAN, instead of directly configuring multiple IPv4 addresses on the same
interface. Subnet Mask
Enter the corresponding subnet mask. IPv4 State
This function al ows user to enable the IPv4 address on the IP interface.
Click Apply to implement changes made. To edit an entry for IPv6 features click the corresponding IPv6 Edit button.

Figure 2 - 8 IPv6 Interface Settings Edit window
The following parameters can be configured: Parameter Description Interface Name
Displays the interface being edited. VLAN Name
Enter the name of the VLAN corresponding to the interface. IPv6 Network
Enter the IPv6 Network Address to be configured. The interface can have multiple IPv6 addresses Address
defined. Configuration of IPv6 addresses must be done through the command config ipif. IPv6 State
Al ows the user to enable or disable the IPv6 state on the interface. NS Retransmit This field is used to set the interval, in mil iseconds that the Switch wil produce neighbor time (0- solicitation packets to be sent out over the local network. This is used to discover IPv6 neighbors 4294967295)
on the local network. The user may select a time between 0 and 4294967295 mil iseconds. The
default is 0.

12 DGS-3700-12/DGS-3700-12G Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Switch User Manual Automatic Link Enables or disables the automatic configuration of link local addresses when there are no IPv6 Local Address
addresses explicitly configured. When an IPv6 address is explicitly configured, the link local
address wil be automatically configured, and the IPv6 processing wil be started. When there is
no IPv6 address explicitly configured, by default, link local address is not configured and the IPv6
processing wil be disabled. By enabling this automatic configuration, the link local address wil be
automatical y configured and IPv6 processing wil be started.
Click Apply to implement changes made.

Figure 2 - 9 IPv6 Route Settings window
The following parameters can be configured: Parameter Description Interface Name
Enter the name you wish to give the IPv6 Route Interface. Nexthop
Enter the IPv6 address for the next hop router. Address Metric (1-65535) Al ows the entry of a routing protocol metric entry representing the number of routers between the
Switch and the IP address above. The default setting is 1. Backup State
The user may choose between Primary and Backup. If the Primary Static/Default Route fails, the
Backup Route wil support the entry.
Click Apply to implement changes made. To remove any entry, click the Delete Al button.

IPv6 Neighbor Settings This window al ows the user to create and configure IPv6 Neighbor settings on the Switch. The Switch‚Äôs current IPv6
neighbor settings wil be displayed in the table at the bottom of this window. To view this window, click Configuration> IPv6 Neighbor Settings as shown below:

13 DGS-3700-12/DGS-3700-12G Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Switch User Manual Parameter Description Interface Name
Enter the interface name of the IPv6 neighbor you wish to configure. Neighbor IPv6 Enter the neighbor IPv6 address of the entry you wish to configure. Address Link Layer MAC Enter the MAC address of the neighbor device to be added as an IPv6 neighbor on the IP Address
interface. Interface Name
In order to search for a previously configured Interface name enter the appropriate information
and click Find. To remove a previously configured Interface enter the Interface name and click Clear. State
To find or delete specific entries use the pul down menu to select All, Address, Static, or Dynamic. All ‚Äď Select All to view all configured neighbor devices which are IPv6 neighbors of the IP
interface previously created. Address ‚Äď Select Address and enter the IPv6 address of the entry you wish to find. Static ‚Äď Select Static to view all statically entered IPv6 neighbors on the Switch. Dynamic ‚Äď Select Dynamic to view al dynamically configured neighbor devices which are IPv6
neighbors of the IP interface previously created.
Click Add to add a new entry, click Find to search for a specific entry or click Clear to remove an entry.

Port Configuration This section contains information for configuring various attributes and properties for individual physical ports,
including port speed and flow control. Port Settings To view this window, click Configuration> Port Configuration > Port Settings as shown below: To configure switch ports: Choose the port or sequential range of ports using the From Port / To Port port pull-down menus. Use the remaining pul -down menus to configure the parameters described below:

Figure 2 - 11 Port Settings window
The following parameters can be configured:

14 DGS-3700-12/DGS-3700-12G Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Switch User Manual Parameter Description From Port / To Port Use the pul -down menus to select the port or range of ports to be configured. State
Toggle this field to either enable or disable a given port or group of ports. Speed/Duplex
Toggle the Speed/Duplex field to either select the speed and duplex/half-duplex state of the
port. Auto denotes auto-negotiation between 10 and 100 Mbps devices, in full- or half-duplex.
The Auto setting allows the port to automatically determine the fastest settings the device the
port is connected to can handle, and then to use those settings. The other options are Auto, 10M/Half, 10M/Ful ,100M/Half and 100M/Ful , 1000M/Full_M, 1000M/Full_S and 1000M/Ful .
There is no automatic adjustment of port settings with any option other than Auto. The Switch allows the user to configure two types of gigabit connections; 1000M/Full_M and 1000M/Full_S. Gigabit connections only support full duplex connections and take on certain
characteristics that are different from the other choices listed. The 1000M/Full_M (master) and 1000M/Ful _S (slave) parameters refer to connections
running a 1000BASE-T cable for connection between the Switch port and other device
capable of a gigabit connection. The mastersetting (1000M/Full_M) wil allow the port to
advertise capabilities related to duplex, speed and physical layer type. The mastersetting wil
also determine the master and slave relationship between the two connected physical layers.
This relationship is necessary for establishing the timing control between the two physical
layers. The timing control is set on a masterphysical layer by a local source. The slave
setting (1000M/Ful _S) uses loop timing, where the timing comes form a data stream
received from the master. If one connection is set for 1000M/Ful _M, the other side of the
connection must be set for 1000M/Full_S. Any other configuration wil result in a link down
status for both ports. Flow Control
Displays the flow control scheme used for the various port configurations. Ports configured
for full-duplex use 802.3x flow control, half-duplex ports use backpressure flow control, and Auto ports use an automatic selection of the two. The default is Disabled. Address Learning
When Enabled, destination and source MAC addresses are automatically listed in the
forwarding table. The default setting is Enabled. Medium Type
This applies only to the Combo ports. If configuring the Combo ports this defines the type of
transport medium used. SFP ports should be set at Fiber and the Combo 1000BASE-T ports
should be set at Copper.
Click Apply to implement the new settings on the Switch. Click Refresh to reload the page.

Port Description The Switch supports a port description feature where the user may assign names to various ports on the Switch. Use the From Port / To Port pull-down menu to choose a port or range of ports to describe, and then enter a
description of the port(s). Click Apply to set the descriptions in the Port Description Table.The Medium Type applies only to the Combo ports. If configuring the Combo ports this defines the type of tranport
medium used. SFP ports should be nominated Fiber and the Combo 1000BASE-T ports should be nominated Copper.
The result wil be displayed in the appropriate switch port number slot (C for copper ports and F for fiber ports). To view this window, click Configuration > Port Configuration >Port Description as shown below:

Port Error Disabled The following window wil display the information about ports that have had their connection status disabled, for
reasons such as Loopback Detection or link down status. To view this window, click Configuration> Port Configuration > Port Error Disabled as shown below.

Figure 2 - 13 Port Error Disabled window
The following parameters are displayed: Parameter Description Port
Displays the port that has been error disabled. Port State
Describes the current running state of the port, whether Enabled or Disabled. Connection Status
This field wil read the uplink status of the individual ports, whether enabled or Disabled. Reason
Describes the reason why the port has been error-disabled, such as a STP loopback
occurrence.

Static ARP Settings The Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) is a TCP/IP protocol that converts IP addresses into physical addresses. This
table allows network managers to view, define, modify and delete ARP information for specific devices. Static entries
can be defined in the ARP Table. When static entries are defined, a permanent entry is entered and is used to
translate IP address to MAC addresses. To view this window, click Configuration> Static ARP Settings as shown below:

Figure 2 - 14 Static ARP Settings window
The following fields can be set: Parameter Description ARP Aging Time
The user may globally set the maximum amount of time, in minutes, that an Address (0-65535)
Resolution Protocol (ARP) entry can remain in the Switch‚Äôs ARP table, without being
accessed, before it is dropped from the table. The value may be set in the range of 0-65535
minutes with a default setting of 20 minutes. IP Address
The IP address of the ARP entry. MAC Address
The MAC address of the ARP entry.
After entering the IP Address and MAC Address of the Static ARP entry, click Apply to implement the new entry. To
completely clear the Static ARP Settings, click the Delete Al button. NOTE: The Switch supports up to 255 static ARP entries.

User Accounts Use the User Account Management window to control user privileges, create new users and view existing User
Accounts. To view this window, click Configuration>User Accounts as shown below:

Figure 2 - 15 User Accounts window
The following fields can be set: Parameter Description User Name
The name of the user, an alphanumeric string of up to 15 characters. Access Right
There are three levels of user privileges, Admin, Operator and User. Some menu selections
available to users with Admin privileges may not be available to those with User or Operator

17 DGS-3700-12/DGS-3700-12G Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Switch User Manual
level privileges. There are 3 levels of security offered on the Switch, the Operator level privilege wil al ow users
to configure and view configurations on the Switch, except for those involving security features,
which are stil left to the Admin level privilege. Operator level users can be authenticated through
either the local authentication method of the Switch, or through the Access Authentication Control
feature, discussed later in this document. Once the user has logged in to the Switch in the Operator level, certain security screens and windows wil not be made available to view, or to
configure. Only Admin level users have access to these features. (Table 2 - 1below summarizes Admin, Operator and User level privileges) New Password
Enter a password for the new user. Confirm New
Retype the new password. Password
To add a new user, enter the appropriate information and click Apply. To delete an account click the corresponding Delete button. To modify an existing user account, click Edit as shown below.

Figure 2 - 16 User Accounts window
Enter the Old Password for the account, the New Password you wish to use, and retype the new password in the
Confirm Password field. Use the drop-down menu to select the type of encryption (Default,Plain Text or Sha 1), and
click Apply.

NOTICE: In case of lost passwords or password corruption, please refer to the
D-Link website and the White Paper entitled ‚ÄúPassword Recovery Procedure‚ÄĚ,
which wil guide you through the steps necessary to resolve this issue.

Admin, Operator and User Privileges Recently added to the levels of security offered on the Switch, the Operator level privilege wil allow users to configure
and view configurations on the Switch, except for those involving security features, which are stil left to the Admin
privilege. Operator users can be authenticated through either the local authentication method of the Switch, or through
the Access Authentication Control feature, discussed later in this document. Once the user has logged in to the Switch
in the Operator level, certain security screens and windows wil not be made available to view, or to configure. Only
Admin level users have access to these features. There are three levels of user privileges, Admin, Operator and User. Some menu selections available to users with Admin privileges may not be available to those with User or Operator privileges. The following table summarizes the Admin, Operator and User privileges: Management Admin Operator User
Configuration
Yes
Yes
Read-only
Network Monitoring
Yes
Yes
Read-only

19 DGS-3700-12/DGS-3700-12G Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Switch User Manual System Log Configuration This section contains information for configuring various attributes and properties for System Log Configurations,
including System Log Settings and System Log Host. System Log Settings This window al ows the user to enable or disable the System Log and specify the System Log Save Mode Settings. To view this window, click Configuration > System Log Configuration > System Log Settings as shown below:

Figure 2 - 17 System Log Settings window
The following parameters can be set: Parameter Description System Log
To activate the System Log select Enabled or Disabled. Save Mode
Use this drop-down menu to specify the method that wil trigger a log entry. You can choose
between On Demand, Time Interval and Log Trigger. On Demand ‚Äď This method wil only save log files when they manually tell the Switch to do so,
using the SaveLog link in the Save folder. Time Interval ‚Äď This method configures a time interval by which the Switch wil save the log
files. The user may set a time between 1 and 65535 minutes. Log Trigger ‚Äď This method wil save log files to the Switch every time a log event occurs on the
Switch. Minutes (1-65535)
Enter a time interval, in minutes, for which you would like a log entry to be made.
To add a new entry, enter the appropriate information and click Apply.

System Log Server The Switch can send Syslog messages to up to four designated servers using the System Log Server. To view this window, click Configuration > System Log Configuration > System Log Server as shown below:

Figure 2 - 18 System Log Server window

The following parameters can be set:

20 DGS-3700-12/DGS-3700-12G Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Switch User Manual Parameter Description Server ID
Syslog server settings index (1-4). Server IP Address
The IP address of the Syslog server. UDP Port
Type the UDP port number used for sending Syslog messages. The default is 514. (514 or 6000-65535) Severity
This drop-down menu allows you to select the level of messages that wil be sent. The options
are Warning, Informational, and All. Facility
Some of the operating system daemons and processes have been assigned Facility values.
Processes and daemons that have not been explicitly assigned a Facility may use any of the
"local use" facilities or they may use the "user-level" Facility. Those Facilities that have been
designated are shown in the following: Bold font indicates the facility values that the Switch is
currently employing. Numerical Facility Code Numerical Facility Code
0
kernel messages
12
NTP subsystem
1
user-level messages
13
log audit
2
mail system
14
log alert
3
system daemons
15
clock daemon
4
security/authorization messages 16 local use 0 (local0)
5
messages generated internally by 17 local use 1 (local1)

syslog line printer subsystem 18 local use 2 (local2)
7
network news subsystem 19 local use 3 (local3)
8
UUCP subsystem 20 local use 4 (local4)
9
clock daemon 21 local use 5 (local5)
10
security/authorization messages 22 local use 6 (local6)
11
FTP daemon 23 local use 7 (local7)Status
Choose Enabled or Disabled to activate or deactivate.
To add a new entry, enter the appropriate information and click Apply.

21 DGS-3700-12/DGS-3700-12G Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Switch User Manual System Severity Settings The Switch can be configured to al ow alerts be logged or sent as a trap to an SNMP agent or both. The level at which
the alert triggers either a log entry or a trap message can be set as well. Use the System Severity Settings menu to
set the criteria for alerts. The current settings are displayed below the Settings menu. To view this window, click Configuration>System Severity Settings as shown below:

Figure 2 - 19 System Severity Settings
Use the drop-down menus to configure the parameters described below. Parameter Description System Severity
Choose how the alerts are used from the drop-down menu. Select log to send the alert of the
Severity Type configured to the Switch‚Äôs log for analysis. Choose trap to send it to an SNMP
agent for analysis. Select all to send the chosen alert type to an SNMP agent and the
Switch‚Äôs log for analysis. Severity Level
Choose what level of alert wil trigger sending the log entry or trap message as defined by the
Severity Name. Select critical to send only critical events to the Switch‚Äôs log or SNMP agent.
Choose warning to send critical and warning events to the Switch‚Äôs log or SNMP agent.
Select information to send informational, warning and critical events to the Switch‚Äôs log or
SNMP agent.
Click Apply to implement the new System Severity Settings.

22 DGS-3700-12/DGS-3700-12G Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Switch User Manual DHCP Relay The DHCP Relay folder contains six windows regarding the DHCP relay functions on the Switch. The DHCP windows
include DHCP Relay Global Settings, DHCP Relay Interface Settings, DHCP Relay Option 60 Default Settings, DHCP Relay Option 60 Settings, DHCP Realy Option 61 Default Settings and DHCP Relay Option 61 Settings. DHCP Relay Global Settings This window is used to enable and configure DHCP Relay Global Settings on the Switch. The relay hops count limit
allows the maximum number of hops (routers) that the DHCP messages can be relayed through to be set. If a
packet‚Äôs hop count is more than the hop count limit, the packet is dropped. The range is between 1 and 16 hops, with
a default value of 4. The relay time threshold sets the minimum time (in seconds) that the Switch wil wait before
forwarding a DHCP REQUEST packet. If the value in the seconds field of the packet is less than the relay time
threshold, the packet wil be dropped. The range is between 0 and 65,536 seconds, with a default value of 0 seconds. To view this window, click Configuration >DHCP Relay > DHCP Relay Global Settings as shown below:

Figure 2 - 20 DHCP Relay Global Settings window
The following fields can be set: Parameter Description DHCP Relay State
This field can be toggled between Enabled and Disabled using the pull-down menu. It is
used to enable or disable the DHCP Relay service on the Switch. The default is Disabled.DHCP Relay Hops
This field allows an entry between 1 and 16 to define the maximum number of router hops Count Limit (1-16)
DHCP messages can be forwarded across. The default hop count is 4. DHCP Relay Time
Al ows an entry between 0 and 65535 seconds, and defines the maximum time limit for Threshold (0-65535)
routing a DHCP packet. If a value of 0 is entered, the Switch wil not process the value in
the seconds field of the DHCP packet. If a non-zero value is entered, the Switch wil use
that value, along with the hop count to determine whether to forward a given DHCP packet. DHCP Relay Option
This field can be toggled between Enabled and Disabled using the pull-down menu. It is 82 State
used to enable or disable the DHCP Agent Information Option 82 on the Switch. The default
is Disabled. Enabled ‚Äď When this field is toggled to Enabled the relay agent wil insert and remove
DHCP relay information (option 82 field) in messages between DHCP servers and clients.
When the relay agent receives the DHCP request, it adds the option 82 information, and the
IP address of the relay agent (if the relay agent is configured), to the packet. Once the
option 82 information has been added to the packet it is sent on to the DHCP server. When
the DHCP server receives the packet, if the server is capable of option 82, it can implement
policies like restricting the number of IP addresses that can be assigned to a single remote
ID or circuit ID. Then the DHCP server echoes the option 82 field in the DHCP reply. The
DHCP server unicasts the reply to the back to the relay agent if the request was relayed to
the server by the relay agent. The switch verifies that it originally inserted the option 82
data. Finally, the relay agent removes the option 82 field and forwards the packet to the
switch port that connects to the DHCP client that sent the DHCP request. Disabled ‚Äď If the field is toggled to Disabled the relay agent wil not insert and remove

23 DGS-3700-12/DGS-3700-12G Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Switch User Manual
DHCP relay information (option 82 field) in messages between DHCP servers and clients,
and the check and policy settings wil have no effect. DHCP Relay Agent
This field can be toggled between Enabled and Disabled using the pull-down menu. It is Information Option 82 used to enable or disable the Switches ability to check the validity of the packet‚Äôs option 82 Check
field. Enabled ‚Äď When the field is toggled to Enable, the relay agent wil check the validity of the
packet‚Äôs option 82 field. If the switch receives a packet that contains the option-82 field from
a DHCP client, the switch drops the packet because it is invalid. In packets received from
DHCP servers, the relay agent wil drop invalid messages. Disabled ‚Äď When the field is toggled to Disabled, the relay agent wil not check the validity
of the packet‚Äôs option 82 field. DHCP Relay Agent
This field can be toggled between Replace, Drop, and Keep by using the pul -down menu. It Information Option 82 is used to set the Switches policy for handling packets when the DHCP Agent Information Policy Option 82 Check is set to Disabled. The default is Replace.Replace ‚Äď The option 82 field wil be replaced if the option 82 field already exists in the
packet received from the DHCP client. Drop ‚Äď The packet wil be dropped if the option 82 field already exists in the packet received
from the DHCP client. Keep ‚Äď The option 82 field wil be retained if the option 82 field already exists in the packet
received from the DHCP client. DHCP Relay Option
This function enables or disables the DHCP option 60 state. When option 60 is enabled, if 60 State
the packet does not have option 60, then the relay servers cannot be determined based on
option 60. The relay servers wil be determined based on either option 60 or per IPIF
configured servers. If the relay servers are determined based on option 60, then the IPIF
configured servers wil be ignored. If the relay servers are not determined by option 60 then
the IPIF configured servers wil be used to determine the relay servers. DHCP Relay Option
This function enables or disables the DHCP option 61 state. When option 61 is enabled, if 61 State
the packet does not have option 61, then the relay servers cannot be determined based on
option 61. The relay servers will be determined based on option 61 and the IPIF configured
servers wil be ignored. If the relay servers are not determined either by option 60 or option
61, then IPIF configured servers wil be used to determine the relay servers.
Click Apply to implement any changes that have been made.

NOTE: If the Switch receives a packet that contains the option-82 field from a DHCP client and the
information-checking feature is enabled, the switch drops the packet because it is invalid. However, in
some instances, you might configure a client with the option-82 field. In this situation, you should
disable the information-check feature so that the switch does not remove the option-82 field from the

packet. You can configure the action that the switch takes when it receives a packet with existing
option-82 information by configuring the DHCP Agent Information Option 82 Policy.

24 DGS-3700-12/DGS-3700-12G Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Switch User Manual The Implementation of DHCP Information Option 82 on the Switch The config dhcp_relay option_82 command configures the DHCP relay agent information option 82 setting of the
switch. The formats for the circuit ID sub-option and the remote ID sub-option are as follows: NOTE: For the circuit ID sub-option of a standalone switch, the module field is always
zero.

25 DGS-3700-12/DGS-3700-12G Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Switch User Manual DHCP Relay Interface Settings This window al ows the user to set up a server, by IP address, for relaying DHCP information to the Switch. The user
may enter a previously configured IP interface on the Switch that wil be connected directly to the DHCP/BOOTP
server using the following window. Properly configured settings wil be displayed in the DHCP Relay Interface Table
at the bottom of the following window. The user may add up to four server IP‚Äôs per IP interface on the Switch. To view this window, click Configuration > DHCP Relay >DHCP Relay Interface Settings as shown below:

Figure 2 - 22 DHCP Relay Interface Settings and DHCP Relay Interface Table window
The following parameters may be configured or viewed: Parameter Description Interface
The IP interface on the Switch that wil be connected directly to the Server. Server IP
Enter the IP address of the DHCP server. Up to four server IPs can be configured per IP
Interface.
Click Apply to implement changes made.

DHCP Relay Option 60 Default Settings This window allows the user to configure the DHCP Relay Option 60 Default servers. When there are no matching
servers found for the packet based on option 60, the relay servers wil be determined by the default relay server
setting. Similiarly when there is no match found for the packet, the relay servers wil be determined based on the
default relay servers. To view this window, click Configuration > DHCP Relay > DHCP Relay Option 60 Default Settings as shown
below:

Figure 2 - 23 DHCP Relay Option 60 Default Settings window
The following parameters may be configured: Parameter Description Relay IP Address
Enter the specified IP address for the DHCP relay forward. Mode
Use the pull down menu to choose either Relay or Drop. When drop is specified, the packet
with no matching rules found wil be dropped without further process. When relay is selected
the packet wil be relayed based on the relay rules.
Click Add to add a new Relay IP Address entry. Click Apply to implement changes made. To remove any entries click
the corresponding Delete button.

26 DGS-3700-12/DGS-3700-12G Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Switch User Manual DHCP Relay Option 60 Settings This window is used to configure option 60 relay rules on the Switch. Different strings can be specified for the same
relay server, and the same string can be specified with multiple relay servers. The system wil relay the packet to al
the matching servers. To view this window, click Configuration > DHCP Relay > DHCP Relay Option 60 Settings as shown below:

Figure 2 - 24 DHCP Relay Option 60 Settings window
The following parameters may be configured: Parameter Description String
Enter the specified string, up to a maximum of 255 alphanumeric characters. Server IP
Enter the relay server IP address. Match Type
Use the drop down menu to select either Exact Match or Partial Match. Exact Match ‚Äď The option 60 string in the packet must fully match the specified string. Partial Match ‚Äď The option 60 string in the packet only needs to partially match the specified
string.
Click Add to add a new entry. To search for a particular entry enter the correct IP Address or String and click Find. To
delete an entry select it and click Delete.

DHCP Relay Option 61 Default Settings This window is used to configure the DHCP Relay Option 61 Default Settings. These settings are used to determine
the rule to process those packets that have no option 61 matching rules. To view this window, click Configuration > DHCP Relay > DHCP Relay Option 61 Default Settings as shown
below:

Figure 2 - 25 DHCP Relay Option 61 Default Settings window
The following parameters may be configured: Parameter Description DHCP Relay Option Use the pull down menu to choose either Relay or Drop. When drop is specified, the packet 61 Default
with no matching rules found wil be dropped without further process. When relay is selected
the packet wil be relayed based on the relay rules. Enter the IP Address of the entry you wish to configure.
Click Apply to implement changes made.

27 DGS-3700-12/DGS-3700-12G Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Switch User Manual DHCP Relay Option 61 Settings This command is used to add a rule to the relay server based on option 61. The matching rule can be based on either
the MAC address or by using a user-specified string. Only one relay server can be specified for a MAC-address or a
string. If the existing relay servers are determined based on option 60, and one relay server is determined based on
option 61, the final relay servers wil be the union of these two sets of servers. To view this window, click Configuration > DHCP Relay > DHCP Relay Option 61 Settings as shown below:

Figure 2 - 26 DHCP Relay Option 61 Settings window
The following parameters may be configured: Parameter Description Client ID
Use the drop down menu to select the method of identification for the Client ID either MAC Address or String. The MAC Address wil specify the hardware address of the client and the String wil specify the client ID. Choose a method and enter the appropriate information into
the box provided. Relay Rule
Use the pull down menu to choose either Relay or Drop. When drop is specified, the packet
with no matching rules found wil be dropped without further process. When relay is selected
the packet wil be relayed based on the relay rules. Choose a method and enter the
appropriate information into the box provided.
Click Add to create a new entry. To remove an entry, enter the appropriate Client ID information and click Delete. To
delete all entries click Delete Al .

Out of Band Management Settings This window is used to configure the RJ-45 Out-of-band (OOB) management port on the Switch. The OOB port is
physically isolated from the data channels of the Switch. This port al ows administrators manage the device remotely
without the impact data channel congestion. The OOB management is a method to manage devices while sharing the
network bandwidth with other management traffic. The OOB port allows Management packets and ARP requests to
pass while other packets wil be dropped. To view this window, click Configuration > Out of Band Management Settings as shown below:

Figure 2 - 27 Out of Band Management Settings window
The following parameters may be configured:

28 DGS-3700-12/DGS-3700-12G Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Switch User Manual Parameter Description IP Address
Enter the IP address of the interface. Subnet Mask
Enter the Subnet mask of the interface. Gateway
Enter the default gateway of the out of band management networks. Status
Al ows the user to Enable or Disable the IP interface. Link Status
Displays the current configurations of the out of band management interface.
Click Apply to implement changes.

External Alarm Settings This window is used to display and configure the messages receiving from the RJ-45 alarm port when external alarm
occurs. The alarm port is designed to collect the alarm message generated by the 3-party alarm generator. While
receiving the alarm messages, the Switch wil send out alarm traps to the NMS according to the message you
configured. To view this window, click Configuration > External Alarm Settings as shown below:

DHCP Auto Configuration Settings The DHCP auto configuration function on the Switch wil load a previously saved configuration file for current use.
When DHCP auto configuration is Enabled on the Switch, the DHCP reply wil contain a configuration file and path
name. It wil then request the file from the TFTP server specified in the reply. To view this window, click Configuration > DHCP Auto Configuration Settings as shown below:

Figure 2 - 30 DHCP Auto Configuration Settings window

29 DGS-3700-12/DGS-3700-12G Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Switch User Manual
When DHCP autoconfiguration is Enabled, the Switch becomes a DHCP client automatically after rebooting. The
DHCP server must have the TFTP server IP address and configuration file name, and be configured to deliver this
information in the data field of the DHCP reply packet. The TFTP server must be running and have the requested
configuration file in its base directory when the request is received from the Switch. Consult the DHCP server and
TFTP server software instructions for information on loading a configuration file. If the Switch is unable to complete the autoconfiguration process the previously saved local configuration file present
in Switch memory wil be loaded.

MAC Address Aging Time This table specifies the length of time a learned MAC Address wil remain in the forwarding table without being
accessed (that is, how long a learned MAC Address is al owed to remain idle). To change this, enter a value
representing the MAC address age-out time in seconds. TheMAC Address Aging Time can be set to any value
between 10 and 1,000,000 seconds. The default setting is 300 seconds. To view this window, click Configuration> MAC Address Aging Time as shown below:

Figure 2 - 31 MAC Address Aging Time window Web Settings Web-based management is Enabled by default. If you choose to disable this by selecting Disabled, you wil lose the
ability to configure the system through the web interface as soon as these settings are applied. To view this window, click Configuration>Web Settings as shown below:

Figure 2 - 32 Web Settings window

Telnet Settings Telnet configuration is Enabled by default. If you do not want to allow configuration of the system through Telnet
choose Disabled. The TCP ports are numbered between 1 and 65535. The "well-known" TCP port for the Telnet
protocol is 23. To view this window, click Configuration> Telnet Settings as shown below:

Figure 2 - 33 Telnet Settings window

30 DGS-3700-12/DGS-3700-12G Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Switch User Manual Password Encryption Password Encryption Status can be Enabled or Disabled in this window, it is Disabled by default. Password encryption
allows the user to encrypt a password in the configuration file for additional security. Select Enabled to change the
password into encrypted form. When password encryption is disabled, the password wil be in plain text form. However,
if the user specifies the password in encrypted form, or if the password has been converted to encrypted form by the
last Enable password encryption command, the password wil stil be in encrypted form and cannot be reverted back
to plaintext form. To view this window, click Configuration> Password Encryption as shown below:

Figure 2 - 34 Password Encryption window

Clipaging Settings Clipaging Status can be Enabled or Disabled in this window, it is Enabled by default. Clipaging settings are used when
issuing a command which causes the console screen to rapidly scrol through several pages. This command wil cause
the console to pause at the end of each page. To view this window, click Configuration> Clipaging Settings as shown below:

Figure 2 - 35 Clipaging Settings window

Firmware Information The following screen allows the user to view information about current firmware images stored on the Switch. To view this window, click Configuration>Firmware Information as shown below:

Figure 2 - 36 Firmware Information window
This window holds the following information: Parameter Description ID
States the image ID number of the firmware in the Switch‚Äôs memory. The Switch can store two
firmware images for use. Image ID 1 wil be the default boot up firmware for the Switch unless

31 DGS-3700-12/DGS-3700-12G Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Switch User Manual
otherwise configured by the user. Version
States the firmware version. Size (Bytes)
States the size of the corresponding firmware, in bytes. Update Time
States the specific time the firmware version was downloaded to the Switch. From
States the IP address of the origin of the firmware. There are five ways firmware may be
downloaded to the Switch. R ‚Äď If the IP address has this letter attached, it denotes a firmware upgrade through the serial
port RS232. T ‚Äď If the IP address has this letter attached to it, it denotes a firmware upgrade through Telnet. S ‚Äď If the IP address has this letter attached to it, it denotes a firmware upgrade through the
Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP). W ‚Äď If the IP address has this letter attached to it, it denotes a firmware upgrade through the
web-based management interface. SSH ‚Äď If the IP address has these three letters attached, it denotes a firmware update through
SSH. SIM ‚Äď If the IP address has these letters attached, it denotes a firmware upgrade through the
Single IP Management feature. User
States the user who downloaded the firmware. This field may read ‚ÄúAnonymous‚ÄĚ or ‚ÄúUnknown‚ÄĚ
for users that are unidentified.

Dual Configuration Settings The following window is used to configure firmware information set in the Switch. The DGS-3700 Series has the
capability to store two firmware images in its memory. To view this window, click Configuration >Dual Configuration Settings as shown below:

Figure 2 - 37 Dual Configuration Settings
This window displays the following information: Parameter Description ID
States the ID number of the configuration file located in the Switch‚Äôs memory. The Switch can
store two configuration files for use. ID 1 wil be the default boot up configuration file for the
Switch unless otherwise configured by the user. Version
Displays the firmware version set in the Switch.

32 DGS-3700-12/DGS-3700-12G Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Switch User Manual Size(bytes)
Displays the size of the configuration file, in bytes. Update time
Displays the time that the configuration file was updated to the Switch. From
Displays the location from which the configuration file was uploaded. User
Displays the name of the user (device) that updated this configuration file. Unknown users wil be
displayed as Anonymous. Boot
Click the Boot button under this heading to use this configuration file as the boot up firmware for
the Switch. This wil apply upon the next reboot of the Switch. Active
Click the Active button to enable the configuration file settings. Delete
Click the Delete button under this heading to delete this configuration file from the Switch‚Äôs
memory.

Ping Test Ping is a small program that sends ICMP Echo packets to the IPv6 or IPv4 address you specify. The destination node
then responds to or "echoes" the packets sent from the Switch. This is very useful to verify connectivity between the
Switch and other nodes on the network. To view this window, click Configuration > Ping Test as shown below:

Figure 2 - 38 Ping Test window
The following parameters may be configured: Parameter Description IPv4 Ping Test Target IP Address Enter the Target IPv4 Address of the host. Repeat Pinging for Check the Infinite times radio button, which wil tel the ping program to keep sending ICMP
Echo packets to the specified IP address until the program is stopped. Or the user may opt to

33 DGS-3700-12/DGS-3700-12G Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Switch User Manual
choose a specific number of times to ping the Target IP Address by entering a number
between 1 and 255.Timeout
Select a timeout period between 1 and 10 seconds for this Ping message to reach its
destination. If the packet fails to find the IPv4 address in this specified time, the Ping packet wil
be dropped. IPv6 Ping Test Target IP Address Enter the Target IPv6 Address of the host. Interface Name
Enter the Target Interface Name of the host. Repeat Pinging for Check the Infinite times radio button, which wil tel the ping program to keep sending ICMP
Echo packets to the specified IP address until the program is stopped. Or the user may opt to
choose a specific number of times to ping the Target IP Address by entering a number
between 1 and 255.Size
Use this parameter to set the datagram size of the packet, or the number of bytes in each ping
packet. Users may set a size between 1 and 6000 bytes with a default setting of 100bytes. Timeout
Select a timeout period between 1 and 10 seconds for this Ping message to reach its
destination. If the packet fails to find the IPv6 address in this specified time, the Ping packet wil
be dropped.
Click Start to initiate the Ping program

Local Loopback Ports Settings The Local Loopback Ports Settings are used to start or stop the internal loopback test on selected ports, or set
to/recover external loopback mode. When internal loopback is enabled, the device starts to send test packets to the
port, and keeps monitoring the packets received. When internal loopback is disabled, the loopback test is terminated
and the result is displayed. A port can only operate in one loopback mode at a time. When external loopback is
enabled, the MAC/PHY is set to external loopback mode. When external loopback is disabled, the MAC/PHY resumes
normal operation. To view this window, click Configuration > Local Loopback Ports Settings as shown below:

Figure 2 - 39 Local Loopback Ports Settings window
The following parameters may be configured: Parameter Description From Port / To Port Select a port or group of ports to Enable or Disable the Local Loopback Ports Settings using

34 DGS-3700-12/DGS-3700-12G Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Switch User Manual
the pull-down menus. Loopback Mode
This function al ows the user to select MAC Internal/MAC External or PHY Internal/PHY
External. MAC and PHY represent the layer on which the loopback is performed while the
Internal or External represents the local loopback mode. State
Select Enable to start internal loopback test; for external loopback, set port(s) to external
loopback mode. Select Disable to stop internal loopback test; for external loopback, recover
port(s) from external loopback mode.
Click Appy to implement changes.

VLAN Counter Settings The VLAN Counter Settings table is used to create the control entry for VLAN traffic flow statistsics. The user can
create control entries to count statistics for specific VLANs, or to count statistics for specific ports on specific VLANs.
The statistics can be either byte count or packet count and can be counted for different frame types. To view this window, click Configuration > VLAN Counter Settings as shown below:

Figure 2 - 40 VLAN Counter Settings window
The following parameters may be configured: Parameter Description VID List
Check the radius button to identify the VLAN by its VLAN ID. Enter the VID or VID list you wish
to configure. VLAN Name
Check the radius button to identify the VLANs by their VLAN name. Ports (e.g.:1-5)
Enter a list of ports, or check the Al Ports check box to specify al the ports. Packet Type
Use the drop down menu to select the packet type. broadcast ‚Äď Specifies to count broadcast packets. unicast ‚Äď Specifies to count unicast packets. multicast ‚Äď Specifies to count multicast packets. all ‚Äď Specifies to count all packets. Counter Type
Use the drop down menu to select the counter type. To count at the packet level select Packet,
to count at the byte level specify Byte. VID (1-4094)
To search for a particular VLAN, enter the VID and click Find.
Click Add to create a new entry. To remove an entry click Delete to delete al entries click Delete All.

35 DGS-3700-12/DGS-3700-12G Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Switch User Manual SNTP Settings The Simple Network Time Protocol Settings can be configured in the next two windows. Time Settings This window is used to configure the time settings for the Switch. To view this window, click Configuration > SNTP Settings > Time Settings as shown below:

Figure 2 - 41 Time Settings window
The following parameters can be set or are displayed: Parameter Description Status SNTP State
Use the radius button to select an Enabled or Disabled SNTP state. Current Time
Displays the Current Time set on the Switch. Time Source
Displays the time source for the system. SNTP SettingsSNTP First Server
This is the IP address of the primary server the SNTP information wil be taken from. SNTP Second Server This is the IP address of the secondary server the SNTP information wil be taken from. SNTP Poll Interval in This is the interval, in seconds, between requests for updated SNTP information. Seconds (30-99999) Set Current TimeDate (DD/MM/YYYY)
Enter the current date in day, month and year to update the system clock. Time in (HH:MM:SS)
Enter the current time in hours, minutes, and seconds.
Click Apply to implement changes made.

36 DGS-3700-12/DGS-3700-12G Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Switch User Manual TimeZone Settings The following window is used to configure time zones and Daylight Savings time settings for SNTP. To view this window, click Configuration > SNTP Settings > TimeZone Settings as shown below:

Figure 2 - 42 Time Zone and DST Settings window
The following parameters can be set: Parameter Description Time Zone and DST Daylight Saving
Use this pull-down menu to enable or disable the DST Settings. Time State Daylight Saving
Use this pull-down menu to specify the amount of time that wil constitute your local DST offset Time Offset in 30, 60, 90, or 120 minutes. Minutes Time Zone Offset
Use these pul -down menus to specify your local time zone's offset from Greenwich Mean from GMT in +/-
Time (GMT.) HH:MM DST Repeating Settings
Using repeating mode wil enable DST seasonal time adjustment. Repeating mode requires that the DST beginning
and ending date be specified using a formula. For example, specify to begin DST on Saturday during the second
week of April and end DST on Sunday during the last week of October.

37 DGS-3700-12/DGS-3700-12G Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Switch User Manual From :Which Week Enter the week of the month that DST wil start. of the Month From: Day of the
Enter the day of the week that DST wil start on. Week From: Month
Enter the month DST wil start on. From: Time in
Enter the time of day that DST wil start on. HH:MM To: Which Week of Enter the week of the month the DST wil end. the Month To: Day of the
Enter the day of the week that DST wil end. Week To: Month
Enter the month that DST wil end. To:Time in HH:MM
Enter the time DST wil end. DST Annual Settings
Using annual mode wil enable DST seasonal time adjustment. Annual mode requires that the DST beginning and
ending date be specified concisely. For example, specify to begin DST on April 3 and end DST on October 14. From: Month
Enter the month DST wil start on, each year. From: Day
Enter the day of the week DST wil start on, each year. From: Time in
Enter the time of day DST wil start on, each year. HH:MM To: Month
Enter the month DST wil end on, each year. To: Day
Enter the date DST wil end on, each year. To: Time in HH:MM Enter the time of day that DST wil end on, each year.
Click Apply to implement changes made to the Time Zone and DST window.

MAC Notification Settings MAC Notification is used to monitor MAC addresses learned and entered into the forwarding database. To global y set
MAC notification on the Switch, open the following window by opening the MAC Notification Settings in the
Configuration folder. MAC Notification Global Settings This window is used to configure the MAC Notification Global Settings for the Switch. To view this window, click Configuration > MAC Notification Settings >MAC Notification Global Settings as
shown below:

Figure 2 - 43 MAC Notification Global Settings window
The following parameters may be viewed and modified: Parameter Description State
Enable or disable MAC notification global y on the Switch. Interval
The time in seconds between notifications. (1-2147483647 sec) History Size
The maximum number of entries listed in the history log used for notification. Up to 500 (1-500)
entries can be specified.
Click Apply to implement changes. MAC Notification Port Settings This window is used to configure the MAC Notification Port Settings for the Switch. To view this window, click Configuration> MAC Notification Settings >MAC Notification Port Settings as shown
below:

Figure 2 - 44 MAC Notification Port Settings window
The following parameters may be modified: Parameter Description From Port / To Port Select a port or group of ports to enable for MAC notification using the pull-down menus. State
Enable MAC Notification for the ports selected using the pull-down menu.
Click Apply to implement changes.

39 DGS-3700-12/DGS-3700-12G Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Switch User Manual SNMP Settings Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) is an OSI Layer 7 (Application Layer) designed specifically for
managing and monitoring network devices. SNMP enables network management stations to read and modify the
settings of gateways, routers, switches, and other network devices. Use SNMP to configure system features for proper
operation, monitor performance and detect potential problems in the Switch, switch group or network. Managed devices that support SNMP include software (referred to as an agent), which runs locally on the device. A
defined set of variables (managed objects) is maintained by the SNMP agent and used to manage the device. These
objects are defined in a Management Information Base (MIB), which provides a standard presentation of the
information control ed by the on-board SNMP agent. SNMP defines both the format of the MIB specifications and the
protocol used to access this information over the network. The DGS-3700 Series supports the SNMP versions 1, 2c, and 3. The default SNMP setting is disabled. You must
enable SNMP. Once SNMP is enabled you can choose which version you want to use to monitor and control the
Switch. The three versions of SNMP vary in the level of security provided between the management station and the
network device. In SNMP v.1 and v.2, user authentication is accomplished using 'community strings', which function like passwords.
The remote user SNMP application and the Switch SNMP must use the same community string. SNMP packets from
any station that has not been authenticated are ignored (dropped). The default community strings for the Switch used for SNMP v.1 and v.2 management access are:
‚ÄĘ public - Al ows authorized management stations to retrieve MIB objects. ‚ÄĘ private - Al ows authorized management stations to retrieve and modify MIB objects.
SNMPv3 uses a more sophisticated authentication process that is separated into two parts. The first part is to
maintain a list of users and their attributes that are al owed to act as SNMP managers. The second part describes
what each user on that list can do as an SNMP manager. The Switch allows groups of users to be listed and configured with a shared set of privileges. The SNMP version may
also be set for a listed group of SNMP managers. Thus, you may create a group of SNMP managers that are al owed
to view read-only information or receive traps using SNMPv1 while assigning a higher level of security to another
group, granting read/write privileges using SNMPv3. Using SNMPv3 individual users or groups of SNMP managers can be allowed to perform or be restricted from
performing specific SNMP management functions. The functions al owed or restricted are defined using the Object
Identifier (OID) associated with a specific MIB. An additional layer of security is available for SNMPv3 in that SNMP
messages may be encrypted. To read more about how to configure SNMPv3 settings for the Switch read the next
section. Traps Traps are messages that alert network personnel of events that occur on the Switch. The events can be as serious as
a reboot (someone accidental y turned OFF the Switch), or less serious like a port status change. The Switch
generates traps and sends them to the trap recipient (or network manager). Typical traps include trap messages for
Authentication Failure, Topology Change and Broadcast\Multicast Storm. MIBs The Switch in the Management Information Base (MIB) stores management and counter information. The Switch uses
the standard MIB-II Management Information Base module. Consequently, values for MIB objects can be retrieved
from any SNMP-based network management software. In addition to the standard MIB-II, the Switch also supports its
own proprietary enterprise MIB as an extended Management Information Base. Specifying the MIB Object Identifier
may also retrieve the proprietary MIB. MIB values can be either read-only or read-write. The DGS-3700 Series incorporates a flexible SNMP management for the switching environment. SNMP management
can be customized to suit the needs of the networks and the preferences of the network administrator. Use the SNMP
V3 menus to select the SNMP version used for specific tasks. The DGS-3700 Series supports the Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) versions 1, 2c, and 3. The
administrator can specify the SNMP version used to monitor and control the Switch. The three versions of SNMP vary
in the level of security provided between the management station and the network device. SNMP settings are configured using the menus located on the SNMP V3 folder of the web manager. Workstations on
the network that are al owed SNMP privileged access to the Switch can be restricted with the Management Station IP Address window.

40 DGS-3700-12/DGS-3700-12G Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Switch User Manual SNMP Global State Settings The SNMP Global State Settings is used to global y enable or disable the SNMP Settings on the switch. To view this window, click Configuration > SNMP Settings > SNMP Global State Settings as shown below:

Figure 2 - 45 SNMP Global State Settings window

SNMP View Table This window is used to assign views to community strings that define which MIB objects can be accessed by a remote
SNMP manager. To view this window, click Configuration > SNMP Settings > SNMP View Table as shown below:

Figure 2 - 46 SNMP View Table window
The following parameters can be set: Parameter Description View Name
Type an alphanumeric string of up to 32 characters. This is used to identify the new SNMP
view being created. Subtree OID
Type the Object Identifier (OID) Subtree for the view. The OID identifies an object tree (MIB
tree) that wil be included or excluded from access by an SNMP manager. View Type
Select Included to include this object in the list of objects that an SNMP manager can
access. Select Excluded to exclude this object from the list of objects that an SNMP
manager can access.
To implement the new settings, click Apply. To delete an entry click the corresponding Delete button.

41 DGS-3700-12/DGS-3700-12G Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Switch User Manual SNMP Group Table An SNMP Group created with this table maps SNMP users (identified in the SNMP User Table) to the views created in
the previous menu. To view this window, click Configuration > SNMP Settings > SNMP Group Table as shown below:

Figure 2 - 47 SNMP Group Table window
To delete an existing SNMP Group Table entry, click the corresponding Delete button. The following parameters can be set: Parameter Description Group Name
Type an alphanumeric string of up to 32 characters. This is used to identify the new SNMP
group of SNMP users. Read View Name
This name is used to specify the SNMP group created can request SNMP messages. Write View Name
Specify a SNMP group name for users that are al owed SNMP write privileges to the Switch's
SNMP agent. Notify View Name
Specify a SNMP group name for users that can receive SNMP trap messages generated by
the Switch's SNMP agent. User-based SNMPv1 ‚Äď Specifies that SNMP version 1 wil be used. Security Model SNMPv2 ‚Äď Specifies that SNMP version 2c wil be used. The SNMPv2 supports both
centralized and distributed network management strategies. It includes improvements in the
Structure of Management Information (SMI) and adds some security features. SNMPv3 ‚Äď Specifies that the SNMP version 3 wil be used. SNMPv3 provides secure access
to devices through a combination of authentication and encrypting packets over the network. Security Level
The Security Level settings only apply to SNMPv3. NoAuthNoPriv ‚Äď Specifies that there wil be no authorization and no encryption of packets
sent between the Switch and a remote SNMP manager. AuthNoPriv ‚Äď Specifies that authorization wil be required, but there wil be no encryption of
packets sent between the Switch and a remote SNMP manager. AuthPriv ‚Äď Specifies that authorization wil be required, and that packets sent between the
Switch and a remote SNMP manger wil be encrypted.
To implement the new settings, click Apply.

42 DGS-3700-12/DGS-3700-12G Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Switch User Manual SNMP User Table This windowdisplays al of the SNMP User's currently configured on the Switch and also al ows you to add new users. To view this window, click Configuration > SNMP Settings > SNMP User Table as shown below: Figure 2 - 48 SNMP User Table window
The following parameters may be set: Parameter Description User Name
An alphanumeric string of up to 32 characters. This is used to identify the SNMP users. Group Name
This name is used to specify the SNMP group created can request SNMP messages. SNMP Version V1 ‚Äď Indicates that SNMP version 1 is in use. V2 ‚Äď Indicates that SNMP version 2 is in use. V3 ‚Äď Indicates that SNMP version 3 is in use. SNMP V3 Encryption None ‚Äď Indicates that there is no SNMP V3 Encryption Password ‚Äď Indicates that there is SNMP V3 Encryption through a password Key ‚Äď Indicates that there is SNMP V3 Encryption through a key. Auth-Protocol by MD5 ‚Äď Indicates that the HMAC-MD5-96 authentication level wil be used. Password SHA ‚Äď Indicates that the HMAC-SHA authentication protocol wil be used.Priv-Protocol by None ‚Äď Indicates that no authorization protocol is in use. Password DES ‚Äď Indicates that DES 56-bit encryption is in use based on the CBC-DES (DES-56)
standard.Auth-Protocol by Key MD5 ‚Äď Indicates that the HMAC-MD5-96 authentication level wil be used. SHA ‚Äď Indicates that the HMAC-SHA authentication protocol wil be used.Priv-Protocol by None ‚Äď Indicates that no authorization protocol is in use. password DES ‚Äď Indicates that DES 56-bit encryption is in use based on the CBC-DES (DES-56)
standard.

43 DGS-3700-12/DGS-3700-12G Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Switch User Manual Password
Enter a Password when SNMP V3 Encryption is enabled for Password mode. Key
Enter a Key when SNMP V3 Encryption is enabled for Key mode.
To implement changes made, click Apply. To delete an existing SNMP User Table entry, click the corresponding Delete button. SNMP Community Table Use this table to view existing SNMP Community Table configurations and to create a SNMP community string to
define the relationship between the SNMP manager and an agent. The community string acts like a password to
permit access to the agent on the Switch. One or more of the following characteristics can be associated with the
community string:
‚ÄĘ An Access List of IP addresses of SNMP managers that are permitted to use the community string to gain
access to the Switch's SNMP agent.
‚ÄĘ Any MIB view that defines the subset of all MIB objects wil be accessible to the SNMP community. ‚ÄĘ Read/write or read-only level permission for the MIB objects accessible to the SNMP community.
To view this window, click Configuration > SNMP Settings > SNMP Community Table as shown below:

Figure 2 - 49 SNMP Community Table window
The following parameters can set: Parameter Description Community Name
Type an alphanumeric string of up to 32 characters that is used to identify members of an
SNMP community. This string is used like a password to give remote SNMP managers
access to MIB objects in the Switch's SNMP agent. View Name
Type an alphanumeric string of up to 32 characters that is used to identify the group of MIB
objects that a remote SNMP manager is allowed to access on the Switch. The view name
must exist in the SNMP View Table. Access Right Read Only ‚Äď Specifies that SNMP community members using the community string created
can only read the contents of the MIBs on the Switch. Read Write ‚Äď Specifies that SNMP community members using the community string created
can read from, and write to the contents of the MIBs on the Switch.
To implement the new settings, click Apply. To delete an entry from the SNMP Community Table, click the
corresponding Delete button.

Figure 2 - 50 SNMP Host Table window
The following parameters can set: Parameter Description Host IP Address
Type the IP address of the remote management station that wil serve as the SNMP host
for the Switch. User-based Security SNMPv1 ‚Äď Specifies that SNMP version 1 wil be used. Model SNMPV2c ‚Äď Specifies that SNMP version 2 wil be used. SNMPV3 ‚Äď To specify that the SNMP version 3 wil be used. Security Level NoAuthNoPriv ‚Äď To specify a NoAuthNoPriv security level. AuthNoPriv ‚Äď To specify an AuthNoPriv security level. AuthPriv ‚Äď To specify an AuthPriv security level.Community String/
Type in the community string or SNMP V3 user name as appropriate.SNMP V3 User Name
To implement your new settings, click Apply.

SNMP v6Host Table This window is used to specify the IPv6 host IP address to which the trap packets wil be sent. To view this window, click Configuration > SNMP Settings > SNMP v6Host Table as shown below:

Figure 2 - 51 SNMP V6Host Table window
The following parameters can be configured: Parameter Description Host Ipv6 Address
Enter the IPv6 host IP address to which the trap packet wil be sent. User-based Security
Used the drop down menu to select the user-based security model. Model SNMPv1 ‚Äď Specifies that SNMP version 1 wil be used. The Simple Network Management
Protocol (SNMP) version 1, is a network management protocol that provides a means to

45 DGS-3700-12/DGS-3700-12G Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Switch User Manual
monitor and control network devices. SNMPv2 ‚Äď Specifies that SNMP version 2 wil be used. The SNMP v2 supports both
centralized and distributed network management strategies. It includes improvements in
the Structure of Management Information (SMI) and adds some security features. SNMPv3 ‚Äď Specifies that SNMP version 3 wil be used. SNMP v3 provides secure access
to devices through a combination of authentication and encrypting packets over the
network. SNMP v3 adds:
‚ÄĘ
Message integrity ‚ąí ensures that packets have not been tampered with during
transit.
‚ÄĘ
Authentication ‚ąí determines if an SNMP message is from a valid source.
‚ÄĘ
Encryption ‚ąí scrambles the contents of messages to prevent it being viewed by
an unauthorized source. Security Level
When SNMPv3 is in use, it is necessary to choose the security level. Use the drop down
menu to select from the following: noauth_nopriv ‚ąíSpecifies that there wil be no authorization and no encryption of packets
sent between the Switch and a remote SNMP manager. auth_nopriv ‚ąí Specifies that authorization wil be required, but there wil be no encryption
of packets sent between the Switch and a remote SNMP manager. auth_priv ‚ąí Specifies that authorization wil be required, and that packets sent between the
Switch and a remote SNMP manger wil be encrypted. Community
Enter an alphanumeric string that wil be used to authorize a remote SNMP manager to String/SNMPv3 User access the Switch‚Äôs SNMP agent. Alternatively enter the SNMPv3 user name. Name
Click Apply to implement changes made.

SNMP Engine ID The Engine ID is a unique identifier used for SNMP V3 implementations. This is an alphanumeric string used to
identify the SNMP engine on the Switch. To view this window, click Configuration > SNMP Settings > SNMP Engine ID as shown below:

Figure 2 - 53 SNMP Trap Configuration window
To enable or disable the Traps State and/or the Authenticate Traps State, use the corresponding pull-down menu to
change and click Apply.

Time Range Settings The Time Range window is used in conjunction with the Access Profile feature to determine a starting point and an
ending point, based on days of the week, when an Access Profile configuration wil be enabled on the Switch. Once
configured here, the time range settings are to be applied to an access profile rule using the Access Profiletable. The
user may enter up to 64 time range entries on the Switch. To view this window, click Configuration > Time Range Settings as shown below:

Figure 2 - 54 Time Range Settings window Parameter Description Range Name
Enter a name of no more than 32 alphanumeric characters that wil be used to identify this time
range on the Switch. This range name wil be used in the Access Profile table to identify the
access profile and associated rule to be enabled during this time range. Hours
This parameter is used to set the time in the day that this time range is to be enabled using the
following parameters:
‚ÄĘ Start Time - Use this parameter to identify the starting time of the time range, in hours,
minutes and seconds, based on the 24-hour time system.
‚ÄĘ End Time - Use this parameter to identify the ending time of the time range, in hours,
minutes and seconds, based on the 24-hour time system. Weekdays
Use the check boxes to select the corresponding days of the week that this time range is to be
enabled. Tick the Select Al Days check box to configure this time range for every day of the week.
Click Apply to implement changes made. Currently configured entries wil be displayed in the Time Range Information
table in the bottom half of the window shown above.

47 DGS-3700-12/DGS-3700-12G Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Switch User Manual sFlow The sFlow folder contains four windows to enable and configure the sFlow settings on the Switch. sFlow Global State Settings This table is used to enable or disable the sFlow Global State Settings on the Switch. The sFlow version, address and
state configurations can also be viewed in this table. To view this window, click Configuration > sFlow > sFlow Global State Settings as shown below:

sFlow Analyzer Server Settings This window is used to configure the sFlow analyzer server settings. You can specify more than one analyzer server
with the same IP address but with different UDP port numbers. You can have up to four unique combinations of IP
address and UDP port numbers. To view this window, click Configuration > sFlow > sFlow Analyzer Server Settings as shown below:

Figure 2 - 56 sFlow Analyzer Server Settings window
The following parameters can be configured: Parameter Description Analyzer Server ID (1-4) Up to four sFlow Analyzer Servers can be configured. Owner Name
The entity making use of this sflow analyzer server. When owner is set or modified, the

48 DGS-3700-12/DGS-3700-12G Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Switch User Manual
timeout value wil become 400 automatically. Timeout (1-2000000)
The length of time before the server is timed out. When the analyzer server times out, al
of the flow samplers and counter pol ers associated with this analyzer server wil be
deleted. ‚ÄúInfinite‚ÄĚ indicates that the analyzer server will never time out. If not specified, the
default value is 400. Col ector Address
The IP address of the analyzer server. If not specified, the address wil be 0.0.0.0 which
means that the entry wil be inactive. Col ector Port (1-65535) The destination UDP port for sending the sFlow datagrams. If not specified, the default
value is 6364. Max Datagram size
The maximum number of data bytes that can be packed in a single sample datagram. If not (300-1400)
specified, the default value is 1400.
Click Apply to implement the changes made.

sFlow Flow Sampler Settings This table is used to create sFlow flow sampler settings on the Switch. By configuring the sampling function for a port,
a sample packet received by this port wil be encapsulated and forwarded to the analyzer server at the specified
interval. To view this window, click Configuration > sFlow > sFlow Flow Sampler Settings as shown below:

Figure 2 - 57 sFlow Flow Sampler Settings window
The following parameters can be configured: Parameter Description From Port / To Port
Specifies the port or list of ports to be configured. Analyzer Server ID (1- The analyzer server id specifies the ID of a server analyzer where the packet wil be 4)
forwarded. Rate (0-65535)
The sampling rate for packet sampling. The actual rate is the configured rate value
multiplied by 256. For example, if the rate is 20, the actual rate 5120. One packet wil be
sampled from about 5120 packets. If set to 0, the sampler is disabled. If the rate is not
specified, its default value is 0. MAX Header Size (18- The maximum number of leading bytes in the packet which wil be sampled, encapsulated 256)
and forwarded to the server. If not specified, the default value is 128.
Click Apply to implement the changes made.

Figure 2 - 58 sFlow Counter Pol er Settings window
The following parameters can be configured: Parameter Description From Port / To Port Specifies the port or list of ports to be configured. Analyzer Server ID The analyzer server id specifies the ID of a server analyzer where the packet wil be (1-4)
forwarded. Interval (20-120)
Specifies the maximum number of seconds between successive statistic counter information.
To disable the interval check the Disabled box.
Click Apply to implement the changes made.

50 DGS-3700-12/DGS-3700-12G Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Switch User Manual Single IP Management Simply put, D-Link Single IP Management is a concept that wil stack switches together over Ethernet instead of using
stacking ports or modules. There are some advantages in implementing the "Single IP Management" feature:
1. SIM can simplify management of small workgroups or wiring closets while scaling the network to handle
increased bandwidth demand.
2. SIM can reduce the number of IP address needed in your network. 3. SIM can eliminate any specialized cables for stacking connectivity and remove the distance barriers that
typically limit your topology options when using other stacking technology.
Switches using D-Link Single IP Management (labeled here as SIM) must conform to the following rules: SIM is an optional feature on the Switch and can easily be enabled or disabled through the Command Line Interface
or Web Interface. SIM grouping has no effect on the normal operation of the Switch in the user's network. There are three classifications for SIM. The Commander Switch (CS), which is the master switch of the group, Member Switch (MS), which is a switch that is recognized by the CS a member of a SIM group, and a Candidate Switch (CaS), which is a Switch that has a physical link to the SIM group but has not been recognized by the CS as a
member of the SIM group. A SIM group can only have one Commander Switch (CS). Al switches in a particular SIM group must be in the same IP subnet (broadcast domain). Members of a SIM group
cannot cross a router. A SIM group accepts up to 33 switches (numbered 0-32), including the Commander Switch (numbered 0). There is no limit to the number of SIM groups in the same IP subnet (broadcast domain), however a single switch can
only belong to one group. If multiple VLANs are configured, the SIM group wil only utilize the system VLAN on any switch. SIM allows intermediate devices that do not support SIM. This enables the user to manage switches that are more
than one hop away from the CS. The SIM group is a group of switches that are managed as a single entity. SIM switches may take on three different
roles:
1. Commander Switch (CS) ‚Äď This is a switch that has been manually configured as the control ing device for a
group, and takes on the following characteristics: It has an IP Address. It is not a commander switch or member switch of another Single IP group. It is connected to the member switches through its management VLAN.
2. Member Switch (MS) ‚Äď This is a switch that has joined a single IP group and is accessible from the CS, and it
takes on the following characteristics: It is not a CS or MS of another Single IP group. It is connected to the CS through the CS management VLAN.
3. Candidate Switch (CaS) ‚Äď This is a switch that is ready to join a SIM group but is not yet a member of the
SIM group. The Candidate Switch may join the SIM group of a switch by manually configuring it to be a MS of
a SIM group. A switch configured as a CaS is not a member of a SIM group and wil take on the following
characteristics:
It is not a CS or MS of another Single IP group. It is connected to the CS through the CS management VLAN
After configuring one switch to operate as the CS of a SIM group, additional switches may join the group through a
direct connection to the Commander switch. Only the Commander switch wil allow entry to the candidate switch
enabled for SIM. The CS wil then serve as the in band entry point for access to the MS. The CS's IP address wil
become the path to all MS's of the group and the CS's Administrator's password, and/or authentication wil control
access to all MS's of the SIM group. With SIM enabled, the applications in the CS wil redirect the packet instead of executing the packets. The
applications wil decode the packet from the administrator, modify some data, then send it to the MS. After execution,
the CS may receive a response packet from the MS, which it wil encode and send it back to the administrator. When a CS becomes a MS, it automatically becomes a member of the first SNMP community (include read/write and
read only) to which the CS belongs. However, if a MS has its own IP address, it can belong to SNMP communities to
which other switches in the group, including the CS, do not belong.

51 DGS-3700-12/DGS-3700-12G Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Switch User Manual The Upgrade to v1.6 To better improve SIM management, the DGS-3700 Series has been upgraded to version 1.6 in this release. Many
improvements have been made, including: 1. The Commander Switch (CS) now has the capability to automatically rediscover member switches that have left the
SIM group, either through a reboot or web malfunction. This feature is accomplished through the use of Discover
packets and Maintain packets that previously set SIM members wil emit after a reboot. Once a MS has had its MAC
address and password saved to the CS‚Äôs database, if a reboot occurs in the MS, the CS wil keep this MS information
in its database and when a MS has been rediscovered, it wil add the MS back into the SIM tree automatically. No
configuration wil be necessary to rediscover these switches. There are some instances where pre-saved MS switches cannot be rediscovered. For example, if the Switch is stil
powered down, if it has become the member of another group, or if it has been configured to be a Commander Switch,
the rediscovery process cannot occur.
2. The topology map now includes new features for connections that are a
member of a port trunking group. It wil display the speed and number of
Ethernet connections creating this port trunk group, as shown in the
adjacent picture.

3. This version wil support multiple switch upload and downloads for firmware, configuration files and log files, as
follows:
‚ÄĘ Firmware ‚Äď The switch now supports multiple MS firmware downloads from a TFTP server. ‚ÄĘ Configuration Files ‚Äď This switch now supports multiple downloading and uploading of configuration files
both to (for configuration restoration) and from (for configuration backup) MS‚Äôs, using a TFTP server.
‚ÄĘ Log ‚Äď The switch now supports uploading multiple MS log files to a TFTP server.
4. The user may zoom in and zoom out when utilizing the topology window to get a better, more defined view of the
configurations. Single IP Settings Al switches are set as Candidate (CaS) switches as their factory default configuration and Single IP Management wil
be disabled. This window is used to enable the SIM for the Switch using the Web interface. To view this window, click Configuration > Single IP Management > Single IP Settings as shown below:

Figure 2 - 59 Single IP Settings window (disabled)
Change the SIM State to Enabled, and the Role State to Commander using the pull-down menu and click Apply.

Figure 2 - 60 Single IP Settings window (enabled)
The following parameters can be set: Parameters Description SIM State
Use the pull-down menu to either enable or disable the SIM state on the Switch. Disabled wil
render al SIM functions on the Switch inoperable. Role State
Use the pul -down menu to change the SIM role of the Switch. The two choices are: Candidate ‚Äď A Candidate Switch (CaS) is not the member of a SIM group but is connected to a
Commander Switch. This is the default setting for the SIM role. Commander ‚Äď Choosing this parameter wil make the Switch a Commander Switch (CS). The
user may join other switches to this Switch, over Ethernet, to be part of its SIM group. Choosing
this option wil also enable the Switch to be configured for SIM. Group Name
The user may enter a name for the group. Discovery
The user may set the discovery protocol interval, in seconds that the Switch wil send out Interval (30-90)
discovery packets. Returning information to a Commander Switch wil include information about
other switches connected to it. (Ex. MS, CaS). The user may set the Discovery Interval from 30
to 90 seconds. Hold Time Count This parameter may be set for the time, in seconds the Switch wil hold information sent to it (100-255)
from other switches, utilizing the Discovery Interval. The user may set the hold time from 100
to 255 seconds.
Click Apply to implement the settings. After enabling the Switch to be a Commander Switch (CS), the Single IP Management folder wil then contain four
added links to aid the user in configuring SIM through the web, including Topology, Firmware Upgrade and Configuration Backup/Restore and Upload Log File.

Topology The Topology window wil be used to configure and manage the Switch within the SIM group and requires Java script
to function properly on your computer. The Java Runtime Environment on your server should initiate and lead you to the topology window, as seen below.

Figure 2 - 61 Single IP Management window ‚Äď Tree View
The Tree View window holds the following information under the Data tab: Parameter Description Device Name
This field will display theDevice Nameof the switches in the SIM group configured by the user. If
no Device Name is configured by the name, it wil be given the name default and tagged with the
last six digits of the MAC Address to identify it. Remote Port
Displays the number of the physical port on the CS that the MS or CaS is connected to. The CS
wil have no entry in this field. Speed
Displays the connection speed between the CS and the MS or CaS. Local Port
Displays the number of the physical port on the MS or CaS that the CS is connected to. The CS
wil have no entry in this field. MAC Address
Displays the MAC address of the corresponding Switch. Model Name
Displays the full model name of the corresponding Switch.
To view the Topology Map, click the View menu in the toolbar and then Topology, which wil produce the following
window. The Topology View wil refresh itself periodically (20 seconds by default).

Figure 2 - 62 Topology view
This window wil display how the devices within the Single IP Management Group are connected to other groups and
devices. Possible icons in this screen are as follows: Icon Description
Group

Layer 2 commander switch

Layer 3 commander switch

Commander switch of other group

Layer 2 member switch.

Layer 3 member switch

Member switch of other group

Layer 2 candidate switch

Layer 3 candidate switch

Unknown device

Non-SIM devices

55 DGS-3700-12/DGS-3700-12G Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Switch User Manual Tool Tips In the Topology view window, the mouse plays an important role in configuration and in viewing device information.
Setting the mouse cursor over a specific device in the topology window (tool tip) wil display the same information
about a specific device as the Tree view does. See the window below for an example.

Figure 2 - 63 Device Information Utilizing the Tool Tip
Setting the mouse cursor over a line between two devices wil display the connection speed between the two devices,
as shown below.

Figure 2 - 64 Port Speed Utilizing the Tool Tip

56 DGS-3700-12/DGS-3700-12G Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Switch User Manual Right-Click Right-clicking on a device wil allow the user to perform various functions, depending on the role of the Switch in the
SIM group and the icon associated with it. Group Icon

Figure 2 - 65 Right-Clicking a Group Icon
The following options may appear for the user to configure: Col apse ‚Äď To collapse the group that wil be represented by a
single icon. Expand ‚Äď To expand the SIM group, in detail. Property ‚Äď To pop up a window to display the group
information.

Figure 2 - 66 Property window
This window holds the following information: Parameter Description Device Name
This field wil display the Device Name of the switches in the SIM group configured by the user.
If no Device Name is configured by the name, it wil be given the name default and tagged with
the last six digits of the MAC Address to identify it. Module Name
Displays the full module name of the switch that was right-clicked. MAC Address
Displays the MAC Address of the corresponding Switch. Local Port No.
Displays the number of the physical port on the MS or CaS that the CS is connected to. The CS
wil have no entry in this field. Remote Port No.
Displays the number of the physical port on the CS that the MS or CaS is connected to. The CS
wil have no entry in this field. Port Speed
Displays the connection speed between the CS and the MS or CaS
Click Close to close the Property window.

Figure 2 - 67 Right-Clicking a Commander Icon
The following options may appear for the user to configure: Col apse ‚Äď To collapse the group that wil be represented by a single icon. Expand ‚Äď To expand the SIM group, in detail. Property ‚Äď To pop up a window to display the group information. Member Switch Icon

Figure 2 - 68 Right-Clicking a Member icon
The following options may appear for the user to configure: Remove from group ‚Äď Remove a member from a group. Configure ‚Äď Launch the web management to configure the Switch. Property ‚Äď To pop up a window to display the device information. Candidate Switch Icon

Figure 2 - 69 Right-Clicking a Candidate icon
The following options may appear for the user to configure: Add to group ‚Äď Add a candidate to a group. Clicking this option wil reveal the following dialog for the user to enter a
password for authentication from the Candidate Switch before being added to the SIM group. Click OK to enter the
password or Cancel to exit the window.

Figure 2 - 70 Input password window Property ‚Äď To pop up a window to display the device information, as shown below. Menu Bar The Single IP Management window contains a menu bar for device configurations, as seen below.

Figure 2 - 71 Menu Bar of the Topology View
The five menus on the menu bar are as follows. File Print Setup ‚Äď Wil view the image to be printed. Print Topology ‚Äď Wil print the topology map. Preference ‚Äď Wil set display properties, such as pol ing interval, and the views to open at SIM startup. Group Add to group ‚Äď Add a candidate to a group. Clicking this option wil reveal the following dialog for the user to enter a
password for authentication from the Candidate Switch before being added to the SIM group. Click OK to enter the
password or Cancel to exit the window.

Figure 2 - 72 Input password window Remove from Group ‚Äď Remove an MS from the group. Device Configure ‚Äď Wil open the web manager for the specific device. View Refresh ‚Äď Update the views with the latest status. Topology ‚Äď Display the Topology view. Help About ‚Äď Wil display the SIM information, including the current SIM version.

Figure 2 - 73 About window Firmware Upgrade This screen is used to upgrade firmware from the Commander Switch to the Member Switch. Member Switches wil be
listed in the table and wil be specified by Port (port on the CS where the MS resides), MAC Address, Model Name
and Version. To specify a certain Switch for firmware download, click its corresponding check box under the Port
heading. To update the firmware, enter the Server IP Address where the firmware resides and enter the Path/Filename of the firmware. Click Download to initiate the file transfer. To view this window, click Configuration > Single IP Management > Firmware Upgrade as shown below:

Figure 2 - 74 Firmware Upgrade window Configuration File Backup/Restore This screen is used to upgrade configuration files from the Commander Switch to the Member Switch using a TFTP
server. Member Switches wil be listed in the table and wil be specified by ID, Port (port on the CS where the MS
resides), MAC Address, Model Name and Firmware Version. To update the configuration file, enter the Server IP Address where the file resides and enter the Path/Filename of the configuration file. Click Restore to initiate the file
transfer from a TFTP server to the Switch. Click Backup to backup the configuration file to a TFTP server. To view this window, click Configuration > Single IP Management > Configuration File Backup/Restore as shown
below:

Figure 2 - 75 Configuration File Backup/Restore window

60 DGS-3700-12/DGS-3700-12G Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Switch User Manual Upload Log File The following window is used to upload log files from SIM member switches to a specified PC. To upload a log file,
enter the Server IP address of the SIM member switch and then enter a Path\Filename on your PC where you wish to
save this file. Click Upload to initiate the file transfer. To view this window, click Configuration >Single IP Management > Upload Log File as shown below:

Figure 2 - 76 Upload Log File window

DDM This folder contains windows that perform Digital Diagnostic Monitoring functions on the Switch. There are windows
that al ow the user to view the digital diagnostic monitoring status of SFP modules inserting to the Switch and to
configure alarm settings, warning settings, temperature threshold settings, voltage threshold settings, bias current
threshold settings, Tx power threshold settings, and Rx power threshold settings.

Figure 2 - 77 Browse DDM Status List window
To view the status for a specific port or list of ports, enter the port list and click Find. To display the status for all ports,
check the Al Ports box and click Find.

Figure 2 - 78 DDM Settings window
The following fields can be configured: Parameter Description Trap Log
Specifies whether or not to send the trap and log, when the operating parameter exceeds the
alarm or warning threshold. From Port / To Port Specifies a port or range of ports to be configured. State
Specifies to Enable or Disable the DDM settings state. Shutdown
Specifies whether or not to shutdown the port, when the operating parameter exceeds the Alarm or Warning threshold.
Click Apply to implement changes made.

Figure 2 - 79 DDM Temperature Threshold Settings window
The following fields can be configured: Parameter Description From Port / To Port Specifies a port or range of ports to be configured. High Alarm
This is the highest threshold for the alarm. When the operating parameter rises above this
value, action associated with the alarm wil be taken. Low Alarm
This is the lowest threshold for the alarm. When the operating parameter falls below this value,
action associated with the alarm is taken. High Warning
This is the highest threshold for the warning. When the operating parameter rises above this
value, action associated with the warning is taken. Low Warning
This is the lowest threshold for the warning. When the operating parameter falls below this
value, action associated with the warning is taken.
Click Apply to implement changes made.

Figure 2 - 80 DDM Voltage Threshold Settings window
The following fields can be configured: Parameter Description From Port / To Port Specifies a port or range of ports to be configured. High Alarm
This is the highest threshold for the alarm. When the operating parameter rises above this
value, action associated with the alarm wil be taken. Low Alarm
This is the lowest threshold for the alarm. When the operating parameter falls below this value,
action associated with the alarm is taken. High Warning
This is the highest threshold for the warning. When the operating parameter rises above this
value, action associated with the warning is taken. Low Warning
This is the lowest threshold for the warning. When the operating parameter falls below this
value, action associated with the warning is taken.
Click Apply to implement changes made. DDM Bias Current Threshold Settings This table is used to configure the threshold of the bias current for specific ports on the Switch. To view this window, click Configuration > DDM > DDM Bias Current Threshold Settings as shown below:

Figure 2 - 81 DDM Bias Current Threshold Settings window
The following fields can be configured: Parameter Description From Port / To Port Specifies a port or range of ports to be configured. High Alarm
This is the highest threshold for the alarm. When the operating parameter rises above this
value, action associated with the alarm wil be taken. Low Alarm
This is the lowest threshold for the alarm. When the operating parameter falls below this value,
action associated with the alarm is taken.

63 DGS-3700-12/DGS-3700-12G Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Switch User Manual High Warning
This is the highest threshold for the warning. When the operating parameter rises above this
value, action associated with the warning is taken. Low Warning
This is the lowest threshold for the warning. When the operating parameter falls below this
value, action associated with the warning is taken.
Click Apply to implement changes made.

DDM Tx Power Threshold Settings This table is used to configure the threshold of Tx power for specific ports on the Switch. To view this window, click Configuration > DDM > DDM Tx Power Threshold Settings as shown below:

Figure 2 - 82 DDM Tx Power Threshold Settings window
The following fields can be configured: Parameter Description From Port / To Port Specifies a port or range of ports to be configured. High Alarm
This is the highest threshold for the alarm. When the operating parameter rises above this
value, action associated with the alarm wil be taken. Low Alarm
This is the lowest threshold for the alarm. When the operating parameter falls below this value,
action associated with the alarm is taken. High Warning
This is the highest threshold for the warning. When the operating parameter rises above this
value, action associated with the warning is taken. Low Warning
This is the lowest threshold for the warning. When the operating parameter falls below this
value, action associated with the warning is taken.
Click Apply to implement changes made.

DDM Rx Power Threshold Settings This table is used to configure the threshold of Rx power for specific ports on the Switch. To view this window, click Configuration > DDM > DDM Rx Power Threshold Settings as shown below:

Figure 2 - 83 DDM Rx Power Threshold Settings window

64 DGS-3700-12/DGS-3700-12G Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Switch User Manual
The following fields can be configured: Parameter Description From Port / To Port Specifies a port or range of ports to be configured. High Alarm
This is the highest threshold for the alarm. When the operating parameter rises above this
value, action associated with the alarm wil be taken. Low Alarm
This is the lowest threshold for the alarm. When the operating parameter falls below this value,
action associated with the alarm is taken. High Warning
This is the highest threshold for the warning. When the operating parameter rises above this
value, action associated with the warning is taken. Low Warning
This is the lowest threshold for the warning. When the operating parameter falls below this
value, action associated with the warning is taken.
Click Apply to implement changes made.

Jumbo Frame This window wil enable or disable the Jumbo Frame function on the Switch. The default is Disabled. When enabled,
jumbo frame (frames larger than the standard Ethernet frame size of 1536 bytes) of up to 13K (and 13312 bytes
tagged) can be transmitted by the Switch. To view this window, click L2 Features >Jumbo Frame as shown below:

66 DGS-3700-12/DGS-3700-12G Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Switch User Manual VLANs Understanding IEEE 802.1p Priority Priority tagging is a function defined by the IEEE 802.1p standard designed to provide a means of managing traffic on
a network where many different types of data may be transmitted simultaneously. It is intended to alleviate problems
associated with the delivery of time critical data over congested networks. The quality of applications that are
dependent on such time critical data, such as video conferencing, can be severely and adversely affected by even
very small delays in transmission. Network devices that are in compliance with the IEEE 802.1p standard have the ability to recognize the priority level of
data packets. These devices can also assign a priority label or tag to packets. Compliant devices can also strip priority
tags from packets. This priority tag determines the packet's degree of expeditiousness and determines the queue to
which it wil be assigned. Priority tags are given values from 0 to 7 with 0 being assigned to the lowest priority data and 7 assigned to the
highest. The highest priority tag 7 is generally only used for data associated with video or audio applications, which
are sensitive to even slight delays, or for data from specified end users whose data transmissions warrant special
consideration. The Switch al ows you to further tailor how priority tagged data packets are handled on your network. Using queues to
manage priority tagged data allows you to specify its relative priority to suit the needs of your network. There may be
circumstances where it would be advantageous to group two or more differently tagged packets into the same queue.
Generally, however, it is recommended that the highest priority queue, Queue 7, be reserved for data packets with a
priority value of 7. Packets that have not been given any priority value are placed in Queue 0 and thus given the
lowest priority for delivery. Strict mode and weighted round robin system are employed on the Switch to determine the rate at which the queues
are emptied of packets. The ratio used for clearing the queues is 4:1. This means that the highest priority queue,
Queue 7, wil clear 4 packets for every 1 packet cleared from Queue 0. Remember, the priority queue settings on the Switch are for all ports, and al devices connected to the Switch wil be
affected. This priority queuing system wil be especial y beneficial if your network employs switches with the capability
of assigning priority tags. VLAN Description A Virtual Local Area Network (VLAN) is a network topology configured according to a logical scheme rather than the
physical layout. VLANs can be used to combine any collection of LAN segments into an autonomous user group that
appears as a single LAN. VLANs also logically segment the network into different broadcast domains so that packets
are forwarded only between ports within the VLAN. Typically, a VLAN corresponds to a particular subnet, although not
necessarily. VLANs can enhance performance by conserving bandwidth, and improve security by limiting traffic to specific
domains. A VLAN is a collection of end nodes grouped by logic instead of physical location. End nodes that frequently
communicate with each other are assigned to the same VLAN, regardless of where they are physical y on the
network. Logically, a VLAN can be equated to a broadcast domain, because broadcast packets are forwarded to only
members of the VLAN on which the broadcast was initiated. Notes About VLANs No matter what basis is used to uniquely identify end nodes and assign these nodes VLAN membership, packets
cannot cross VLANs without a network device performing a routing function between the VLANs. The Switch supports IEEE 802.1Q VLANs and Port-Based VLANs. The port untagging function can be used to
remove the 802.1Q tag from packet headers to maintain compatibility with devices that are tag-unaware. The Switch's default is to assign al ports to a single 802.1Q VLAN named "default." The "default" VLAN has a VID =
1. The member ports of Port-based VLANs may overlap, if desired.

67 DGS-3700-12/DGS-3700-12G Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Switch User Manual IEEE 802.1Q VLANs Some relevant terms: Tagging ‚Äď The act of putting 802.1Q VLAN information into the header of a packet. Untagging ‚Äď The act of stripping 802.1Q VLAN information out of the packet header. Ingress port ‚Äď A port on a switch where packets are flowing into the Switch and VLAN decisions must be
made. Egress port ‚Äď A port on a switch where packets are flowing out of the Switch, either to another switch or to an
end station, and tagging decisions must be made.
IEEE 802.1Q (tagged) VLANs are implemented on the Switch. 802.1Q VLANs require tagging, which enables them to
span the entire network (assuming all switches on the network are IEEE 802.1Q-compliant). VLANs allow a network to
be segmented in order to reduce the size of broadcast domains. Al packets entering a VLAN wil only be forwarded to
the stations (over IEEE 802.1Q enabled switches) that are members of that VLAN, and this includes broadcast,
multicast and unicast packets from unknown sources. VLANs can also provide a level of security to your network. IEEE 802.1Q VLANs wil only deliver packets between
stations that are members of the VLAN. Any port can be configured as either tagging or untagging. The untagging feature of IEEE 802.1Q VLANs allows
VLANs to work with legacy switches that don't recognize VLAN tags in packet headers. The tagging feature al ows
VLANs to span multiple 802.1Q-compliant switches through a single physical connection and allows Spanning Tree to
be enabled on all ports and work normally. The IEEE 802.1Q standard restricts the forwarding of untagged packets to the VLAN of which the receiving port is a
member.
The main characteristics of IEEE 802.1Q are as follows:
Assigns packets to VLANs by filtering. Assumes the presence of a single global spanning
tree. Uses an explicit tagging scheme with one-level
tagging. 802.1Q VLAN Packet Forwarding Packet forwarding decisions are made based upon the
following three types of rules: Ingress rules ‚Äď rules relevant to the classification of
received frames belonging to a VLAN. Forwarding rules between ports - decides whether to
filter or forward the packet. Egress rules ‚Äď determines if the packet must be sent
tagged or untagged.

Figure 3 - 2 IEEE 802.1Q Packet Forwarding

68 DGS-3700-12/DGS-3700-12G Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Switch User Manual 802.1Q VLAN Tags The figure below shows the 802.1Q VLAN tag. There are four additional octets inserted after the source MAC
address. Their presence is indicated by a value of 0x8100 in the EtherType field. When a packet's EtherType field is
equal to 0x8100, the packet carries the IEEE 802.1Q/802.1p tag. The tag is contained in the following two octets and
consists of 3 bits of user priority, 1 bit of Canonical Format Identifier (CFI - used for encapsulating Token Ring packets
so they can be carried across Ethernet backbones), and 12 bits of VLAN ID (VID). The 3 bits of user priority are used
by 802.1p. The VID is the VLAN identifier and is used by the 802.1Q standard. Because the VID is 12 bits long, 4094
unique VLANs can be identified. The tag is inserted into the packet header making the entire packet longer by 4 octets. Al of the information original y
contained in the packet is retained.

Figure 3 - 3 IEEE 802.1Q Tag
The EtherType and VLAN ID are inserted after the MAC source address, but before the original EtherType/Length or
Logical Link Control. Because the packet is now a bit longer than it was originally, the Cyclic Redundancy Check
(CRC) must be recalculated.

Figure 3 - 4 Adding an IEEE 802.1Q Tag

69 DGS-3700-12/DGS-3700-12G Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Switch User Manual Port VLAN ID Packets that are tagged (are carrying the 802.1Q VID information) can be transmitted from one 802.1Q compliant
network device to another with the VLAN information intact. This al ows 802.1Q VLANs to span network devices (and
indeed, the entire network, if all network devices are 802.1Q compliant). Unfortunately, not al network devices are 802.1Q compliant. These devices are referred to as tag-unaware. 802.1Q
devices are referred to as tag-aware. Prior to the adoption of 802.1Q VLANs, port-based and MAC-based VLANs were in common use. These VLANs relied
upon a Port VLAN ID (PVID) to forward packets. A packet received on a given port would be assigned that port's PVID
and then be forwarded to the port that corresponded to the packet's destination address (found in the Switch's
forwarding table). If the PVID of the port that received the packet is different from the PVID of the port that is to
transmit the packet, the Switch wil drop the packet. Within the Switch, different PVIDs mean different VLANs (remember that two VLANs cannot communicate without an
external router). So, VLAN identification based upon the PVIDs cannot create VLANs that extend outside a given
switch (or switch stack). Every physical port on a switch has a PVID. 802.1Q ports are also assigned a PVID, for use within the Switch. If no
VLANs are defined on the Switch, all ports are then assigned to a default VLAN with a PVID equal to 1. Untagged
packets are assigned the PVID of the port on which they were received. Forwarding decisions are based upon this
PVID, in so far as VLANs are concerned. Tagged packets are forwarded according to the VID contained within the
tag. Tagged packets are also assigned a PVID, but the PVID is not used to make packet-forwarding decisions, the
VID is. Tag-aware switches must keep a table to relate PVIDs within the Switch to VIDs on the network. The Switch will
compare the VID of a packet to be transmitted to the VID of the port that is to transmit the packet. If the two VIDs are
different, the Switch wil drop the packet. Because of the existence of the PVID for untagged packets and the VID for
tagged packets, tag-aware and tag-unaware network devices can coexist on the same network. A switch port can have only one PVID, but can have as many VIDs as the Switch has memory in its VLAN table to
store them. Because some devices on a network may be tag-unaware, a decision must be made at each port on a tag-aware
device before packets are transmitted - should the packet to be transmitted have a tag or not? If the transmitting port
is connected to a tag-unaware device, the packet should be untagged. If the transmitting port is connected to a tag-
aware device, the packet should be tagged. Tagging and Untagging Every port on an 802.1Q compliant switch can be configured as tagging or untagging. Ports with tagging enabled wil put the VID number, priority and other VLAN information into the header of al packets
that flow into and out of it. If a packet has previously been tagged, the port wil not alter the packet, thus keeping the
VLAN information intact. Other 802.1Q compliant devices on the network to make packet-forwarding decisions can
then use the VLAN information in the tag. Ports with untagging enabled wil strip the 802.1Q tag from all packets that flow into and out of those ports. If the
packet doesn't have an 802.1Q VLAN tag, the port wil not alter the packet. Thus, all packets received by and
forwarded by an untagging port wil have no 802.1Q VLAN information. (Remember that the PVID is only used
internally within the Switch). Untagging is used to send packets from an 802.1Q-compliant network device to a non-
compliant network device. Ingress Filtering A port on a switch where packets are flowing into the Switch and VLAN decisions must be made is referred to as an
ingress port. If ingress filtering is enabled for a port, the Switch wil examine the VLAN information in the packet
header (if present) and decide whether or not to forward the packet. If the packet is tagged with VLAN information, the ingress port wil first determine if the ingress port itself is a member
of the tagged VLAN. If it is not, the packet wil be dropped. If the ingress port is a member of the 802.1Q VLAN, the
Switch then determines if the destination port is a member of the 802.1Q VLAN. If it is not, the packet is dropped. If
the destination port is a member of the 802.1Q VLAN, the packet is forwarded and the destination port transmits it to
its attached network segment. If the packet is not tagged with VLAN information, the ingress port wil tag the packet with its own PVID as a VID (if the
port is a tagging port). The switch then determines if the destination port is a member of the same VLAN (has the

70 DGS-3700-12/DGS-3700-12G Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Switch User Manual
same VID) as the ingress port. If it does not, the packet is dropped. If it has the same VID, the packet is forwarded and
the destination port transmits it on its attached network segment. This process is referred to as ingress filtering and is used to conserve bandwidth within the Switch by dropping
packets that are not on the same VLAN as the ingress port at the point of reception. This eliminates the subsequent
processing of packets that wil just be dropped by the destination port. Default VLANs The Switch initial y configures one VLAN, VID = 1, called "default." The factory default setting assigns al ports on the
Switch to the "default." As new VLANs are configured in Port-based mode, their respective member ports are removed
from the "default." Packets cannot cross VLANs. If a member of one VLAN wants to connect to another VLAN, the link must be through
an external router. NOTE: If no VLANs are configured on the Switch, then all packets wil be forwarded to any
destination port. Packets with unknown source addresses wil be flooded to all ports.

Broadcast and multicast packets wil also be flooded to all ports.
An example is presented below: VLAN Name VID Switch Ports
System (default)
1
5, 6, 7, 8, 21, 22, 23, 24
Engineering
2
9, 10, 11, 12
Marketing
3
13, 14, 15, 16
Finance
4
17, 18, 19, 20
Sales
5
1, 2, 3, 4 Table 3 - 1 VLAN Example - Assigned Ports Port-based VLANs Port-based VLANs limit traffic that flows into and out of switch ports. Thus, all devices connected to a port are
members of the VLAN(s) the port belongs to, whether there is a single computer directly connected to a switch, or an
entire department. On port-based VLANs, NICs do not need to be able to identify 802.1Q tags in packet headers. NICs send and receive
normal Ethernet packets. If the packet's destination lies on the same segment, communications take place using
normal Ethernet protocols. Even though this is always the case, when the destination for a packet lies on another
switch port, VLAN considerations come into play to decide if the packet gets dropped by the Switch or delivered. VLAN Segmentation Take for example a packet that is transmitted by a machine on Port 1 that is a member of VLAN 2. If the destination
lies on another port (found through a normal forwarding table lookup), the Switch then looks to see if the other port
(Port 10) is a member of VLAN 2 (and can therefore receive VLAN 2 packets). If Port 10 is not a member of VLAN 2,
then the packet wil be dropped by the Switch and wil not reach its destination. If Port 10 is a member of VLAN 2, the
packet wil go through. This selective forwarding feature based on VLAN criteria is how VLANs segment networks.
The key point being that Port 1 wil only transmit on VLAN 2. Network resources can be shared across VLANs. This is achieved by setting up overlapping VLANs. That is ports can
belong to more than one VLAN group. For example, by setting VLAN 1 members to ports 1, 2, 3 and 4 and VLAN 2
members to ports 1, 5, 6 and 7, Port 1 wil belong to two VLAN groups. Ports 8, 9 and 10 are not configured to any
VLAN group. This means ports 8, 9 and 10 are in the same VLAN group.

71 DGS-3700-12/DGS-3700-12G Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Switch User Manual VLAN and Trunk Groups The members of a trunk group have the same VLAN setting. Any VLAN setting on the members of a trunk group wil
apply to the other member ports. NOTE: In order to use VLAN segmentation in conjunction with port trunk groups, you can first
set the port trunk group(s), and then you may configure VLAN settings. If you wish to change
the port trunk grouping with VLANs already in place, you wil not need to reconfigure the VLAN

settings after changing the port trunk group settings. VLAN settings wil automatically change in
conjunction with the change of the port trunk group settings. Double VLANs Double or Q-in-Q VLANs allow network providers to expand their VLAN configurations to place customer VLANs
within a larger inclusive VLAN, which adds a new layer to the VLAN configuration. This basical y lets large ISP's
create L2 Virtual Private Networks and also create transparent LANs for their customers, which wil connect two or
more customer LAN points without over-complicating configurations on the client's side. Not only wil over-
complication be avoided, but also now the administrator has over 4000 VLANs in which over 4000 VLANs can be
placed, therefore greatly expanding the VLAN network and enabling greater support of customers utilizing multiple
VLANs on the network. Double VLANs are basically VLAN tags placed within existing IEEE 802.1Q VLANs which we wil call SPVIDs (Service
Provider VLAN IDs). These VLANs are marked by a TPID (Tagged Protocol ID), configured in hex form to be
encapsulated within the VLAN tag of the packet. This identifies the packet as double-tagged and segregates it from
other VLANs on the network, therefore creating a hierarchy of VLANs within a single packet. Here is an example Double VLAN tagged packet. Destination Source SPVLAN (TPID + 802.1Q CEVLAN Tag Ether Payload Address Address Service Provider (TPID + Customer VLAN Type VLAN Tag) Tag)
Consider the example below:

Figure 3 - 5 Double VLAN Example
In this example, the Service Provider Access Network switch (Provider edge switch) is the device creating and
configuring Double VLANs with different SPVIDs for specific customers (say Customer A and Customer B). Both
CEVLANs (Customer VLANs), CEVLAN 10 are tagged with the SPVID 100 (for Customer A) and SPVID 200 (for
Customer B) on the Service Provider Access Network, thus being a member of two VLANs on the Service Provider‚Äôs
network. In this way, the Customer can retain their normal VLAN ID‚Äôs and the Service Provider can seperate multiple
Customer VLANs using SPVLANs, thus greatly regulating traffic and routing on the Service Provider switch. This
information is then routed to the Service Provider‚Äôs main network and regarded there as one VLAN, with one set of
protocols and one routing behavior. Regulations for Double VLANs Some rules and regulations apply with the implementation of the Double VLAN procedure.
1. Al ports must be configured for the SPVID and its corresponding TPID on the Service Provider‚Äôs edge switch. 2. Al ports must be configured as Access Ports or Uplink ports. Access ports can only be Ethernet ports while
Uplink ports must be Gigabit ports.
3. Provider Edge switches must allow frames of at least 1522 bytes or more, due to the addition of the SPVID
tag.
4. Access Ports must be an un-tagged port of the service provider VLANs. Uplink Ports must be a tagged port of
the service provider VLANs.
5. The switch cannot have both double and normal VLANs co-existing. Once the change of VLAN is made, al
Access Control lists are cleared and must be reconfigured.
6. Once Double VLANs are enabled, GVRP must be disabled. 7. Al packets sent from the CPU to the Access ports must be untagged. 8. The following functions wil not operate when the switch is in Double VLAN mode:
‚ÄĘ Guest VLANs

Figure 3 - 6 Current 802.1Q Static VLANs Entries window
To create a new 802.1Q VLAN entry or edit an existing one, click the Add/Edit VLAN tab at the top of the 802.1Q VLAN window. A new window wil appear, as shown below, to configure the port settings and to assign a unique name
and number to the new VLAN. See the table below for a description of the parameters in the new window. NOTE: After all IP interfaces are set for your configurations, VLANs on the
switch can be routed without any additional steps.

Figure 3 - 7 802.1Q VLAN window ‚Äď Add/Edit VLAN Tab
To return to the 802.1Q VLAN window, click the VLAN List Tab at the top of the window. To change an existing
802.1Q VLAN entry, click the corresponding Edit button. A new window wil appear to configure the port settings and
to assign a unique name and number to the new VLAN. See the table below for a description of the parameters in the
new menu. NOTE: The Switch supports up to 4k static VLAN entries.

Figure 3 - 8 802.1Q VLAN window ‚Äď Edit window
The following fields can then be set in either the Add/Edit VLAN or Edit 802.1Q VLAN windows: Parameter Description VID
Al ows the entry of a VLAN ID, or displays the VLAN ID of an existing VLAN in the Edit
window. VLANs can be identified by either the VID or the VLAN name. VLAN Name
Al ows the entry of a name for a new VLAN, or modifying the VLAN name in the Edit window.
VLAN Name should be no more than 32 characters in length.

75 DGS-3700-12/DGS-3700-12G Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Switch User Manual Advertisement
Enabling this function wil allow the Switch to send out GVRP packets to outside sources,
notifying that they may join the existing VLAN. Port Settings
Al ows an individual port to be specified as member of a VLAN. Tagged
Specifies the port as 802.1Q tagged. Checking the box wil designate the port as Tagged. Untagged
Specifies the port as 802.1Q untagged. Checking the box wil designate the port as untagged. Forbidden
Select this to specify the port as not being a member of the VLAN and that the port is
forbidden from becoming a member of the VLAN dynamically. Not Member
Al ows an individual port to be specified as a non-VLAN member.
Click Apply to implement changes made.

To search for a VLAN click the Find VLAN tab at the top of the screen which wil display the following window, enter a
VLAN ID and click Find to display the settings for a previously configured VLAN.

Figure 3 - 9 802.1Q VLAN window ‚Äď Find VLAN window
To create a VLAN Batch entry click the VLAN Batch Settings tab at the top of the screen which wil display the
following window.

Figure 3 - 10 802.1Q VLAN window ‚Äď VLAN Batch Settings window
The following fields can be set in the VLAN Batch Settings windows: Parameter Description VID List (e.g 2-5)
Enter a VLAN ID List that can be added, deleted or configured. Advertisement
Enabling this function wil allow the Switch to send out GVRP packets to outside sources,
notifying that they may join the existing VLAN. Port List (e.g. 1-5)
Al ows an individual port list to be added or deleted as a member of the VLAN. Tagged
Specifies the port as 802.1Q tagged. Checking the box wil designate the port as Tagged. Untagged
Specifies the port as 802.1Q untagged. Checking the box wil designate the port as untagged. Forbidden
Select this to specify the port as not being a member of the VLAN and that the port is
forbidden from becoming a member of the VLAN dynamically.
Click Apply to implement changes made.

77 DGS-3700-12/DGS-3700-12G Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Switch User Manual Subnet VLAN Subnet VLAN Settings The subnet VLAN settings are used to create, find or delete a subnet VLAN entry. A subnet VLAN entry is an IP
subnet-based VLAN classification rule. If an untagged or priority-tagged IP packet is received on a port, its source IP
address wil be used to match the subnet VLAN entries. If the source IP is in the subnet of an entry, the packet wil be
classified to the VLAN defined for this subnet. To view this window, click L2 Features >Subnet VLAN > Subnet VLAN Settings as shown below:

Figure 3 - 11 Subnet VLAN Settings window
The following parameters can be configured: Parameter Description VLAN Name
The VLAN Name to be associated with the subnet. VLAN ID
The VLAN ID to be associated with the subnet. IPv4 Network
Is used to specify an IPv4 network address. The format is ipaddress/prefix length. The prefix Address
length of the IPv4 network address cannot be greater than 64. IPv6 Network
Is used to specify an IPv6 network address. The format is ipaddress/prefix length. The prefix Address
length of the IPv6 network address cannot be greater than 64. Priority
The priority to be associated with the subnet. Its range is 0-7.
Enter the appropriate information and click Add to create a new entry. To search for a particular entry enter the
appropriate information and click Find. To remove an entry click Delete. To view all entries on the Switch click Show
Al to remove all entries click Delete Al .

VLAN Precedence Settings The VLAN precedence settings are used to configure VLAN classification precedence on each port. You can specify
the order of MAC-based VLAN classifications and subnet VLAN classifications. If a port‚Äôs VLAN classificataion is a
MAC-based precedence, MAC-based VLAN classification wil process first. If MAC-based VLAN classification fails, the
subnet VLAN classification wil be executed. If a port‚Äôs VLAN classification is subnet VLAN precedence, the subnet
VLAN classification wil process first. If subnet VLAN classification fails, the MAC-based VLAN classification will be
executed. To view this window, click L2 Features >Subnet VLAN > VLAN Precedence Settings as shown below:

Figure 3 - 12 VLAN Precedence Settings window
The following parameters can be configured: Parameter Description From Port / To Port Specify the port or range of ports you wish to configure. VLAN Precedence
Use the drop down menu to select the VLAN precedence, choose either MAC Based VLAN or Subnet VLAN. MAC Based VLAN ‚Äď Specifies that the MAC-based VLAN classification is given precedence
over the subnet VLAN classification. Subnet VLAN ‚Äď Specifies that the subnet VLAN classification is given precedence over the
MAC-based VLAN classification.
Click Apply to implement changes made.

Q-in-Q Q-in-Q Settings This function al ows the user to enable or disable the Q-in-Q function. Q-in-Q is designed for service providers to carry
traffic from multiple users across a network. Q-in-Q is used to maintain customer specific VLAN and Layer 2 protocol
configurations even when the same VLAN ID is being used by different customers. This is achieved by inserting
SPVLAN tags into the customer‚Äôs frames when they enter the service provider‚Äôs network, and then removing the tags
when the frames leave the network. Customers of a service provider may have different or specific requirements regarding their internal VLAN IDs and the
number of VLANs that can be supported. Therefore customers in the same service provider network may have VLAN
ranges that overlap, which might cause traffic to become mixed up. So assigning a unique range of VLAN IDs to each
customer might cause restrictions on some of their configurations requiring intense processing of VLAN mapping
tables which may exceed the VLAN mapping limit. Q-in-Q uses a single service provider VLAN (SPVLAN) for
customers who have multiple VLANs. Customer‚Äôs VLAN IDs are segregated within the service provider‚Äôs network
even when they use the same customer specific VLAN ID. Q-in-Q expands the VLAN space available while preserving
the customer‚Äôs original tagged packets and adding SPVLAN tags to each new frame. To view this window, click L2 Features >QinQ > QinQ Settings as shown below:

Figure 3 - 13 QinQ Settings window
The following fields can be set: Parameter Description From Port / To Port A consecutive group of ports that are part of the VLAN configuration starting with the selected
port. Role
The user can choose between UNI or NNI role. UNI ‚Äď To select a user-network interface which specifies that communication between the
specified user and a specified network wil occur. NNI ‚Äď To select a network-to-network interface specifies that communication between two
specified networks wil occur. Missdrop
Use the drop down menu to enable or disable missdrop. If missdrop is enabled, the packet
that does not match any assignment rule in the Q-in-Q profile wil be dropped. If disabled, then
the packet wil be assigned to the PVID of the receiving port. Outer TPID
The Outer TPID is used for learning and switching packets. Use Inner Priority
The priority given to the inner tag wil be copied to the outer tag if this setting is enabled. Add Inner Tag(hex: Specify whether to add inner tag for ingress untagged packets. If set, the inner tag wil be 0x1-0xffff)
added for the ingress untagged packets and thus the packets egress to the NNI port wil be
double tagged.
Click Apply to implement changes.

VLAN Translation Settings VLAN translation translates the VLAN ID carried in the data packets it receives from private networks into those used
in the Service Providers network. To view this window, click L2 Features > QinQ > VLAN Translation Settings as shown below:

Figure 3 - 14 VLAN Translation Settings window
The following fields can be set: Parameter Description From Port / To Port A consecutive group of ports that are part of the VLAN configuration starting with the selected
port. CVID (1-4094)
The customer VLAN ID List to which the tagged packets wil be added. Action
Specify if you want SPVID packets to be added or replaced. SPVID (1-4094)
This configures the VLAN to join the Service Providers VLAN as a tagged member. Priority (0-7)
Select a priority for the VLAN ranging from 0-7. With 7 having the highest priority.
Click Apply to make a new entry and Delete All to remove a VLAN Translation entry.

81 DGS-3700-12/DGS-3700-12G Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Switch User Manual 802.1v Protocol VLAN 802.1v Protocol Group Settings The table al ows the user to create Protocol VLAN groups and add protocols to that group. The 802.1v Protocol VLAN
Group Settings supports multiple VLANs for each protocol and al ows the user to configure the untagged ports of
different protocols on the same physical port. For example it allows the user to configure an 802.1Q and 802.1v
untagged port on the same physical port. The lower half of the table displays any previously created groups. To view this window, click L2 Features > 802.1v Protocol VLAN > 802.1v Protocol Group Settings as shown
below:

Figure 3 - 15 802.1v Protocol Group Settings window
The following fields can be set: Parameter Description Group ID
Select an ID number for the group, between 1 and 16.Group Name
This is used to identify the new Protocol VLAN group. Type an alphanumeric string of up to 32
characters. Protocol
This function maps packets to protocol-defined VLANs by examining the type octet within the
packet header to discover the type of protocol associated with it. Use the drop-down menu to
toggle between Ethernet_II, IEEE802.3_LLC and IEEE802.3_SNAP. Protocol Value
Enter a value for the Group. (0-FFFF)
Click Add to make a new entry and Delete Al to remove an entry.

Figure 3 - 16 Protocol VLAN Settings window
The following fields can be set: Parameter Description Group ID
Click the corresponding radio button to select a previously configured Group ID from the drop-
down menu. Group Name
Click the corresponding radio button to select a previously configured Group Name from the
drop-down menu. VID (1-4094)
Click the radio button to enter the VID. This is the VLAN ID that, along with the VLAN Name,
identifies the VLAN the user wishes to create. VLAN Name
Click the radio button to enter a VLAN Name. This is the VLAN Name that, along with the
VLAN ID, identifies the VLAN the user wishes to create. 802.1p Priority
This parameter is specified if you want to re-write the 802.1p default priority previously set in
the Switch, which is used to determine the CoS queue to which packets are forwarded to.
Once this field is specified, packets accepted by the Switch that match this priority are
forwarded to the CoS queue specified previously by the user. Click the corresponding box if you want to set the 802.1p default priority of a packet to the
value entered in the Priority (0-7) field, which meets the criteria specified previously in this
command, before forwarding it on to the specified CoS queue. Otherwise, a packet wil have
its incoming 802.1p user priority re-written to its original value before being forwarded by the
Switch. For more information on priority queues, CoS queues and mapping for 802.1p, see the QoS
section of this manual. Port List (e.g.: 1-6) Select the specified ports you wish to configure by entering the port number in this field, or
check the Select Al Ports box. Search Port List
This function al ows the user to search all previously configured port list settings and display
them on the lower half of the table. To search for a port list enter the port number you wish to
view and click Find. To display al previously configured port lists on the bottom half of the
screen click the Show Al button, to clear al previously configured lists click the Delete All
button.

83 DGS-3700-12/DGS-3700-12G Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Switch User Manual RSPAN Settings This table controls the RSPAN function. The purpose of the RSPAN function is to mirror the packets to a remote
switch. The packet travels from the switch where the monitored packet is received, through the intermediate switch,
then to the switch where the sniffer is attached. The first switch is also named the source switch. RSPAN VLAN
mirroring wil only work when RSPAN Global Settings are enabled. RSPAN redirect function wil work when RSPAN is
enabled and at least one RSPAN VLAN has been configured with redirect ports. To view this window, click L2 Features > RSPAN Settings as shown below:

GVRP Settings The table allows the user to determine whether the Switch wil share its VLAN configuration information with other
GARP VLAN Registration Protocol (GVRP) enabled switches. In addition, Ingress Checking can be used to limit traffic
by filtering incoming packets whose PVID do not match the PVID of the port. Results can be seen in the table under
the configuration settings, as seen below. To view this window, click L2 Features > GVRP Settings as shown below:

Figure 3 - 19 GVRP Settings window

84 DGS-3700-12/DGS-3700-12G Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Switch User Manual
The following fields can be set: Parameter Description From Port / To Port These two fields allow you to specify the range of ports that wil be included in the Port-based
VLAN that you are creating using the 802.1Q Port Settings window. GVRP
The Group VLAN Registration Protocol (GVRP) enables the port to dynamically become a
member of a VLAN. GVRP is Disabled by default. PVID
The read-only field in the 802.1Q Port Table shows the current PVID assignment for each
port, which may be manual y assigned to a VLAN when created in the 802.1Q Port Settings
table. The Switch's default is to assign al ports to the default VLAN with a VID of 1. The PVID
is used by the port to tag outgoing, untagged packets, and to make filtering decisions about
incoming packets. If the port is specified to accept only tagged frames - as tagging, and an
untagged packet is forwarded to the port for transmission, the port wil add an 802.1Q tag
using the PVID to write the VID in the tag. When the packet arrives at its destination, the
receiving device wil use the PVID to make VLAN forwarding decisions. If the port receives a
packet, and Ingress filtering is enabled, the port wil compare the VID of the incoming packet
to its PVID. If the two are unequal, the port wil drop the packet. If the two are equal, the port
wil receive the packet. Ingress Check
This field can be toggled using the space bar between Enabled and Disabled. Enabled
enables the port to compare the VID tag of an incoming packet with the PVID number
assigned to the port. If the two are different, the port filters (drops) the packet. Disabled
disables ingress filtering. Ingress Checking is Disabled by default. Acceptable Frame
This field denotes the type of frame that wil be accepted by the port. The user may choose Type
between Tagged Only, which means only VLAN tagged frames wil be accepted, and Admit_All, which mean both tagged and untagged frames wil be accepted. Admit_All is
enabled by default.
Click Apply to implement changes made.

GVRP Global Settings The GVRP allows interoperability with other switches, so the values of the GVRP timers can be configured. This table
is used to set the GVRP Global Settings. To view this window, click L2 Features > GVRP Global Settings as shown below:

Figure 3 - 20 GVRP Timer Settings window
The following fields can be set: Parameter Description Join Time
The time in mil iseconds that specifies the amount of time between the Switch receiving the (100-100000)
information about becoming a member of the group and actually joining the group. The default
is 200. Leave Time
The time in mil iseconds that specifies the maximum amount of time between the Switch (100-100000)
receiving a leave group message from a host, and the Switch issuing a group membership
query. The default is 600. The Leave Time must be greater than 2 join times.

85 DGS-3700-12/DGS-3700-12G Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Switch User Manual Leave Al Time
The time in mil iseconds that specifies the amount of time the Switch wil take to Leave Al (100-100000)
groups. The default is 10000. The Leave Al Time must be greater than the Leave Time. NNI BPDU
This specifies the GVRP‚Äôs pdu MAC address of the NNI port. Address Dot1d ‚Äď Specifies GVRP‚Äôs pdu MAC address of NNI port using 802.1d. Dot1ad ‚Äď Specifies GVRP‚Äôs pdu MAC address of NNI port using 802.1ad.
Click Apply to implement changes made.

MAC-based VLAN Settings This table is used to create MAC-based VLAN entries on the switch. A MAC Address can be mapped to any existing
static VLAN and multiple MAC addresses can be mapped to the same VLAN. When a static MAC-based VLAN entry
is created for a user, the traffic from this user is able to be serviced under the specified VLAN regardless of the
authentiucation function operated on the port. Therefore each entry specifies a relationship of a source MAC address
with a VLAN. To view this window, click L2 Features > MAC-based VLAN Settings as shown below:

Figure 3 - 21 MAC-based VLAN Settings window
The following fields can be set Parameter Description MAC Address
Specify the MAC address to be reauthenticated by entering it into the MAC Address field. VLAN Name
Enter the VLAN name of a previously configured VLAN.
Click Find, Add or Delete All for changes to take affect. PVID Auto Assign Settings

This commands Enables or Disables PVID Auto Assign on the Switch. PVID is the VLAN that the switch wil use for
forwarding and filtering purposes. If PVID Auto-Assign is Enabled, PVID wil be possibly changed by previously set
PVID or VLAN configurations. When a user configures a port to VLAN X‚Äôs untagged membership, this port‚Äôs PVID wil
be updated with VLAN X. In the form of a VLAN list command, PVID is updated with the last item on the VLAN list.
When a user removes a port from the untagged membership of the PVID‚Äôs VLAN, the port‚Äôs PVID wil be assigned to a
default VLAN. When PVID Auto Assign is Disabled, PVID can only be changed by PVID configuration (user changes
explicitly). The VLAN configuration wil not automatically change the PVID. The default setting is Enabled. To view this window, click L2 Features > PVID Auto Assign Settings as shown below:

Figure 3 - 22 PVID Auto Assign Settings window

86 DGS-3700-12/DGS-3700-12G Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Switch User Manual Port Trunking Understanding Port Trunk Groups Port trunk groups are used to combine a number of ports together to make a single high-bandwidth data pipeline.
DGS-3700 Series supports up to 6 port trunk groups with 2 to 8 ports in each group. A potential bit rate of 8000 Mbps
can be achieved.

Figure 3 - 23 Example of Port Trunk Group
The Switch treats all ports in a trunk group as a single port. Data transmitted to a specific host (destination address)
wil always be transmitted over the same port in a trunk group. This allows packets in a data stream to arrive in the
same order they were sent. NOTE: If any ports within the trunk group become disconnected, packets intended for the
disconnected ports wil be load shared among the other unlinked ports of the link aggregation

group.
Link aggregation al ows several ports to be grouped together and to act as a single link. This gives a bandwidth that is
a multiple of a single link's bandwidth. Link aggregation is most commonly used to link a bandwidth intensive network device or devices, such as a server, to
the backbone of a network. The Switch al ows the creation of up to 6 link aggregation groups, each group consisting of 2 to 8 links (ports). The
aggregated links must be contiguous (they must have sequential port numbers) except the four (optional) Gigabit
ports, which can only belong to a single link aggregation group. Al of the ports in the group must be members of the

87 DGS-3700-12/DGS-3700-12G Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Switch User Manual
same VLAN, and their STP status, static multicast, traffic control; traffic segmentation and 802.1p default priority
configurations must be identical. Port locking, port mirroring and 802.1X must not be enabled on the trunk group.
Further, the aggregated links must all be of the same speed and should be configured as full duplex. The Master Port of the group is to be configured by the user, and all configuration options, including the VLAN
configuration that can be applied to the Master Port, are applied to the entire link aggregation group. Load balancing is automatically applied to the ports in the aggregated group, and a link failure within the group causes
the network traffic to be directed to the remaining links in the group. The Spanning Tree Protocol wil treat a link aggregation group as a single link, on the switch level. On the port level,
the STP wil use the port parameters of the Master Port in the calculation of port cost and in determining the state of
the link aggregation group. If two redundant link aggregation groups are configured on the Switch, STP wil block one
entire group; in the same way STP wil block a single port that has a redundant link. To view this window, click L2 Features > Port Trunking as shown below:

Figure 3 - 24Port Trunking window
The following fields can be set Parameter Description Algorithm
The algorithm that the Switch uses to balance the load across the ports that make up the port
trunk group is defined by this definition. Choose MAC Source, MAC Destination, MAC Source Dest, IP Source, IP Destination or IP Source Dest (See the Link Aggregation section of this
manual). Group ID
Select an ID number for the group, between 1 and 6. Type
This pull-down menu al ows you to select between Static and LACP (Link Aggregation Control
Protocol). LACP al ows for the automatic detection of links in a Port Trunking Group. Master Port
Choose the Master Port for the trunk group using the pull-down menu. State
Trunk groups can be toggled between Enabled and Disabled. This is used to turn a port
trunking group on or off. This is useful for diagnostics, to quickly isolate a bandwidth intensive
network device or to have an absolute backup aggregation group that is not under automatic
control. Active Port
Shows the port that is currently forwarding packets. Member Ports
Choose the members of a trunked group. Up to eight ports per group can be assigned to a
group. Flooding Port
A trunking group must designate one port to al ow transmission of broadcasts and unknown
unicasts.
Click Apply to implement changes made.

88 DGS-3700-12/DGS-3700-12G Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Switch User Manual LACP Port Settings The LACP Port Settings window is used to create port trunking groups on the Switch. Using the following window,
the user may set which ports wil be active and passive in processing and sending LACP control frames. To view this window, click L2 Features > LACP Port Settings as shown below:

Figure 3 - 25 LACP Port Settings window
The following fields can be set Parameter Description From Port / To Port A consecutive group of ports may be configured starting with the selected port. Activity Active ‚Äď Active LACP ports are capable of processing and sending LACP control frames. This
allows LACP compliant devices to negotiate the aggregated link so the group may be
changed dynamically as needs require. In order to utilize the ability to change an aggregated
port group, that is, to add or subtract ports from the group, at least one of the participating
devices must designate LACP ports as active. Both devices must support LACP. Passive ‚Äď LACP ports that are designated as passive cannot initially send LACP control
frames. In order to al ow the linked port group to negotiate adjustments and make changes
dynamically, one end of the connection must have "active" LACP ports (see above).
Click Apply to implement changes made.

89 DGS-3700-12/DGS-3700-12G Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Switch User Manual Traffic Segmentation Traffic segmentation is used to limit traffic flow from a single port to a group of ports on either a single switch or a
group of ports on another switch in a switch stack. This method of segmenting the flow of traffic is similar to using
VLANs to limit traffic, but is more restrictive. It provides a method of directing traffic that does not increase the
overhead of the Master switch CPU. This page allows you to view which port on a given switch wil be allowed to
forward packets to other ports on that switch. Select a port number from the drop down menu todisplay the forwarding
ports. To configure new forwarding ports for a particular port, select a port from the menu and click Apply. To view this window, click L2 Features > Traffic Segmentation as shown below:

Figure 3 - 26 Traffic Segmentation window
The following fields can be set Parameter Description From Port / To Port Check the corresponding boxes for the port(s) to transmit packets. Forward Portlist
Check the boxes to select which of the ports on the Switch wil be able to forward packets.
These ports wil be al owed to receive packets from the port specified above.
Clicking the Apply button wil enter the combination of transmitting port and al owed receiving ports into the Switch's Current Traffic Segmentation Table.

90 DGS-3700-12/DGS-3700-12G Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Switch User Manual BPDU Tunneling Settings This table is used to configure the BPDU Tunneling port types. When the device is operated with Q-in-Q enabled, DA
wil be replaced by the tunnel multicast address, and the BPDU wil be tagged with the tunnel VLAN based on the Q-
in-Q VLAN configuration and the tunnel/uplink setting. When the device is operated without Q-in-Q enabled, the BPDU
wil have its DA replaced by the tunnel multicast address and be transmitted out based on the VLAN configuration and
the tunnel/uplink setting. The tunnel multicast address for STP BPDU is 01-05-5d-00-00-00. The tunnel multicast
address for GVRP BPDU is 01-05-5d-00-00-21. To view this window, click L2 Features > BPDU Tunneling Settings as shown below:

Figure 3 - 27 BPDU Tunneling window
Select the ports and port types on which the BPDU tunneling wil be enabled or disabled and click Apply.

91 DGS-3700-12/DGS-3700-12G Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Switch User Manual IGMP Snooping Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) snooping al ows the Switch to recognize IGMP queries and reports sent
between network stations or devices and an IGMP host. When enabled for IGMP snooping, the Switch can open or
close a port to a specific device based on IGMP messages passing through the Switch. In order to use IGMP Snooping it must first be enabled for the entire Switch (see the DGS-3700-12/DGS-3700-12G Switch Series Web Management Tool). You may then fine-tune the settings for each VLAN using the IGMP Snooping link in the L2 Features folder. When enabled for IGMP snooping, the Switch can open or close a port to a
specific multicast group member based on IGMP messages sent from the device to the IGMP host or vice versa. The
Switch monitors IGMP messages and discontinues forwarding multicast packets when there are no longer hosts
requesting that they continue. IGMP Snooping Settings Use the IGMP Snooping Settings window to enable or disable IGMP Snooping on the Switch. To modify the settings,
click the Edit button under Parameter Settings and a new table wil appear for the user to configure. To view this window, click L2 Features > IGMP Snooping > IGMP Snooping Settings as shown below:

Figure 3 - 28 IGMP Snooping Settings window
Clicking the Edit button wil open the IGMP Snooping Parameters Settings window, shown below: Figure 3 - 29 IGMP Snooping Parameters Settings - Edit window
The following fields can be set: Parameter Description VLAN ID
This is the VLAN ID that, along with the VLAN Name, identifies the VLAN for which the user
wishes to modify the IGMP Snooping Settings. VLAN Name
This is the VLAN Name that, along with the VLAN ID, identifies the VLAN for which the user
wishes to modify the IGMP Snooping Settings. Rate Limit
Displays the rate limitation. Querier IP
The querier IP address to send IGMP queries. Querier Expiry
Displays the querier expiry time.

92 DGS-3700-12/DGS-3700-12G Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Switch User Manual Time Query Interval
The Query Interval field is used to set the time (in seconds) between transmitting IGMP (1-65535)
queries. Entries between 1 and 65535 seconds are allowed. Default = 125. Max Response
This determines the maximum amount of time in seconds allowed before sending an IGMP Time
response report. The Max Response Time field allows an entry between 1 and 25 (seconds). (1-25)
Default = 10. Robustness Value Adjust this variable according to expected packet loss. If packet loss on the VLAN is expected (1-255)
to be high, the Robustness Variable should be increased to accommodate increased packet
loss. This entry field allows an entry of 1 to 255. Default = 2. Last Member
This field specifies the maximum amount of time between group-specific query messages, Query Interval
including those sent in response to leave group messages. Default = 1. (1-25 Sec) Data Driven Group Al ows the user to set the time that an IGMP Snooping data driven learning group wil expire for Expiry Time (1-
the specified VLAN. 65535) Querier State
Choose Enabled to enable transmitting IGMP Query packets or Disabled to disable. The
default is Disabled. Fast Leave
This parameter allows the user to enable the Fast Leave function. Enabled, this function wil
allow members of a multicast group to leave the group immediately (without the
implementation of the Last Member Query Timer) when an IGMP Leave Report Packet is
received by the Switch. The default is Disabled. State
Select Enabled to implement IGMP Snooping. This field is Disabled by default. Report
Select Enable or Disable for IGMP Snooping report suppression for specified VLANs. Suppression Data Driven
Al ows users to enable or disable IGMP snooping data driven learning for the specified VLAN. Learning State

Data Driven
Al ows users to enable or disable aged_out of IGMP Snooping data driven learning for the Learning Aged Out specified VLAN. Version
Al ows the user to configure the IGMP version used on the Switch. The default value is 3. Querier Role
This read-only field describes the behavior of the router for sending query packets. Querier wil
denote that the router is sending out IGMP query packets. Non-Querier wil denote that the
router is not sending out IGMP query packets. This field wil only read Querier when the
Querier State and the State fields have been Enabled.
To modify the IGMP Snooping Router IP Settings click on the hyperlinked Modify Router Port which will show the
following window for the user to configure:

Figure 3 - 31 IGMP Snooping Rate Limit Settings window
The following parameters can be configured: Parameter Description Port List
Specifies a port or range of ports that wil be configured. VLAN List
Specifies a VLAN or range of VLANs that wil be configured. Rate Limit (1-1000) Configures the rate of IGMP control packets that are al owed per port or VLAN.
Click Apply to implement changes made.

IGMP Snooping Static Group Settings This table is used to configure the current IGMP snooping static group information on the Switch. To view this window, click L2 Features > IGMP Snooping > IGMP Snooping Static Group Settings as shown below:

Figure 3 - 32 IGMP Snooping Static Group Settings window
The following parameters can be configured: Parameter Description VLAN Name
The name of the VLAN for which to create IGMP snooping static group information. VLAN List
The list of the VLAN IDs for which to create IGMP snooping static group information. IPv4 Address
The static group address for which to create IGMP snooping static group information.
Click Apply to implement changes made. To search for an entry enter the appropriate information and click Find, to
remove and entry enter the appropriate information and click Delete.

Figure 3 - 33 IGMP Multicast Group Profile Settings window
To configure the multicast address list once a profile has been created, click on the hyperlinked Group List to reveal
the following window:

Figure 3 - 34 IGMP Multicast Group Profile Settings window ‚Äď Group List
Enter the Multicast Address List and click Add the new information wil be displayed in the table. Click <<Back to
return to the IGMP Multicast Group Profile Settings window and click Delete to remove an entry.

Figure 3 - 35 IGMP Snooping Multicast VLAN Settings window
The following fields can be set Parameter Description VLAN Name
This is the VLAN Name that, along with the VLAN ID, identifies the VLAN the user wishes to
modify the IGMP Snooping Settings for. VID (2-4094)
This is the VLAN ID that, along with the VLAN Name, identifies the VLAN the user wishes to
modify the IGMP Snooping Settings for.

95 DGS-3700-12/DGS-3700-12G Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Switch User Manual State
Use the drop-down menu to toggle between Enabled and Disabled.Replace Source IP Enter an IP address that new IP address to be used. Member Port
Select the ports that wil be members of the Multicast VLAN. (Eg. Ports 1 to 4 and port 6) (e.g.:1-4,6) Source Port
Select the source Port for the Multicast VLAN. (e.g.:1-4,6) Tagged Member
Select the ports that wil be tagged as members of the VLAN. Port (e.g.:1-4,6)
To modify an entry click the corresponding Modify, To edit and entry click the corresponding Edit button and to delete
an entry click the corresponding Delete button. IPv4 Multicast Profile Settings The IPv4 Multicast Profile Settings window al ows the user to add a profile to which multicast IPv4 address(es)
reports are to be received on specified ports or VLANs on the Switch. This function wil therefore limit the number of
reports received and the number of multicast groups configured on the Switch. The user may set an IP Multicast
address or range of IPv4 Multicast addresses to accept reports (Permit) or deny reports (Deny) coming into the
specified switch ports or VLANs. To view this window, click L2 Features > IGMP Snooping > IPv4 Multicast Profile Settings as shown below:

Figure 3 - 36 IPv4 Multicast Profile Settings window
The following fields can be set Parameter Description Profile ID
Use the drop-down menu to choose a Profile ID. Profile Name
Enter a name for the IPv4 Multicast Profile.
To edit and entry click the corresponding Edit button and to delete an entry click the corresponding Delete button.

IPv4 Limited Multicast Range Settings The IPv4 Limited Multicast Range Settings enables the user to configure the ports or VLANs on the switch that wil
be involved in the Limited IPv4 Multicast Range. The user can configure the range of IPv4 multicast addresses that
wil be accepted on the ports or VLANs. To configure these settings, click L2 Features > IGMP Snooping > IPv4 Limited Multicast Range Settings.

IPv4 Max Multicast Group Settings The IPv4 MaxMulticast Group Settings allows users to configure the ports on the switch that wil be apart of the
max number of multicast groups that can be learned by data driven. To view this window, click L2 Features > IGMP Snooping > IPv4 Max Multicast Group Settings as shown below:

97 DGS-3700-12/DGS-3700-12G Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Switch User Manual MLD Snooping Multicast Listener Discovery (MLD) Snooping is an IPv6 function used similarly to IGMP snooping in IPv4. It is used to
discover ports on a VLAN that are requesting multicast data. Instead of flooding all ports on a selected VLAN with
multicast traffic, MLD snooping wil only forward multicast data to ports that wish to receive this data through the use
of queries and reports produced by the requesting ports and the source of the multicast traffic. MLD snooping is accomplished through the examination of the layer 3 part of an MLD control packet transferred
between end nodes and a MLD router. When the Switch discovers that this route is requesting multicast traffic, it adds
the port directly attached to it into the correct IPv6 multicast table, and begins the process of forwarding multicast
traffic to that port. This entry in the multicast routing table records the port, the VLAN ID and the associated multicast
IPv6 multicast group address and then considers this port to be a active listening port. The active listening ports are
the only ones to receive multicast group data. MLD Control Messages Three types of messages are transferred between devices using MLD snooping. These three messages are all
defined by three ICMPv6 packet headers, labeled 130, 131 and 132.
1. Multicast Listener Query ‚Äď Similar to the IGMPv2 Host Membership Query for IPv4, and labeled as 130 in
the ICMPv6 packet header, this message is sent by the router to ask if any link is requesting multicast data.
There are two types of MLD query messages emitted by the router. The General Query is used to advertise all
multicast addresses that are ready to send multicast data to al listening ports, and the Multicast Specific
query, which advertises a specific multicast address that is ready. These two types of messages are
distinguished by a multicast destination address located in the IPv6 header and a multicast address in the
Multicast Listener Query Message.
2. Multicast Listener Report ‚Äď Comparable to the Host Membership Report in IGMPv2, and labeled as 131 in
the ICMP packet header, this message is sent by the listening host to the Switch stating that it is interested in
receiving multicast data from a multicast address in response to the Multicast Listener Query message.
3. Multicast Listener Done ‚Äď Akin to the Leave Group Message in IGMPv2, and labeled as 132 in the ICMPv6
packet header, this message is sent by the multicast listening host stating that it is no longer interested in
receiving multicast data from a specific multicast group address, therefore stating that it is ‚Äúdone‚ÄĚ with the
multicast data from this address. Once this message is received by the Switch, it wil no longer forward
multicast traffic from a specific multicast group address to this listening host. MLD Snooping Settings This table is used to enable MLD Snooping on the Switch and to configure the settings for MLD snooping. To view this window, click L2 Features > MLD Snooping > MLD Snooping Settings, as shown below:

Figure 3 - 42 MLD Snooping Parameters Settings ‚Äď Edit window
The following parameters may be viewed or modified: Parameter Description VLAN ID
This is the VLAN ID that, along with the VLAN Name, identifies the VLAN for which
to modify the MLD Snooping Settings. VLAN Name
This is the VLAN Name that, along with the VLAN ID, identifies the VLAN for which
to modify the MLD Snooping Settings. Query Expiry Time
Displays the query expiry time in seconds. Query Interval (1-65535 sec) Al ows the entry of a value between 1 and 65535 seconds, with a default of 125
seconds. This specifies the length of time between sending IGMP queries. Max Response Time
This determines the maximum amount of time in seconds allowed to wait for a (1-25 sec)
response for MLD port listeners. The Max Response Time field al ows an entry
between 1 and 25 (seconds). Default = 10. Robustness Value (1-255)
Provides fine-tuning to allow for expected packet loss on a subnet. The user may
choose a value between 1 and 255 with a default setting of 2. If a subnet is expected
to be lossy, the user may wish to increase this interval. Last Listener Query Interval
Specifies the maximum amount of time between group-specific query messages, (1-25 sec)
including those sent in response to leave group messages. A value between 1 and
25. The default is 1 second. Data Driven Group Expiry
Specifies the data driven group expiry, in seconds. The user may specify a time Time (1-65535)
between 1 and 65535 with a default setting of 260 seconds. Querier State
The default is Disabled. If the field displays ‚ÄúDisabled‚ÄĚ, it wil always be in MLD-
Snooping non-querier state. Fast Done
Used to enable or disable the fast done state of the switch. This field is disabled by
default. State
Used to enable or disable MLD snooping for the specified VLAN. This field is Disabled by default. Report Suppression
Used to enable or disable MLD Snooping report suppression for the specified VLAN. Data Driven Learning State
If the state is Enabled, it al ows the switch to be selected as a MLD Querier (sends
MLD query packets). It the state is Disabled, then the switch cannot play the role as
a querier. Data Driven Learning Aged
Used to Enable or Disable the aging out of MLD Snooping data driven learning for Out
the specified VLAN. Version
Used to configure the version of MLD used on switch. The default value is 2. Querier Role
This read-only field describes the current querier state of the Switch, whether
Querier, which wil send out Multicast Listener Query Messages to links, or Non-
Querier, which wil not send out Multicast Listener Query Messages.

MLD Snooping Rate Limit Settings This window is used to configure the rate of MLD control packets that are allowed per port or per VLAN. To view this window, click L2 Features > MLD Snooping > MLD Snooping Rate Limit Settings, as shown below:

Figure 3 - 44 MLD Snooping Rate Limit Settings window
The following parameters may be viewed or modified: Parameter Description Port List
Specifies a port or range ports to configure or display. VLAN List
Specifies a VLAN or range of VLANs to configure or display. Rate Limit
Specifies the rate of MLD control packets that the switch can process on a specific port.
The rate is specified in packets per second. The packet that exceeds the limited rate wil be
dropped. The default setting is No Limit.
Click Apply to implement new changes. To modify the rate limit click the corresponding Edit button.

MLD Snooping Static Group Settings This window is used to configure the MLD Snooping static group information on the Swtich: To view this window, click L2 Features > MLD Snooping > MLD Snooping Static Group Settings, as shown below

Figure 3 - 46 MLD Snooping Static Group Settings window
The following parameters may be viewed or modified: Parameter Description VLAN Name
Specifies the name of the VLAN for which to configure the MLD snooping static group
information. VLAN List
Specifies the list of the VLAN IDs for which to configure the MLD snooping static group
information. IPv6 Address
Specifies the static group IPv6 address for which to configure the MLD snooping static
group information.
Click Create to create a new entry. To search for an entry enter the information and click Find. To view al previously
configured entries click View All.

MLD Multicast Group Profile Settings This table allows the user to create MLD multicast group profiles and specify multicast address lists on the Switch. To view this window, click L2 Features > MLD Snooping > MLD Multicast Group Profile Settings as shown below:

Figure 3 - 47 MLD Multicast Group Profile Settings window
To configure the group list once a profile has been created, click on the hyperlinked Group List to reveal the following
window:

Figure 3 - 48 Multicast Group Profile Multicast Address Settings window ‚Äď Group List
Enter the Multicast Address List and click Add the new information wil be displayed in the table. Click <<Back to
return to the IGMP Multicast Group Profile Settings window and click Delete to remove an entry.

Figure 3 - 49 MLD Snooping Multicast VLAN Settings window
The following fields can be set: Parameter Description VLAN Name
This is the VLAN Name that, along with the VLAN ID, identifies the VLAN the user wishes to
modify the MLD Snooping Settings for. VID (2-4094)
This is the VLAN ID that, along with the VLAN Name, identifies the VLAN the user wishes to
modify the MLD Snooping Settings for. State
Use the drop-down menu to toggle between Enabled and Disabled.Replace Source IP Enter an IP address that new IP address to be used. Member Port
Select the ports that wil be members of the Multicast VLAN. (Eg. Ports 1 to 4 and port 6) (e.g.:1,6) Source Port
Select the source Port for the Multicast VLAN. (e.g.:1,6)

102 DGS-3700-12/DGS-3700-12G Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Switch User Manual Tagged Member
Select the ports that wil be tagged as members of the VLAN. Port (e.g.:1-4,6)
To modify an entry click the corresponding Modify button. To remove an entry click the corresponding Delete button.

IPv6 Multicast Profile Settings The IPv6 Multicast Profile Settings window al ows the user to add a profile to which multicast IPv6 address(es)
reports are to be received on specified ports or VLANs on the Switch. This function wil therefore limit the number of
reports received and the number of multicast groups configured on the Switch. The user may set an IP Multicast
address or range of IPv6 Multicast addresses to accept reports (Permit) or deny reports (Deny) coming into the
specified switch ports or VLANs. To view this window, click L2 Features > MLD Snooping > IPv6 Multicast Profile Settings as shown below:

Figure 3 - 50 IPv6 Multicast Profile Settings window
The following fields can be set: Parameter Description Profile ID
Use the drop-down menu to choose a Profile ID. Profile Name
Enter a name for the IPv6 Multicast Profile.
To edit an entry click the corresponding Edit button and to delete an entry, click the corresponding Delete button.

IPv6 Max Multicast Group Settings The IPv6 MaxMulticast Group Settings allows users to configure the ports or VLANs on the switch that wil be apart
of the max number of multicast groups that can be learned. To view this window, click L2 Features > MLD Snooping > IPv6 Max Multicast Group Settings as shown below:

Figure 3 - 54 IPv6 Max Multicast Group Settings window
To add a new IPv6 Max Multicast Group enter the information and click Apply, to search for an entry enter the
information and click Find.

104 DGS-3700-12/DGS-3700-12G Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Switch User Manual Port Mirror The Switch al ows you to copy frames transmitted and received on a port and redirect the copies to another port. You
can attach a monitoring device to the mirrored port, such as a sniffer or an RMON probe, to view details about the
packets passing through the first port. This is useful for network monitoring and troubleshooting purposes. To view this window, click L2 Features > Port Mirror as shown below:

Figure 3 - 55 Port Mirror window To configure a mirror port:
1. Change the status to Enabled. 2. Select theSource Port from where you want to the frames to come from. 3. Select the Target Port, which receives the copies from the source port. 4. Click Apply to let the changes take effect.

NOTE: You cannot mirror a fast port onto a slower port. For example, if you try to mirror the
traffic from a 100 Mbps port onto a 10 Mbps port, this can cause throughput problems. The port
you are copying frames from should always support an equal or lower speed than the port to

which you are sending the copies. Also, the target port for the mirroring cannot be a member of
a trunk group. Please note a target port and a source port cannot be the same port.

105 DGS-3700-12/DGS-3700-12G Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Switch User Manual Loopback Detection Settings The Loopback Detection function is used to detect the loop created by a specific port. This feature is used to
temporarily shutdown a port on the Switch when a loop detecting packet has been looped back to the switch. When
the Switch detects that these packets are received from a port or a VLAN, it signifies a loop on the network. The
Switch wil automatically block the port or the VLAN and send an alert to the administrator. The Loopback Detection
port wil restart (change to discarding state) when the Loopback Detection Recover Time times out. The Loopback
Detection function can be implemented on a range of ports at a time. The user may enable or disable this function
using the pul -down menu. To view this window, click L2 Features > Loopback Detection Settings as shown below:

Figure 3 - 56 Loopback Detection Settings window
The following parameters can be configured: Parameter Description LBD State
Used to Enable or Disable loopback detection. The default is Disabled.Mode
Use the drop-down menu to toggle between Port Based and VLAN Based. Interval (1-32767)
Set a Loopdetect Interval between 1 and 32767 seconds. The default is 10 seconds. Trap Status
Select the trap status, choose None, Loop Detected, Loop Cleared or Both. Recover Time
Time allowed (in seconds) for recovery when a Loopback is detected. The Loopdetect (0 or 60-1000000)
Recover Time can be set at 0 seconds, or 60 to 1000000 seconds. Entering 0 will disable the
Loopdetect Recover Time. The default is 60 seconds. From Port / To Port Use the drop-down menu to select a beginning and ending port number. State
Use the drop-down menu to toggle between Enabled and Disabled.
Click Apply to implement changes made.

106 DGS-3700-12/DGS-3700-12G Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Switch User Manual Spanning Tree This Switch supports three versions of the Spanning Tree Protocol; 802.1D-2004 STP compatible, 802.11d-2004
Rapid STP and 802.1q-2005 MSTP. 802.1D STP wil be familiar to most networking professionals. However, since
802.1w RSTP has been recently introduced to D-Link managed Ethernet switches, a brief introduction to the
technology is provided below followed by a description of how to set up 802.1D STP and 802.1w RSTP. 802.1w Rapid Spanning Tree The Switch implements two versions of the Spanning Tree Protocol, the Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP) as
defined by the IEEE 802.1w specification and a version compatible with the IEEE 802.1D STP. RSTP can operate
with legacy equipment implementing IEEE 802.1D, however the advantages of using RSTP wil be lost. The IEEE 802.1w Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP) evolved from the 802.1D STP standard. RSTP was
developed in order to overcome some limitations of STP that impede the function of some recent switching
innovations, in particular, certain Layer 3 functions that are increasingly handled by Ethernet switches. The basic
function and much of the terminology is the same as STP. Most of the settings configured for STP are also used for
RSTP. This section introduces some new Spanning Tree concepts and il ustrates the main differences between the
two protocols. Port Transition States An essential difference between the three protocols is in the way ports transition to a forwarding state and in the way
this transition relates to the role of the port (forwarding or not forwarding) in the topology. RSTP combines the
transition states disabled, blocking and listening used in 802.1D and creates a single state Discarding. In either case,
ports do not forward packets. In the STP port transition states disabled, blocking or listening or in the RSTP port state
discarding, there is no functional difference, the port is not active in the network topology. Table 6-2 below compares
how the two protocols differ regarding the port state transition. Al three protocols calculate a stable topology in the same way. Every segment wil have a single path to the root
bridge. Al bridges listen for BPDU packets. However, BPDU packets are sent more frequently - with every Hello
packet. BPDU packets are sent even if a BPDU packet was not received. Therefore, each link between bridges is
sensitive to the status of the link. Ultimately this difference results in faster detection of failed links, and thus faster
topology adjustment. A drawback of 802.1D is this absence of immediate feedback from adjacent bridges. 802.1w RSTP 802.1D STP Forwarding Learning
Discarding
Disabled
No
No
Discarding
Blocking
No
No
Discarding
Listening
No
No
Learning
Learning
No
Yes
Forwarding
Forwarding
Yes
Yes Table 3 - 2 Comparing Port States
RSTP is capable of a more rapid transition to a forwarding state ‚Äď it no longer relies on timer configurations ‚Äď RSTP
compliant bridges are sensitive to feedback from other RSTP compliant bridge links. Ports do not need to wait for the
topology to stabilize before transitioning to a forwarding state. In order to al ow this rapid transition, the protocol
introduces two new variables: the edge port and the point-to-point (P2P) port. Edge Port The edge port is a configurable designation used for a port that is directly connected to a segment where a loop
cannot be created. An example would be a port connected directly to a single workstation. Ports that are designated
as edge ports transition to a forwarding state immediately without going through the listening and learning states. An
edge port loses its status if it receives a BPDU packet, immediately becoming a normal spanning tree port.

107 DGS-3700-12/DGS-3700-12G Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Switch User Manual P2P Port A P2P port is also capable of rapid transition. P2P ports may be used to connect to other bridges. Under RSTP, all
ports operating in full-duplex mode are considered to be P2P ports, unless manually overridden through configuration. 802.1D and 802.1w Compatibility RSTP can interoperate with legacy equipment and is capable of automatically adjusting BPDU packets to 802.1D
format when necessary. However, any segment using 802.1D STP wil not benefit from the rapid transition and rapid
topology change detection of RSTP. The protocol also provides for a variable used for migration in the event that
legacy equipment on a segment is updated to use RSTP. The Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) operates on two levels:
1. On the switch level, the settings are globally implemented. 2. On the port level, the settings are implemented on a per user-defined group of ports basis.

Figure 3 - 57 STP Bridge Global Settings window
The following parameters can be set: Parameter Description STP State
Use the radio buttons to enable or disable the STP Status. STP Version
Use the pul -down menu to choose the desired version of STP to be implemented on the
Switch. There are three choices: STPCompatability ‚Äď Select this parameter to set the Spanning Tree Protocol (STP)
globally on the switch. RSTP ‚Äď Select this parameter to set the Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP) global y
on the Switch. MSTP ‚Äď Select this parameter to set the Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP)
globally on the Switch. Forwarding BPDU
This field can be Enabled or Disabled. When Enabled, it al ows the forwarding of STP
BPDU packets from other network devices. The default is Disabled. Bridge Max Age
The Max Age may be set to ensure that old information does not endlessly circulate (6-40 Sec)
through redundant paths in the network, preventing the effective propagation of the new
information. Set by the Root Bridge, this value wil aid in determining that the Switch has
spanning tree configuration values consistent with other devices on the bridged LAN. If
the value ages out and a BPDU has stil not been received from the Root Bridge, the
Switch will start sending its own BPDU to al other switches for permission to become
the Root Bridge. If it turns out that your switch has the lowest Bridge Identifier, it wil
become the Root Bridge. The user may choose a time between 6 and 40 seconds. The
default value is 20. Bridge Hello Time
The Hello Time can be set from 1 to 10 seconds. This is the interval between two (1-10 Sec)
transmissions of BPDU packets sent by the Root Bridge to tel all other switches that it is
indeed the Root Bridge. Bridge Forward Delay
The Forward Delaycan be from 4 to 30 seconds. Any port on the Switch spends this (4-30 Sec)
time in the listening state while moving from the blocking state to the forwarding state. TX Hold Count (1-10)
Used to set the maximum number of Hello packets transmitted per interval. The count
can be specified from 1 to 10. The default is 6.

109 DGS-3700-12/DGS-3700-12G Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Switch User Manual Max Hops (1-20)
Used to set the number of hops between devices in a spanning tree region before the
BPDU (bridge protocol data unit) packet sent by the Switch wil be discarded. Each
switch on the hop count wil reduce the hop count by one until the value reaches zero.
The Switch wil then discard the BPDU packet and the information held for the port wil
age out. The user may set a hop count from 1 to 20. The default is 20. NNI BPDU Address
Configure NNI port address.dot1d ‚Äď Specifies GVRP‚Äôs bpdu MAC address of NNI port using the definition of 802.1d. dot1ad ‚Äď Specifies GVRP‚Äôs pdu MAC address of NNI port using the definition of
802.1ad.
Click Apply to implement changes made. NOTE: The Hello Time cannot be longer than the Max. Age. Otherwise, a
configuration error wil occur. Observe the following formulas when setting
the above parameters: Max. Age ‚Č§ 2 x (Forward Delay - 1 second)

Max. Age ‚Č• 2 x (Hello Time + 1 second)

110 DGS-3700-12/DGS-3700-12G Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Switch User Manual STP Port Settings This window is used to configure the STP Port Settings on the Swtich. STP can be set up on a port per port basis. To view this window, click L2 Features > Spanning Tree > STP Port Settings as shown below:

Figure 3 - 58 STP Port Settings window
In addition to setting Spanning Tree parameters for use on the switch level, the Switch al ows for the configuration of
groups of ports, each port-group of which wil have its own spanning tree, and wil require some of its own
configuration settings. An STP Group wil use the switch-level parameters entered above, with the addition of Port
Priority and Port Cost. An STP Group spanning tree works in the same way as the switch-level spanning tree, but the root bridge concept is
replaced with a root port concept. A root port is a port of the group that is elected based on port priority and port cost,
to be the connection to the network for the group. Redundant links wil be blocked, just as redundant links are blocked
on the switch level. The STP on the switch level blocks redundant links between switches (and similar network devices). The port level
STP wil block redundant links within an STP Group. It is advisable to define an STP Group to correspond to a VLAN group of ports. The following fields can be set: Parameter Description From Port / To Port
A consecutive group of ports may be configured starting with the selected port. External Cost (0=Auto) The external cost defines a metric that indicates the relative cost of forwarding packets to
the specified port list. Port cost can be set automatical y or as a metric value. The default
value is 0 (auto). 0 (auto) ‚Äď Setting 0 for the external cost wil automatical y set the speed for forwarding
packets to the specified port(s) in the list for optimal efficiency. Default port cost: 100Mbps
port = 200000. Gigabit port = 20000. value 1-200000000 ‚Äď Define a value between 1 and 200000000 to determine the external
cost. The lower the number, the greater the probability the port wil be chosen to forward
packets.

111 DGS-3700-12/DGS-3700-12G Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Switch User Manual Migrate
Setting this parameter as Yes wil set the ports to send out BPDU packets to other
bridges, requesting information on their STP setting If the Switch is configured for RSTP,
the port wil be capable to migrate from 802.1D STP to 802.1w RSTP. Migration should be
set as yes on ports connected to network stations or segments that are capable of being
upgraded to 802.1w RSTP on al or some portion of the segment. Edge
Choosing the True parameter designates the port as an edge port. Edge ports cannot
create loops, however an edge port can lose edge port status if a topology change creates
a potential for a loop. An edge port normally should not receive BPDU packets. If a BPDU
packet is received, it automatically loses edge port status. Choosing the Auto parameter
wil indicate that the port wil be able to automatically enable edge port status if needed. P2P
Choosing the True parameter indicates a point-to-point (P2P) shared link. P2P ports are
similar to edge ports, however they are restricted in that a P2P port must operate in full-
duplex. Like edge ports, P2P ports transition to a forwarding state rapidly thus benefiting
from RSTP. A p2p value of false indicates that the port cannot have p2p status. Auto
allows the port to have p2p status whenever possible and operate as if the p2p status
were true. If the port cannot maintain this status, (for example if the port is forced to half-
duplex operation) the p2p status changes to operate as if the p2p value were False. The
default setting for this parameter is True. The default value True is equivalent to the Auto
value. Port STP
Allows STP to be Enabled or Disabled for the ports. Restricted Role
Toggle between True and False to set whether this port is restricted to be selected as a
root port. The default value is False. Restricted TCN
Toggle between True and False to set whether this port is restricted to be selected as a
propagate topology change. The default value is False. Forward BPDU
This field can be Enabled or Disabled. When Enabled, it al ows the forwarding of STP
BPDU packets from other network devices. The default is Enabled.
Click Apply to implement changes made.

MST Configuration Identification The following windows in the MST Configuration Identification section allow the user to configure a MSTI instance
on the Switch. These settings wil uniquely identify a multiple spanning tree instance set on the Switch. The Switch
initial y possesses one CIST or Common Internal Spanning Tree of which the user may modify the parameters for but
cannot change the MSTI ID for, and cannot be deleted. To view this window, click L2 Features > Spanning Tree > MST Configuration Identification as shown below:

Figure 3 - 59 MST Configuration Identification window

The window above contains the following information:

112 DGS-3700-12/DGS-3700-12G Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Switch User Manual Parameter Description Configuration Name
A previously configured name set on the Switch to uniquely identify the MSTI (Multiple
Spanning Tree Instance). If a configuration name is not set, this field wil show the MAC
address to the device running MSTP. This field can be set in the STP Bridge Global Set-tings window. Revision Level
This value, along with the Configuration Name wil identify the MSTP region configured on (0-65535)
the Switch. The user may choose a value between 0 and 65535 with a default setting of 0. MSTI ID
This field shows the MSTI IDs currently set on the Switch. This field wil always have the
CIST MSTI, which may be configured but not deleted. Clicking the hyperlinked name wil
open a new window for configuring parameters associated with that particular MSTI. Type
This field al ows the user to choose a desired method for altering the MSTI settings. The
user has two choices. Add VID ‚Äď Select this parameter to add VIDs to the MSTI ID, in conjunction with the VID List
parameter. Remove VID ‚Äď Select this parameter to remove VIDs from the MSTI ID, in conjunction with
the VID List parameter. VID List (1-4094)
This field displays the VLAN IDs associated with the specific MSTI.
Click Apply to implement changes. Click Edit to modify an entry and Delete to remove an entry.

STP Instance Settings This table is used to create STP Instance Settings on the Switch. An STP instance may have multiple members with
the same MSTP configuration. There is no limit to the number of STP regions in a network but each region only
supports a maximum of 16 spanning tree instances (one unchangeable default entry). VIDs can belong to only one
spanning tree instance at a time. To view this window, click L2 Features> Spanning Tree > STP Instance Settings as shown below:

Figure 3 - 60 STP Instance Settings window
The following information can be set: Parameter Description MSTI ID
Displays the MSTI ID of the instance being modified. An entry of 0 in this field denotes the
CIST (default MSTI). Priority
Enter the new priority in the Priorityfield. The user may set a priority value between 0 and 61440.
To modify an entry click the Edit button, to see the STP Instance Operational Status of a previously configured setting
click View,the following window wil be displayed.

MSTP Port Information This window displays the current MSTP Port Information and can be used to update the port configuration for an MSTI
ID. If a loop occurs, the MSTP function wil use the port priority to select an interface to put into the forwarding state.
Set a higher priority value for interfaces to be selected for forwarding first. In instances where the priority value is
identical, the MSTP function wil implement the lowest MAC address into the forwarding state and other interfaces wil
be blocked. Remember that lower priority values mean higher priorities for forwarding packets. To view this window, click L2 Features > Spanning Tree > MSTP Port Information as shown below:

Figure 3 - 62 MSTP Port Information window
The following parameters can be viewed or set: Parameter Description Port
Use the drop-down menu to select a port. Instance ID
Displays the MSTI ID of the instance being configured. The range is from 0 to 15. An entry of 0
in this field denotes the CIST (default MSTI). Internal Path cost
This parameter is set to represent the relative cost of forwarding packets to specified ports (1-200000000)
when an interface is selected within a STP instance. The default setting is 0 (auto). There are
two options: 0 (auto) ‚Äď Selecting this parameter for the internalCost wil set quickest route automatically
and optimally for an interface. The default value is derived from the media speed of the
interface. value 1-200000000 ‚Äď Selecting this parameter with a value in the range of 1 to 200000000 will
set the quickest route when a loop occurs. A lower Internal cost represents a quicker
transmission. Priority
Enter a value between 0 and 240 to set the priority for the port interface. A higher priority wil
designate the interface to forward packets first. A lower number denotes a higher priority.
Click Apply to implement changes made.

Figure 3 - 63 Unicast Forwarding window
To add or edit an entry, define the following parameters and then click Apply: Parameter Description VLAN ID (1-4094)
The VLAN ID number of the VLAN on which the above Unicast MAC address resides. MAC Address
The MAC address to which packets wil be statically forwarded. This must be a unicast
MAC address. Port
Al ows the selection of the port number on which the MAC address entered above resides.
Click Apply to implement the changes made. The new entries wil be displayed on the Unicast Forwarding Table on
the bottom half of the screen.

Multicast Forwarding The following figure and table describe how to set up Multicast Forwarding on the Switch. To view this window, click L2 Features > Forwarding & Filtering > Multicast Forwarding as shown below:

Figure 3 - 64 Multicast Forwarding window

115 DGS-3700-12/DGS-3700-12G Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Switch User Manual
The following parameters can be set: Parameter Description VID
The VLAN ID of the VLAN to which the corresponding MAC address belongs. Multicast MAC
The MAC address of the static source of multicast packets. This must be a multicast MAC Address
address. Port Settings
Al ows the selection of ports that wil be members of the static multicast group and ports
either that are forbidden from joining dynamically, or that can join the multicast group
dynamically, using GMRP. The options are: None ‚Äď No restrictions on the port dynamically joining the multicast group. When None is
chosen, the port wil not be a member of the Static Multicast Group. Egress ‚Äď The port is a static member of the multicast group.
Click Apply to implement the changes made. To delete an entry in the Static Multicast Forwarding Table, click the
corresponding Delete button. Al the entries wil be shown on the lower half of the Multicast Forwarding Table
window.

Multicast Filtering Mode This table is used to configure the Multicast Filtering settings on the switch. It allows users to configure the switch to
forward or filter the Unregistered Groups per VLAN. To view this window, click L2 Features > Forwarding & Filtering > Multicast Filtering Mode as shown below:

Figure 3 - 65 Multicast Filtering Mode window

LLDP The Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP) al ows stations attached to an IEEE 802 LAN to advertise, to other stations
attached to the same IEEE 802 LAN. The major capabilities provided by this system is that it incorporates the station,
the management address or addresses of the entity or entities that provide management of those capabilities, and the
identification of the station‚Äôs point of attachment to the IEEE 802 LAN required by those management entity or entities. The information distributed via this protocol is stored by its recipients in a standard Management Information Base
(MIB), making it possible for the information to be accessed by a Network Management System (NMS) through a
management protocol such as the Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP).

116 DGS-3700-12/DGS-3700-12G Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Switch User Manual LLDP Global Settings This window is used to configure the LLDP Global Settings on the Switch. When LLDP is enabled the Switch can start
to transmit, receive and process LLDP packets. The specific function of each port wil depend on the per port LLDP
settings. LLDP Global State is Disabled by default. To view this window, click L2 Features > LLDP >LLDP Global Settings as shown below:

Figure 3 - 66 LLDP Global Settings window
The following parameters can be set: Parameter Description LLDP State
Used to Enable or Disable LLDP on the Switch. LLDP Forward
When LLDP is disabled, this function controls the LLDP packet forwarding. It wil flood the Message
received LLDP packet to al ports that have the same VLAN and wil advertise to other stations
attached to the same IEEE 802 LAN. When LLDP is enabled, this function does not take effect. Message TX
This interval controls how often active ports retransmit advertisements to their neighbors. To Interval (5-32768) change the packet transmission interval, enter a value in seconds (5 to 32768). Message TX Hold This function calculates the Time-to-Live for creating and transmitting the LLDP advertisements Multiplier (2-10)
to LLDP neighbors by changing the multiplier used by an LLDP Switch. When the Time-to-Live
for an advertisement expires the advertised data is then deleted from the neighbor Switch‚Äôs MIB. LLDP Reinit
The LLDP reinitialization delay interval is the minimum time that an LLDP port wil wait before Delay (1-10)
reinitializing after receiving an LLDP disable command. To change the LLDP Reinit Delay, enter
a value in seconds (1 to 10). LLDP TX Delay
LLDP TX Delay al ows the user to change the minimum time delay interval for any LLDP port (1-8192)
which wil delay advertising any successive LLDP advertisements due to change in the LLDP
MIB content. To change the LLDP TX Delay, enter a value in seconds (1 to 8192). LLDP Notification LLDP Notification Interval is used to send notifications to configured SNMP trap receiver(s) when Interval (5-3600)
an LLDP change is detected in an advertisement received on the port from an LLDP neighbor.
To set the LLDP Notification Interval, enter a value in seconds (5 to 3600).
Click Apply to implement changes made.

Figure 3 - 67 LLDP Port Settings window
The following parameters can be set: Parameter Description From Port /To Port Use the pul -down menu to select a range of ports to be configured. Notification
Use the pull-down menu to Enable or Disable each port for sending change notifications to the
configured SNMP trap receiver(s) when an LLDP data change is detected in an advertisement
received on the port from an LLDP neighbor. The notification wil include new available
information, information timeout and information updates. The changing type includes any data
update/insert/remove. Admin Status
This functions controls the local LLDP agent and allows it to send and receive LLDP frames on
the ports.This option contains TX, RX, TX And RX or Disabled. TX ‚Äď the local LLDP agent can only transmit LLDP frames. RX ‚Äď the local LLDP agent can only receive LLDP frames. TX And RX ‚Äď the local LLDP agent can both transmit and receive LLDP frames. Disabled ‚Äď the local LLDP agent can neither transmit nor receive LLDP frames. The defaut value is TX And RX. Subtype
Used to specify the type of address that wil be used either IPv4 or IPv6. Action
Used to Enable or Disable the advertise management address function based on port. Address
Enter the IPv4 or IPv6 address as previously specified. For multi IP-addresses, you can enter
any IP or create a new IP interface that you want to add.
Click Apply to implement changes made.

118 DGS-3700-12/DGS-3700-12G Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Switch User Manual LLDP Management Address List This window is used to find the LLDP management address information on the Switch. To view this window, click L2 Features> LLDP >LLDPManagement Address List as shown below: Figure 3 - 68 LLDP Management Address List window
The following parameters can be set: Parameter Description Address
Use the drop down menu to select either the IPv4 or IPv6 Address. Enter the management ip
address or the ip address of the entity you wish to advertise to. IPv4/IPv6 is a management IP so
the IP information wil be sent with the frame when the mgt_addr config is enabled.
Click Find to implement changes made. LLDP Basic TLVs Settings This window is used to enable the settings for the Basic TLVs Settings. An active LLDP port on the Switch always
includes mandatory data in its outbound advertisements. There are four optional data types that can be configured for
an individual port or group of ports to exclude one or more of these data types from outbound LLDP advertisements.
The mandatory data type includes four basic types of information (end of LLDPDU TLV, chassis ID TLV, port ID TLV,
and Time to Live TLV). The mandatory data types cannot be disabled. There are also four data types which can be
optional y selected. These include Port Description, System Name, System Description and System Capability. To view this window, click L2 Features> LLDP >LLDP Basic TLVs Settings as shown below: Figure 3 - 69 LLDP Basic TLVs Settings window
Use the drop-down menus to enable or disable the settings for the Basic TLVs Settings. Click Apply to implement
changes made. The following parameters can be set: Parameter Description From Port /To Port Use the pul -down menu to select a range of ports to be configured.

119 DGS-3700-12/DGS-3700-12G Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Switch User Manual Port Description
Use the drop-down menu to enable or disable port description. System Name
Use the drop-down menu to enable or disable system name. System
Use the drop-down menu to enable or disable system description. Description System
Use the drop-down menu to enable or disable system capabilities. Capabilities Click Apply to implement changes made.

LLDP Dot1 TLVs Settings LLDP Dot1 TLVs are organizationally specific TLVs which are defined in IEEE 802.1 and used to configure an
individual port or group of ports to exclude one or more of the IEEE 802.1 organizational port vlan ID TLV data types
from outbound LLDP advertisements. To view this window, click L2 Features> LLDP >LLDP Dot1 TLVs Settings as shown below: Figure 3 - 70 LLDP Dot1 TLVs Settings window
The following parameters can be set: Parameter Description From Port / To Port Use the pul -down menu to select a range of ports to be configured. Dot1 TLV PVID
Use the drop-down menu to enable or disable the advertised PVID. This TLV optional
datatype determines whether the IEEE 802.1 organizationally defined port VLAN TLV
transmission is allowed on a given LLDP transmission capable port. Dot1 TLV Protocol
Use the drop-down menu to enable or disable the advertised Protocol VLAN ID. This TLV VLAN
optional data type indicates whether the corresponding Local System‚Äôs port and protocol
VLAN ID instance wil be transmitted on the port. If a port is associated with multiple protocol
VLANs, those enabled ports and protocol VLAN IDs wil be advertised. Dot1 TLV VLAN
Use the drop-down menu to enable or disable the advertised VLAN Name. This TLV optional
data type indicates whether the corresponding Local System‚Äôs VLAN name instance wil be
transmitted on the port. If a port is associated with multiple VLANs, those enabled VLAN name
wil be advertised. Those enabled VLAN name wil be advertised. If the numbers of VLANs are
larger, it wil only bring limited numbers of VLANs due to restrictions of the package length. Dot1 TLV Protocol
Use the drop-down menu to enable or disable the advertised Protocol Identity. This TLV Identity
optional data type indicates whether the corresponding Local System‚Äôs Protocol Identity
instance wil be transmitted on the port. The Protocol Identity TLV provides a way for stations
to advertise protocols that are important to the operation of the network. Such as Spanning

120 DGS-3700-12/DGS-3700-12G Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Switch User Manual
Tree Protocol, the Link Aggregation Contol Protocol, and numerous vendor proprietary
variations are responsible for maintaining the topology and connectivity of the network. If
EAPOL, GVRP, STP (including MSTP), and LACP protocol identity is enabled on this port and
it is enabled to be advertised, then this protocol identity wil be advertised.
Click Apply to implement changes made.

LLDP Dot3 TLVs Settings This window is used to configure an individual port or group of ports to exclude one or more IEEE 802.3 organizational
specific TLV data type from outbound LLDP advertisements. To view this window, click L2 Features > LLDP > LLDP Dot3 TLVs Settings as shown below: Figure 3 - 71 LLDP Dot3 TLVs Settings window
The following parameters can be set: Parameter Description From Port / To Port Use the drop-down menu to select a range of ports to be configured. MAC/PHY
This TLV optional data type indicates that the LLDP agent should transmit 'MAC/PHY Configuration
configuration/status TLV'. This indicates it is possible for two ends of an IEEE 802.3 link to be Status
configured with different duplex and/or speed settings and stil establish some limited network
connectivity. More precisely, the information includes whether the port supports the auto-
negotiation function, whether the function is enabled, whether it has auto-negotiated
advertised capability, and what is the operational MAU type. The default state is Disabled. Link Aggregation
The Link Aggregation option indicates that LLDP agents should transmit 'Link Aggregation
TLV'. This indicates the current link aggregation status of IEEE 802.3 MACs. More precisely,
the information should include whether the port is capable of doing link aggregation, whether
the port is aggregated in an aggregated link, and what is the aggregated port ID. The default
state is Disabled. Maximum Frame
The Maximum Frame Size indicates that LLDP agent should transmit 'Maximum-frame-size Size
TLV. The default state is Disabled.
Click Apply to implement changes made.

LLDP Statistics System LLDP Statistics System allows you an overview of neighbor detection activity, LLDP Stastics and the settings for
individual ports on the Switch. Use the drop-down menu to check a specific port and click Find the information wil be
displayed in the lower half of the table.

LLDP Local Port Information LLDP Local Port Information window displays the information on a per port basis currently available for populating
outbound LLDP advertisements in the local port brief table shown below. To view this window, click L2 Features> LLDP > LLDP Local Port Information as shown below: Figure 3 - 73 LLDP Local Port Information window
To view the information on a per port basis click the Show Normal button, which wil display the following window:

Figure 3 - 74 LLDP Local Port Information (Show Normal) window
Use the drop-down menu to select a port and click Find the information wil be displayed on the lower half of the
window. To return to the previous window click the Show Brief button. To view details of individual parameters click
the hyperlinked Show Detail, which wil reveal the following window.

Figure 3 - 75 LLDP Local Port Information (Show Detail) window
To return to the LLDP Local Port Information window click the <<Back button. LLDP Remote Port Information This window displays port information learned from the neighbor. The switch receives packets from a remote station
but is able to store the information as local. To view this window, click L2 Features> LLDP >LLDP Remote Port Information as shown below: Figure 3 - 76 LLDP Remote Port Information window
Select the port you wish to view by using the drop-down menu and click Find the information wil be displayed in the
lower half of the table. To view the settings for an individual port select the port and click Show Normal which will
display the following window.

Figure 3 - 77 LLDP Remote Port Information (Show Normal) window

CFM Connectivity Fault Management (CFM) is defined by IEEE 802.1ag, which is a standard for detecting, isolating and
reporting connectivity faults in a network. CFM is an end-to-end per-service-instance Ethernet layer operation,
administration, and management (OAM) function. CFM functions include path discovery, fault detection and fault
verification and isolation as defined by 802.1ag. Ethernet CFM frames have a special Ether Type (0x8902). Al CFM messages are confined to a maintenance domain
per VLAN basis. There are different message types which are identified by unique Opcode of the CFM frame payload. CFM message types that are supported include; Continuity Check Message (CCM), Loopback Message and
Response (LBM, LBR) and Linktrace Message and Response (LTM and LTR).

CFM Port Settings This table is used to enable or disable the connectivity fault management function on a per port basis. CFM is disabled
on al ports by default. To view this window, click L2 Features> CFM > CFM Port Settings as shown below:

Figure 3 - 78 CFM Port Settings window
Enter the port list you wish to Enable and click Apply. CFM CCM PDUs Forwarding Mode This window is used to configure the CFM CCM PDU forwarding mode on the Switch. By default the CCM message is
handled and forwarded by software. The software can handle the packet based on behaviour defined by the standard.
Under a strict environment, there may be substantial amount of CCM packets, and it wil consume a substantial
amount of CPU resources. To meet the performance requirement, the handling of CCM can be changed to hardware
mode. To view this window, click L2 Features> CFM > CFM CCM PDUs Forwarding Mode as shown below:

CFM MIPCCM List This window is used to display the CFM, maintenance intermediate point and continuity check message on the Switch. To view this window, click L2 Features> CFM > CFM MIPCCM List as shown below:

Connectivity Fault Management Settings This window is used to configure the CFM settings on the Switch. To view this window, click L2 Features> CFM > Connectivity Fault Management Settings as shown below:

Figure 3 - 82 Connectivity Fault Management Settings window
The following parameters can be set or are displayed: Parameter Description CFM State
Used to Enable or Disable the CFM State. Connectivity Fault Management Create(MD) MD
Enter the maintenance domain name you wish to create. Level
Enter the maintenance domain level. Connectivity Fault Management Settings(MD) MD
Enter the maintenance domain name you wish to configure.

125 DGS-3700-12/DGS-3700-12G Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Switch User Manual MIP
This setting controls the creation of MIPs. None ‚Äď Means that no MIPs wil be created. This is the default value. Auto ‚Äď MIPs are created when the next lower active MD-level on the port is reached or there are
no lower active MD levels. Explicit ‚Äď MIPs are created when the next lower active MD-level on the port is reached. SenderID TLV
Used to define the TLV data types of the maintenance domain. The user can choose between None, Chassis, Manage or Chassis Manage.
To create a new entry enter the appropriate information and click Add. To configure the settings enter the appropriate
information and click Apply.

CFM Loopback Settings This window is used to configure the CFM Loopback settings on the Switch. To view this window, click L2 Features> CFM > CFM Loopback Settings as shown below:

Figure 3 - 83 CFM Loopback Settings window
The following parameters can be configured: Parameter Description MEP Name
The name of the Maintenance End Point. (Max:32 characters) MEP ID (1-8191)
The ID for the Maintenance End Point between 1 and 8191. MD (Max:22
The Maintenance Domain Name. characters) MA (Max:22
The Maintenance Association Name. characters) MAC Address
The destination MAC address. LBMs Number (1- The number of LBMs to be sent the default value is 4. 65535) LBM Payload
The payload length of the LBM to be sent, the default value is O. Length (0-1500) LBM Payload
The arbitary amount of data to be included in a Data TLV, along with the indication of whether Pattern
the Data TLV is to be included. (Max:1500 characters)

126 DGS-3700-12/DGS-3700-12G Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Switch User Manual LBMs Priority
The 802.1p priority to be set in the transmitted LBMs. If not specified it uses the same priority as
CCMs and LTMs sent by the MEP.
Click Apply to implement changes made.

CFM Linktrace Settings This window is used to configure the CFM linktrace settings on the Switch. To view this window, click L2 Features> CFM > CFM Linktrace Settings as shown below:

Figure 3 - 84 CFM Linktrace Settings window
The following parameters can be configured: Parameter Description MEP Name
The name of the Maintenance End Point. MEP ID (1-8191)
The ID for the Maintenance End Point between 1 and 8191. MD Name
The Maintenance Domain Name. MA Name
The Maintenance Association Name. MAC Address
The destination MAC address. TTL (2-255)
The linktrace message TTL value. The default value is 64. PDU Priority
The 802.1p priority to be set in the transmitted LTM. If the PDU Priority is not specified, it uses
the same priority as CCMs sent by the MA.
Click Apply to implement changes made.

Figure 3 - 85 Ethernet OAM Settings window
The following parameters can be configured: Parameter Description From Port / To Port Specify a range of ports to be configured. Mode
Specify to operate in either Active mode or Passive mode The default mode is Active. State
Specify that the OAM function state is Enabled or Disabled. The default state is Disabled. Remote Loopback
Specify to Start or Stop the OAM remote loopback function. Received Remote Specify whether to Process or to Ignore the received Ethernet OAM remote loopback Loopback
function. The default method is Ignore.
Click Apply to implement changes.

Figure 3 - 86 Ethernet OAM Configuration Settings window
The following parameters can be configured: Parameter Description From Port / To Port Specify a range of ports to be configured. Link Event
Configures the Ethernet OAM critical link event. Specify Link Monitor or Critical Link Event. Link Monitor
Indicates that the OAM entity can send and receive Event Notification OAMPDUs. Threshold
Specify the number of error frame seconds in the period that is required to be equal to or (0-4294967295)
greater than in order for the event to be generated. The default value of threshold is 1 error
frame second. Window
Specify the period of error frame summary events. The range is 1000ms-60000ms and the (1000-60000)
default value is 1000 ms. Notify
Specify to Enable or Disable the event notification. The default state is Enabled.
Click Apply to implement changes.

129 DGS-3700-12/DGS-3700-12G Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Switch User Manual Section 4 QoS HOL Blocking Pevention Bandwidth Control Traffic Control 802.1p Default Priority 802.1p User Priority QoS Scheduling Mechanism QoS Scheduling In Band Manage Settings SRED
The DGS-3700 Series supports 802.1p priority queuing Quality of Service. The following section discusses the
implementation of QoS (Quality of Service) and benefits of using 802.1p priority queuing. Advantages of QoS QoS is an implementation of the IEEE 802.1p standard that allows network administrators a method of reserving
bandwidth for important functions that require a large bandwidth or have a high priority, such as VoIP (voice-over
Internet Protocol), web browsing applications, file server applications or video conferencing. Not only can a larger
bandwidth be created, but other less critical traffic can be limited, so excessive bandwidth can be saved. The Switch
has separate hardware queues on every physical port to which packets from various applications can be mapped to,
and, in turn prioritized. View the following map to see how the Switch implements 802.1P priority queuing.

Figure 4 - 1 Mapping QoS on the Switch
The picture above shows the default priority setting for the Switch. Class-7 has the highest priority of the eight priority
queues on the Switch. In order to implement QoS, the user is required to instruct the Switch to examine the header of
a packet to see if it has the proper identifying tag tagged. Then the user may forward these tagged packets to
designated queues on the Switch where they wil be emptied, based on priority. For example, lets say a user wishes to have a videoconference between two remotely set computers. The
administrator can add priority tags to the video packets being sent out, utilizing the Access Profile commands. Then,
on the receiving end, the administrator instructs the Switch to examine packets for this tag, acquires the tagged
packets and maps them to a class queue on the Switch. Then in turn, the administrator wil set a priority for this queue
so that wil be emptied before any other packet is forwarded. This results in the end user receiving al packets sent as
quickly as possible, thus prioritizing the queue and allowing for an uninterrupted stream of packets, which optimizes
the use of bandwidth available for the video conference. Understanding QoS The Switch has eight priority queues. These priority queues are labeled from 0-7, with 7 being the highest priority and
0 the lowest priority queue. The eight priority tags, specified in IEEE 802.1p are mapped to the Switch's priority tags
as follows:
Priority 0 is assigned to the Switch's Q2 queue. Priority 1 is assigned to the Switch's Q0 queue. Priority 2 is assigned to the Switch's Q1 queue. Priority 3 is assigned to the Switch's Q3 queue. Priority 4 is assigned to the Switch's Q4 queue. Priority 5 is assigned to the Switch's Q5 queue. Priority 6 is assigned to the Switch's Q6 queue. Priority 7 is assigned to the Switch's Q7 queue.

131 DGS-3700-12/DGS-3700-12G Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Switch User Manual
For strict priority-based scheduling, any packets residing in the higher priority queues are transmitted first. Multiple
strict priority queues empty based on their priority tags. Only when these queues are empty, are packets of lower
priority transmitted. For weighted round-robin queuing, the number of packets sent from each priority queue depends upon the assigned
weight. For a configuration of 8 CoS queues, A~H, with their respective weight value: 8~1. When each queue has 10
outbound packets, they are sent in the following sequence: A1, B1, C1, D1, E1, F1, G1, H1, A2, B2, C2, D2, E2, F2, G2, A3, B3, C3, D3, E3, F3, A4, B4, C4, D4, E4, A5, B5, C5, D5, A6, B6, C6, A7, B7, A8, A9, B8, C7, D6, E5, F4, G3, H2, A10, B9, C8, D7, E6, F5, G4 B10, C9, D8, E7, F6, C10, D9, E8, D10, E9, F7, G5, H3, E10, F8, G6, F9, F10, G7, H4, G8, G9, H5, G10, H6 ~ H10 For weighted round robin queuing, if each CoS queue has the same weight value, then each CoS queue has an equal
opportunity to send packets just like round robin queuing. For weighted round-robin queuing, if the weight for a CoS is set to 0, then it wil continue processing the packets from
this CoS until there are no more packets for this CoS. The other CoS queues that have been given a nonzero value,
and depending upon the weight, wil follow a common weighted round-robin scheme. Remember that the DGS-3700 Series has eight priority queues (and eight Classes of Service) for each port on the
Switch.

Figure 4 - 2 HOL Prevention Settings window Bandwidth Control The bandwidth control settings are used to place a ceiling on the transmitting and receiving data rates for any selected
port. To view this window, click QoS>Bandwidth Control as shown below:

Figure 4 - 3 Bandwidth Control window
The following parameters can be set or are displayed: Parameter Description From port / To port A consecutive group of ports may be configured starting with the selected port. Type
This drop-down menu allows you to select between RX (receive), TX (transmit), and Both. This
setting wil determine whether the bandwidth ceiling is applied to receiving, transmitting, or both
receiving and transmitting packets. No Limit
This drop-down menu al ows you to select Enabled or Disabled to specify whether the selected
port have unlimited bandwidth.

133 DGS-3700-12/DGS-3700-12G Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Switch User Manual Rate (64-1024000)
This field al ows you to enter the data rate, in Kbits per second, that wil be the limit for the
selected port. The value must be a multiple of 64, between 64 and 1024000.
Click Apply to set the bandwidth control for the selected ports. Results of configured Bandwidth Settings wil be
displayed in the Bandwidth Control Table on the lower half of the window.

Traffic Control On a computer network, packets such as Multicast packets and Broadcast packets continual y flood the network as
normal procedure. At times, this traffic may increase due to a malicious endstation on the network or a malfunctioning
device, such as a faulty network card. Thus, switch throughput problems wil arise and consequently affect the overall
performance of the switch network. To help rectify this packet storm, the Switch wil monitor and control the situation. The packet storm is monitored to determine if too many packets are flooding the network, based on the threshold level
provided by the user. Once a packet storm has been detected, the Switch wil drop packets coming into the Switch
until the storm has subsided. This method can be utilized by selecting theDrop option of the Action field in the window
below. The Switch wil also scan and monitor packets coming into the Switch by monitoring the Switch‚Äôs chip counter. This
method is only viable for Broadcast and Multicast storms because the chip only has counters for these two types of
packets. Once a storm has been detected (that is, once the packet threshold set below has been exceeded), the
Switch wil shutdown the port to al incoming traffic with the exception of STP BPDU packets, for a time period
specified using the CountDown field. If the packet storm discontinues before the Countdown timer expires, the port wil
again allow al incoming traffic. If this field times out and the packet storm continues, the port wil be placed in a
Shutdown Forever mode which wil produce a warning message to be sent to the Trap Receiver. Once in Shutdown
Forever mode, the only method of recovering this port is to manually recover it using the Port Configuration window
in the Configuration folder and selecting the disabled port and returning it to an Enabled status. To utilize this method
of Storm Control, choose the Shutdown option of the Action field in the window below. To view this window click QoS> Traffic Control as shown below:

Figure 4 - 4 Traffic Control window

134 DGS-3700-12/DGS-3700-12G Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Switch User Manual
The following parameters can be configured: Parameter Description Traffic Control Settings From Port / To Port A consecutive group of ports may be configured starting with the selected port. Action
Select the method of traffic Control from the pul -down menu. The choices are: Drop ‚Äď Utilizes the hardware Traffic Control mechanism, which means the Switch‚Äôs hardware
wil determine the Packet Storm based on the Threshold value stated and drop packets until
the issue is resolved. Shutdown ‚Äď Utilizes the Switch‚Äôs software Traffic Control mechanism to determine the Packet
Storm occurring. Once detected, the port wil deny al incoming traffic to the port except STP
BPDU packets, which are essential in keeping the Spanning Tree operational on the Switch.
If the Countdown timer has expired and yet the Packet Storm continues, the port wil be
placed in Shutdown Forever mode and is no longer operational until the user manually resets
the port using the Port Configuration window in the Administration folder and selecting the
disabled port and returning it to an Enabled status. Choosing this option obligates the user to
configure the Interval setting as wel , which wil provide packet count samplings from the
Switch‚Äôs chip to determine if a Packet Storm is occurring. Count Down
The Count Down timer is set to determine the amount of time, in minutes, that the Switch wil (0 or 5-30)
wait before shutting down the port that is experiencing a traffic storm. Only the switch
continues to experience a traffic storm during this countdown period and the switch wil
shutdown the port. This parameter is only useful for ports configured as Shutdown in their
Action field and therefore wil not operate for Hardware based Traffic Control
implementations. The possible time settings for this field are 0, 5-30 minutes. 0 is disable
forever state, port wil not enter shutdown forever mode. Time Interval (5-30) The Interval wil set the time between Multicast and Broadcast packet counts sent from the
Switch‚Äôs chip to the Traffic Control function. These packet counts are the determining factor in
deciding when incoming packets exceed the Threshold value. The Interval may be set
between 5 and 30 seconds with the default setting of 5 seconds. Threshold
Specifies the maximum number of packets per second that wil trigger the Traffic Control (0-255000)
function to commence. The configurable threshold range is from 0 to 255000 with a default
setting of 131072. Storm Control Type Select the type of Storm Type to detect, either Broadcast Multicast or Unicast. Once selected,
use the pul -down menu to enable or disable this storm detection. Traffic Trap SettingTraffice Trap
Enable sending of Storm Trap messages when the type of action taken by the Traffic Control Settings
function in handling a Traffic Storm is one of the following:
‚ÄĘ None ‚Äď Wil not send any Storm trap warning messages regardless of action taken
by the Traffic Control mechanism.
‚ÄĘ Storm Occurred ‚Äď Wil send Storm Trap warning messages upon the occurrence of
a Traffic Storm only.
‚ÄĘ Storm Cleared ‚Äď Wil send Storm Trap messages when a Traffic Storm has been
cleared by the Switch only.
‚ÄĘ Both ‚Äď Wil send Storm Trap messages when a Traffic Storm has been both
detected and cleared by the Switch.
This function cannot be implemented in the Hardware mode. (When Drop is chosen in the
Action field.
Click Apply to implement the settings made. NOTE: Traffic Control cannot be implemented on ports that are set for
Link Aggregation (Port Trunking).

135 DGS-3700-12/DGS-3700-12G Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Switch User Manual NOTE: Ports that are in the Shutdown forever mode wil be seen as
Discarding in Spanning Tree windows and implementations though these
ports wil stil be forwarding BPDUs to the Switch‚Äôs CPU.

NOTE: Ports that are in Shutdown Forever mode wil be seen as link down
in al windows and screens until the user recovers these ports.

802.1p Default Priority The Switch allows the assignment of a default 802.1p priority to each port on the Switch. To view this window, click QoS>802.1p Default Priority as shown below:

Figure 4 - 5 802.1p Default Priority window
This window al ows you to assign a default 802.1p priority to any given port on the Switch. The priority queues are
numbered from 0, the lowest priority, to 7, the highest priority. Click Apply to implement your settings.

136 DGS-3700-12/DGS-3700-12G Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Switch User Manual 802.1p User Priority The Switch allows the assignment of a user priority to each of the 802.1p priorities. To view this window, click QoS >802.1p User Priority as shown below:

Figure 4 - 6 802.1p User Priority window
Once you have assigned a priority to the port groups on the Switch, you can then assign this Class to each of the 7
levels of 802.1p priorities. Click Apply to set your changes. QoS Scheduling Mechanism Changing the output scheduling used for the hardware queues in the Switch can customize QoS. As with any changes
to QoS implementation, careful consideration should be given to how network traffic in lower priority queues are
affected. Changes in scheduling may result in unacceptable levels of packet loss or significant transmission delays. If
you choose to customize this setting, it is important to monitor network performance, especial y during peak demand,
as bottlenecks can quickly develop if the QoS settings are not suitable. To view this window, click QoS > QoS Scheduling Mechanism as shown below:

Figure 4 - 7 QoS Scheduling Mechanism
The following parameters can be configured. Parameter Description From Port / To Port
Enter the port or port list you wish to configure. Scheduling Strict ‚Äď The highest class of service is the first to process traffic. That is, the highest class of Mechanism
service wil finish before other queues empty. Weighted Round Robin ‚Äď Use the weighted round-robin (WRR) algorithm to handle packets
in an even distribution in priority classes of service. For weighted round-robin queuing, the
number of packets sent from each priority queue depends upon the assigned weight.
Click Apply to implement changes made.

QoS Scheduling This window al ows the user to configure the way the Switch wil map an incoming packet per port based on its 802.1p
user priority, to one of the eight available hardware priority queues available on the Switch. To view this window, click QoS > QoS Scheduling as shown below:

Figure 4 - 8 QoS Scheduling
The following parameters can be configured: Parameter Description From Port / To Port
Enter the port or port list you wish to configure. Class ID
Select the Class ID, from 0-7, to configure for the QoS parameters. Scheduling Strict ‚Äď The highest class of service is the first to process traffic. That is, the highest class of Mechanism
service wil finish before other queues empty. Weight ‚Äď Use the weighted round-robin (WRR) algorithm to handle packets in an even
distribution in priority classes of service. When Weight is selected, a field appears next to this
field for the user to specify the maximium number of packets. The specified hardware priority
queue wil be al owed to transmit before allowing the next lowest priority queue to transmit its
packets. The value is ranged from 1 to 127.
Click Apply to implement changes made.

In Band Manage Settings This window al ows the user to specify a priority handling of untagged in-band management packets received by the
Switch. The priority value entered in this window wil be used to determine which of the eight hardware priority queues
the packet is forwarded to. To view this window, click QoS > In Band Manage Settings as shown below:

SRED Simple random early detection (sRED) is a simplified RED mechanism based on ASIC capability. Random Early
Detection (RED) is a congestion avoidance mechanism at the gateway in packet switched networks. RED gateways
keep the average queue size low while allowing occasional bursts of packets in the queue. The switch provides
support for sRED through active queue management by probabilistic dropping of incoming colored packets. Active queue management is a class of algorithms that attempt to proactively drop or mark frames before congestion
becomes excessive. The goal is to detect the onset of persistent congestion and take proactive action so that TCP
sources contributing to the congestion back off gracefully, insuring good network utilization while minimizing frame
loss. This proactive approach starts discarding specific colored packets before the packet buffer becomes full. If this queue
depth is less than the threshold, there is minimal (or no) congestion and the packet is enqueued. If congestion is
detected the packet is dropped or queued based on the DSCP. SRED Settings To view this window, click QoS> SRED > SRED Settings as shown below:

Figure 4 - 13 DSCP Map Settings window
The following parameters may be set: Parameter Description From port / To port A consecutive group of ports may be configured starting with the selected port. DSCP Map
Use the drop-down menu to choose a DSCP Map, you can choose between DSCP Priority, DSCP DSCP and DSCP Color. DSCP List(0-63)
This field allows the user to enter a DSCP value in the space provided, which wil instruct the
Switch to examine the DiffServ Code part of each packet header and use this as the, or part of
the criterion for forwarding. The user may choose a value between 0 and 63. Priority
This parameter is specified if you want to re-write the 802.1p default priority previously set in
the Switch, which is used to determine the CoS queue to which packets are forwarded to.
Once this field is specified, packets accepted by the Switch that match this priority are
forwarded to the CoS queue specified previously by the user.
Click Apply to implement changes.

Figure 4 - 14 DSCP Map Settings window
The following parameters may be set: Parameter Description From port / To port A consecutive group of ports may be configured starting with the selected port. Priority List(0-7)
This parameter is specified if you want to re-write the 802.1p default priority previously set in
the Switch, which is used to determine the CoS queue to which packets are forwarded to.
Once this field is specified, packets accepted by the Switch that match this priority are
forwarded to the CoS queue specified previously by the user. Color
Specify the color Red, Yellow or Green.
Click Apply to implement changes.

Safeguard Engine Periodical y, malicious hosts on the network wil attack the Switch by utilizing packet flooding (ARP Storm) or other
methods. These attacks may increase the Safeguard Engine beyond its capability. To alleviate this problem, the
Safeguard Engine function was added to the Switch‚Äôs software. The Safeguard Engine can help the overall operability of the Switch by minimizing the workload of the Switch while the
attack is ongoing, thus making it capable to forward essential packets over its network in a limited bandwidth. When
the Switch either (a) receives too many packets to process or (b) exerts too much memory, it wil enter an Exhausted
mode. When in this mode, the Switch only receives a small amount of ARP or IP broadcast packets for a calculated
time interval. Every five seconds, the Switch wil check to see if there are too many packets flooding the Switch. If the
threshold has been crossed, the Switch wil do a rate limit and only allow a smal amount of ARP and IP broadcast
packets for five seconds. After another five-second checking interval arrives, the Switch wil again check the ingress
flow of packets. If the flooding has stopped, the Switch wil again begin accepting all packets. Yet, if the checking
shows that there continues to be too many packets flooding the Switch, it wil stil only accept a small amount of ARP
and IP broadcast packets for double the time of the previous stop period. This doubling of time for stopping ingress
ARP and IP broadcast packets wil continue until the maximum time has been reached, which is 320 seconds and
every stop from this point until a return to normal ingress flow would be 320 seconds. For a better understanding,
examine the following example of the Safeguard Engine.

Figure 5 - 1 Mapping QoS on the Switch
For every consecutive checking interval that reveals a packet flooding issue, the Switch wil double the time it wil
accept a few ingress ARP and IP broadcast packets. In the example above, the Switch doubled the time for dropping
ARP and IP broadcast packets when consecutive flooding issues were detected at 5-second intervals. (First stop = 5
seconds, second stop = 10 seconds, third stop = 20 seconds) Once the flooding is no longer detected, the wait period
for limiting ARP and IP broadcast packets wil return to 5 seconds and the process wil resume. Once in Exhausted mode, the packet flow wil decrease by half of the level that caused the Switch to enter Exhausted
mode. After the packet flow has stabilized, the rate wil initially increase by 25% and then return to a normal packet
flow. To view this window, click Security > Safeguard Engine as shown below:

Figure 5 - 2 Safeguard Engine window
To configure the Switch‚Äôs Safeguard Engine, change the State to Enabled when the Safeguard Engine is enabled a
green light wil show on the gray bar at the top of this window, next to Safeguard. To set the Safeguard Engine for the
Switch, complete the following fields:

146 DGS-3700-12/DGS-3700-12G Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Switch User Manual Parameter Description Rising Threshold
Used to configure the acceptable level of CPU utilization before the Safeguard Engine
mechanism is enabled. Once the CPU utilization reaches this percentage level, the Switch
wil move into the Exhausted state. Fal ing Threshold
Used to configure the acceptable level of CPU utilization as a percentage, where the Switch
leaves the Exhausted state and returns to normal mode. Trap/log
Use the pul -down menu to enable or disable the sending of messages to the device‚Äôs SNMP
agent and switch log once the Safeguard Engine has been activated by a high CPU utilization
rate. Mode
Toggle the State field to either Strict or Fuzzy for the Safeguard Engine of the Switch.
Click Apply to implement the settings made.

Trusted Host Use the Security IP Management to permit remote stations to manage the Switch. If you choose to define one or more
designated management stations, only the chosen stations, as defined by IP address, wil be al owed management
privilege through the web manager or Telnet session. To define a management station IP setting, type in the IP
address with a proper subnet mask and click the Add button. To view this window, click Security > Trusted Host as shown below:

IP-MAC-Port Binding The IP network layer uses a four-byte address. The Ethernet link layer uses a six-byte MAC address. Binding these
two address types together allows the transmission of data between the layers. The primary purpose of IP-MAC
binding is to restrict the access to a switch to a number of authorized users. Only the authorized client can access the
Switch‚Äôs port by checking the pair of IP-MAC addresses with the pre-configured database, or when DHCP snooping is
enabled, the switch wil automatically learn the IP/MAC pairs by snooping DHCP packets and saving them to the IMPB
white list. If an unauthorized user tries to access an IP-MAC binding enabled port, the system wil block the access by
dropping its packet. For the DGS-3700 Series, active and inactive entries use the same database. The maximum
entry number is 511. The creation of authorized users can be manually configured by CLI or Web. The function is port-
based, meaning a user can enable or disable the function on the individual port. The IP-MAC-Port Binding folder contains five windows: IMP Binding Global Settings, IMP Binding Port Settings, IMP
Binding Entry Settings, DHCP Snooping Entries, and MAC Block List.

IMP Binding Global Settings This window is used to enable or disable the ACL mode, Trap Log State and DHCP Snoop state on the switch. When
the user enables the ACL Mode for IP-MAC Binding it wil create two Access Profile Entries on the Switch. The
Trap/Logfield wil enable and disable the sending of trap log messages for IP-MAC binding. When enabled, the

147 DGS-3700-12/DGS-3700-12G Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Switch User Manual
Switch wil send a trap message to the SNMP agent and the Switch log when an ARP packet is received that doesn‚Äôt
match the IP-MAC binding configuration set on the Switch. To view this window click, Security> IP-MAC-Port Binding > IMP Binding Global Settings

Figure 5 - 4 IMP Binding Global Settings window
The following parameters can be set: Parameter Description ACL Mode
This field wil enable and disable the ACL mode for IP-MAC binding on the Switch, without
altering previously set configurations. When enabled, the Switch wil automatically create two
ACL packet content mask entries which wil aid the user in processing certain IP-MAC binding
entries created. The ACL entries created when this command is Enabled can only be
automatically installed if the Access Profile table has two entries available of the possible six
entries allowed. Trap / Log
This field wil enable and disable the sending of trap log messages for IP-MAC binding. When
enabled, the Switch wil send a trap log message to the SNMP agent and the Switch log
when an ARP packet is received that doesn‚Äôt match the IP-MAC binding configuration set on
the Switch. DHCP Snoop State
Use the pul -down menu to enable or disable the DHCP Snoop State for IP-MAC Binding.
Click Apply to implement the settings made.

IMP Binding Port Settings Select a port or a range of ports with the From Port and To Port fields. Enable or disable the port with the State, Al ow
Zero IP and Forward DHCP packet field, and configure the port‚Äôs Max entry. To view this window, click Security> IP-MAC-Port Binding > IMP Binding Port Settings as shown below:

Figure 5 - 5 IMP Binding Port Settings window
The following fields can be set or modified: Parameter Description

148 DGS-3700-12/DGS-3700-12G Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Switch User Manual From Port / To Port Select a port or range of ports to set for IP-MAC Binding. State
Use the pul -down menu to Enable or Disable these ports for IP-MAC Binding. Enabled Strict ‚Äď This mode provides a stricter method of control. If the user selects this mode,
all packets wil be sent to the CPU, thus al packets wil not be forwarded by the hardware until
the S/W learns the entries for the ports. The port wil check ARP packets and IP packets by IP-
MAC-Port Binding entries. When the packet is found by the entry, the MAC address wil be set
to dynamic state. If the packet is not found by the entry, the MAC address wil be set to block.
Other packets wil be dropped. The default mode is strict if not specified. The ports with strict
mode wil capture unicast DHCP packets through the ACL module. If configuring IP-MAC
binding port enable in strict mode when IP-MAC binding DHCP_snoop is enabled, it wil create
an ACL profile and the rules according to the ports. If there is not enough profile or rule space
for ACL profile or rule table, it wil return a warning message and wil not create ACL profile
and rules to capture unicast DHCP packets. Enabled Loose ‚Äď This mode provides a looser way of control. If the user selects loose mode,
ARP packets and IP Broadcast packets wil be sent to the CPU. The packets wil stil be
forwarded by the hardware until a specific source MAC address is blocked by the software.
The port wil check ARP packets and IP Broadcast packets by IP-MAC-PORT Binding entries.
When the packet is found by the entry, the MAC address wil be set to dynamic state. If the
packet is not found by the entry, the MAC address wil be set to block. Other packets wil be
bypassed. Allow Zero IP
Use the pull-down menu to enable or disable this feature. Al ow zero IP configures the state
which allows ARP packets with 0.0.0.0 source IP to bypass. Forward DHCP
By default, the DHCP packet with broadcast DA wil be flooded. When set to disable, the Packet
broadcast DHCP packet received by the specified port wil not be forwarded. This setting is
effective when DHCP snooping is enabled, under the case that DHCP packet which has been
trapped by the CPU needs to be forwarded by the software. This setting controls the
forwarding behavior in this situation. Max Entry (1-50)
Specifies the maximum number of IP-MAC-Port Binding entries. By default, per port max entry
is 5.
Click Apply to implement changes.

Figure 5 - 6 IMP Binding Entry Settings window
The following fields can be set or modified: Parameter Description IP Address
Enter the IP address to bind to the MAC address set below. MAC Address
Enter the MAC address to bind to the IP Address set above. Ports
Specify the switch ports for which to configure this IP-MAC binding entry (IP Address + MAC
Address). Click the Al Ports check box to configure this entry for al ports on the Switch. Mode
The user may set the IP-MAC Binding Mode here by using the pull-down menu. The choices
are: ARP ‚Äď Choosing this selection wil set a normal IP-Mac Binding entry for the IP address and
MAC address entered. If the system is in ARP mode, the arp mode entries and acl mode
entries wil be effective. If the system is in the acl mode, only the acl mode entries wil be
active. ACL ‚Äď Choosing this entry wil allow only packets from the source IP-MAC binding entry
created here. Al other packets with a different IP address wil be discarded by the Switch. This
mode can only be used if the ACL Mode has been enabled in the IMP Global Settings window
as seen previously.
Click Apply for implement changes, click Find to search for an entry, click Show All for the table to display all entries
and click Delete Al to remove an entry.

MAC Block List This table is used to view unauthorized devices that have been blocked by IP-MAC binding restrictions. To find an
unauthorized device that has been blocked by the IP-MAC binding restrictions, enter the VID and MAC Address in the
appropriate fields and click Find. To delete an entry, click the delete button next to the entry‚Äôs port. To delete al the
entries in the Blocked Address Browser window,click Clear Al . To view this window, click Security > IP-MAC-Port Binding > MAC Block List as shown below:

Figure 5 - 8 MAC Block List window

Port Security Port Security Port Settings A given ports‚Äô (or a range of ports') dynamic MAC address learning can be locked such that the current source MAC
addresses entered into the MAC address forwarding table cannot be changed once the port lock is enabled. Setting
the Admin State pull-down menu to Enabled, and clicking Apply can lock the port. Port Security is a security feature that prevents unauthorized computers (with source MAC addresses) unknown to the
Switch prior to locking the port (or ports) from connecting to the Switch's locked ports and gaining access to the
network. To view this window, click Security > Port Security > Port Security Port Settings as shown below:

Figure 5 - 9 Port Security Port Settings window
The following parameters can be set: Parameter Description From Port / To Port A consecutive group of ports may be configured starting with the selected port. Admin State
This pull-down menu allows you to enable or disable Port Security (locked MAC address table
for the selected ports). Lock Address
This pull-down menu allows you to select how the MAC address table locking wil be Mode
implemented on the Switch, for the selected group of ports. The options are: Permanent ‚Äď The locked addresses wil not age out after the aging timer expires. DeleteOnTimeout ‚Äď The locked addresses wil age out after the aging timer expires. DeleteOnReset ‚Äď The locked addresses wil not age out until the Switch has been reset. Max. Learning
The number of MAC addresses that wil be in the MAC address-forwarding table for the Address (0-16384)
selected switch and group of ports.
Click Apply to implement changes made.

Port Security VLAN Settings This table is used to set the maximum port-security entries that can be learned on a specific VLAN. To view this window, click Security > Port Security > Port Security FDB Entries as shown below:

152 DGS-3700-12/DGS-3700-12G Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Switch User Manual Parameter Description VLAN Name
Specifies a VLAN or list of VLANs by VLAN Name. VLAN ID (e.g.:1,4-6) Specifies a VLAN or list of VLANs by VLAN ID. Max Learning
Specifies the maximum number of port-security entries that can be learned by this VLAN. If Address
this parameter is set to 0, no user can get authorization on this VLAN. If the setting is smaller than the number of current learned entries on the VLAN, the command
wil be rejected. The default value is No Limit.
Click Apply to implement changes.

Figure 5 - 11 Port Security Entries window
The following parameters can be set: Parameter Description VLAN Name
Specifies a VLAN or list of VLANs by VLAN Name. VLAN ID (e.g.:1,4-6) Specifies a VLAN or list of VLANs by VLAN ID. Port List
Specifies a port or list of ports to be configured.
Click Apply to implement changes.

DHCP Server Screening Settings This function allows the user to not only restrict all DHCP Server packets but also to receive any specified DHCP
server packet by any specified DHCP client, it is useful when one or more DHCP servers are present on the network
and both provide DHCP services to different distinct groups of clients. The first time the DHCP filter is enabled it will
create both an access profile entry and an access rule per port entry, it will also create other access rules. These rules
are used to block all DHCP server packets. In addition to a permit DHCP entry it wil also create one access profile
and one access rule entry the first time the DHCP client MAC address is used as the client MAC address. The Source
IP address is the same as the DHCP server‚Äôs IP address (UDP port number 67). These rules are used to permit the
DHCP server packets with specific fileds, which the user has configured. When DHCP Server filter function is enabled all DHCP Server packets wil be filtered from a specific port. The DHCP Server Screening folder contains two windows: DHCP Screening Port Settings and DHCP Offer Filtering.

Figure 5 - 12 DHCP Screening Port Settings window
The following parameters can be set: Parameter Description From Port / To Port A consecutive group of ports may be configured starting with the selected port. State
Choose Enabled to enable the DHCP server or Disabled to disable. The default is Disabled.
After setting the previous parameters, click Apply to allow your changes to be implemented. The DHCP Port Information Table shows which ports are enabled or disabled for DHCP Sever Screening.

DHCP Offer Filtering This function allows the user not only to restrict all DHCP Server packets but also to receive any specified DHCP
server packet by any specified DHCP client, it is useful when one or more DHCP servers are present on the network
and both provide DHCP services to different distinct groups of clients. The first time the DHCP filter is enabled it wil
create both an access profile entry and an access rule per port entry, it wil also create other access rules. These rules
are used to block all DHCP server packets. In addition to a permit DHCP entry, it wil also create one access profile
and one access rule entry the first time the DHCP client MAC address is used as the client MAC address. The Source
IP address is the same as the DHCP server‚Äôs IP address (UDP source port number 67). These rules are used to
permit the DHCP server packets with specific fields, which the user has configured. To view this window, click Security > DHCP Server Screening > DHCP Offer Filtering as shown below:

154 DGS-3700-12/DGS-3700-12G Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Switch User Manual Client‚Äôs MAC Address The MAC address of the DHCP client. Only multiple legal DHCP servers on the network
need to be entered in this field. If there is only one legal DHCP server on the network, no
input to this field is allowed. Ports
Choose the range of ports that you want to use as the DHCP server, or check the All Ports
box if you wish to use al the ports on the switch.
Click Apply to implement changes.

802.1X 802.1X Port-Based and Host-Based Access Control The IEEE 802.1X standard is a security measure for authorizing and authenticating users to gain access to various
wired or wireless devices on a specified Local Area Network by using a Client and Server based access control
model. This is accomplished by using a RADIUS server to authenticate users trying to access a network by relaying
Extensible Authentication Protocol over LAN (EAPOL) packets between the Client and the Server. The following figure
represents a basic EAPOL packet:

Figure 5 - 14 The EAPOL Packet
Utilizing this method, unauthorized devices are restricted from connecting to a LAN through a port to which the user is
connected. EAPOL packets are the only traffic that can be transmitted through the specific port until authorization is
granted. The 802.1X Access Control method holds three roles, each of which are vital to creating and upkeeping a
stable and working Access Control security method.

Figure 5 - 15 The three roles of 802.1X
The following section wil explain the three roles of Client, Authenticator and Authentication Server in greater detail.

Authentication Server The Authentication Server is a remote device that is connected to the same network as the Client and Authenticator,
must be running a RADIUS Server program and must be configured properly on the Authenticator (Switch). Clients

155 DGS-3700-12/DGS-3700-12G Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Switch User Manual
connected to a port on the Switch must be authenticated by the Authentication Server (RADIUS) before attaining any
services offered by the Switch on the LAN. The role of the Authentication Server is to certify the identity of the Client
attempting to access the network by exchanging secure information between the RADIUS server and the Client
through EAPOL packets and, in turn, informs the Switch whether or not the Client is granted access to the LAN and/or
switches services.

Figure 5 - 16 The Authentication Server Authenticator The Authenticator (the Switch) is an intermediary between the Authentication Server and the Client. The Authenticator
serves two purposes when utilizing the 802.1X function. The first purpose is to request certification information from
the Client through EAPOL packets, which is the only information allowed to pass through the Authenticator before
access is granted to the Client. The second purpose of the Authenticator is to verify the information gathered from the
Client with the Authentication Server, and to then relay that information back to the Client. Three steps must be implemented on the Switch to properly configure the Authenticator.
1. The 802.1X State must be Enabled. (Security / 802.1X / 802.1X Global settings) 2. The 802.1X settings must be implemented by port (Security/802.1X /802.1X Port Settings) 3. A RADIUS server must be configured on the Switch. (Security /802.1X/ AuthenticationRADIUS Server)

Figure 5 - 17 The Authenticator

156 DGS-3700-12/DGS-3700-12G Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Switch User Manual Client The Client is simply the endstation that wishes to gain access to the LAN or switch services. Al endstations must be
running software that is compliant with the 802.1X protocol. For users running Windows XP or Windows Vista, that
software is included within the operating system. Al other users are required to attain 802.1X client software from an
outside source. The Client wil request access to the LAN and or Switch through EAPOL packets and, in turn wil
respond to requests from the Switch.

Figure 5 - 18 The Client Authentication Process Utilizing the three roles stated above, the 802.1X protocol provides a stable and secure way of authorizing and
authenticating users attempting to access the network. Only EAPOL traffic is allowed to pass through the specified
port before a successful authentication is made. This port is ‚Äúlocked‚ÄĚ until the point when a Client with the correct
username and password (and MAC address if 802.1X is enabled by MAC address) is granted access and therefore
successfully ‚Äúunlocks‚ÄĚ the port. Once unlocked, normal traffic is al owed to pass through the port. The following figure
displays a more detailed explanation of how the authentication process is completed between the three roles stated
above.

Figure 5 - 19 The 802.1X Authentication Process
The D-Link implementation of 802.1X allows network administrators to choose between two types of Access Control
used on the Switch, which are:
1. Port-Based Access Control ‚Äď This method requires only one user to be authenticated per port by a remote
RADIUS server to allow the remaining users on the same port access to the network.
2. Host-Based Access Control ‚Äď Using this method, the Switch wil automatically learn up to sixteen MAC
addresses by port and set them in a list. Each MAC address must be authenticated by the Switch using a
remote RADIUS server before being al owed access to the Network.

157 DGS-3700-12/DGS-3700-12G Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Switch User Manual Understanding 802.1X Port-based and Host-based Network Access Control The original intent behind the development of 802.1X was to leverage the characteristics of point-to-point in LANs. As
any single LAN segment in such infrastructures has no more than two devices attached to it, one of which is a Bridge
Port. The Bridge Port detects events that indicate the attachment of an active device at the remote end of the link, or
an active device becoming inactive. These events can be used to control the authorization state of the Port and initiate
the process of authenticating the attached device if the Port is unauthorized. This is the Port-Based Network Access
Control. Port-Based Network Access Control

Figure 5 - 20 Example of Typical Port-Based Configuration
Once the connected device has successfully been authenticated, the Port then becomes Authorized, and all
subsequent traffic on the Port is not subject to access control restriction until an event occurs that causes the Port to
become Unauthorized. Hence, if the Port is actual y connected to a shared media LAN segment with more than one
attached device, successfully authenticating one of the attached devices effectively provides access to the LAN for all
devices on the shared segment. Clearly, the security offered in this situation is open to attack.

158 DGS-3700-12/DGS-3700-12G Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Switch User Manual Host-Based Network Access Control Figure 5 - 21 Example of Typical Host-Based Configuration
In order to successfully make use of 802.1X in a shared media LAN segment, it would be necessary to create ‚Äúlogical‚ÄĚ
Ports, one for each attached device that required access to the LAN. The Switch would regard the single physical Port
connecting it to the shared media segment as consisting of a number of distinct logical Ports, each logical Port being
independently controlled from the point of view of EAPOL exchanges and authorization state. The Switch learns each
attached devices‚Äô individual MAC addresses, and effectively creates a logical Port that the attached device can then
use to communicate with the LAN via the Switch.

160 DGS-3700-12/DGS-3700-12G Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Switch User Manual
This window al ows you to set the following features: Parameter Description From Port / To Port Enter the port or ports to be set. QuietPeriod
This allows you to set the number of seconds that the Switch remains in the quiet state (0-65535)
following a failed authentication exchange with the client. The default setting is 60 seconds. SuppTimeout
This value determines timeout conditions in the exchanges between the Authenticator and the (1-65535)
client. The default setting is 30 seconds. ServerTimeout
This value determines timeout conditions in the exchanges between the Authenticator and the (1-65535)
authentication server. The default setting is 30 seconds. MaxReq(1-10)
The maximum number of times that the Switch wil retransmit an EAP Request to the client
before it times out of the authentication sessions. The default setting is 2. TxPeriod(1-65535)
This sets the TxPeriod of time for the authenticator PAE state machine. This value determines
the period of an EAP Request/Identity packet transmitted to the client. The default setting is 30 seconds. ReAuthPeriod
A constant that defines a nonzero number of seconds between periodic reauthentication of (1-65535)
the client. The default setting is 3600 seconds. ReAuthentication
Determines whether regular reauthentication wil take place on this port. The default setting is Disabled. PortControl
This allows you to control the port authorization state. Select forceAuthorized to disable 802.1X and cause the port to transition to the authorized
state without any authentication exchange required. This means the port transmits and
receives normal traffic without 802.1X-based authentication of the client. If forceUnauthorized is selected, the port wil remain in the unauthorized state, ignoring al
attempts by the client to authenticate. The Switch cannot provide authentication services to
the client through the interface. If Auto is selected, it wil enable 802.1X and cause the port to begin in the unauthorized state,
allowing only EAPOL frames to be sent and received through the port. The authentication
process begins when the link state of the port transitions from down to up, or when an
EAPOL-start frame is received. The Switch then requests the identity of the client and begins
relaying authentication messages between the client and the authentication server. The default setting is Auto. Capability
This allows the 802.1X Authenticator settings to be applied on a per-port basis. Select Authenticator to apply the settings to the port. When the setting is activated A user must pass
the authentication process to gain access to the network. Select None disable 802.1X
functions on the port. Direction
Sets the administrative-controlled direction to either in or both. If in is selected, control is only exerted over incoming traffic through the port you selected in
the first field. If both are selected, control is exerted over both incoming and outgoing traffic through the
controlled port selected in the first field. Forward EAPOL
This enables or disables the Switch retransmit EAPOL PDU Request on a per port basis. PDU On Port Max User On Port
Specify the maximum number of users that can be learned via 802.1X authentication. (1-128)
Click Apply to implement your configuration changes.

802.1X User To create a new 802.1X User enter a user name and password then reconfirm the password and click Apply, the new
user wil be displayed in the lower half of the table. To delete an entry click the corresponding Delete button. To view this window, click Security > 802.1X > 802.1X User as shown below:

Figure 5 - 24 802.1X User window

Authentication RADIUS Server The RADIUS feature of the Switch allows you to facilitate centralized user administration as well as providing
protection against a sniffing, active hacker. To view this window, click Security > 802.1X > Authentication RADIUS Server as shown below:

Figure 5 - 25 Authentication RADIUS Server window
This window displays the following information: Parameter Description Index
Choose the desired RADIUS server to configure: 1, 2 or 3. IPv4 Address /
Select either IPv4 Address or IPv6 Address to set the RADIUS Server IP. IPv6 Address Authentication Port
Set the RADIUS authentication server(s) UDP port. The default port is 1812. (1-65535) Accounting Port
Set the RADIUS account server(s) UDP port. The default port is 1813. (1-65535) Timeout (1-255)
Enter the timeout value in seconds (1 to 255) the default value is 5. Retransmit (1-255)
Set the retransmit value in seconds (1 to 255) the default value is 2. Key
Set the key the same as that of the RADIUS server. Maximum length of the entry is 32 (Max:32 characters)
bytes.

Initialize Port(s) This window allows you to initialize ports for the 802.1X Settings. This window wil appear in the folder when the
‚Äúenable 802.1x‚ÄĚ command is entered into the command line interface or when the authentication mode is changed to Port Based or MAC Based in the 802.1X Global Settings window. To view this window, click Security> 802.1X > Initialize Port(s) as shown below:

Figure 5 - 26 Initialize Port(s) window
To initialize port(s), use the drop down menu to select the port(s) and click Apply. Reauthenticate Port(s) This window al ows you to reauthenticate ports for the 802.1X Settings. This window wil appear in the folder when the
‚Äúenable 802.1x‚ÄĚ command is entered into the command line interface or when the authentication mode is changed to Port Based or MAC Based in the 802.1X Global Settings window. To view this window, click Security> 802.1X > Reauthenticate Port(s) as shown below:

Figure 5 - 27 Reauthenticate Port(s) window
To reauthenticate port(s), use the drop down menu to select the port(s) and click Apply.

163 DGS-3700-12/DGS-3700-12G Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Switch User Manual Guest VLAN Configuration
On 802.1X security enabled networks, there is a need for
non 802.1X supported devices to gain limited access to
the network, due to lack of the proper 802.1X software or
incompatible devices, such as computers running
Windows 98 or lower operating systems, or the need for
guests to gain access to the network without full
authorization. To supplement these circumstances, this
switch now implements 802.1X Guest VLANs. These
VLANs should have limited access rights and features
separate from other VLANs on the network. To implement 802.1X Guest VLANs, the user must first
create a VLAN on the network with limited rights and then
enable it as an 802.1X guest VLAN. Then the
administrator must configure the guest accounts
accessing the Switch to be placed in a Guest VLAN when
trying to access the Switch. Upon initial entry to the
Switch, the client wishing services on the Switch wil need
to be authenticated by a remote RADIUS Server or local
authentication on the Switch to be placed in a fully
operational VLAN. If authenticated and the authenticator
posseses the VLAN placement information, that client wil
be accepted into the fully operational target VLAN and
normal switch functions wil be open to the client. If the
authenticator does not have target VLAN placement
information, the client wil be returned to its originating

VLAN. Yet, if the client is denied authentication by the Figure 5 - 28 Guest VLAN Authentication Process
authenticator, it wil be placed in the Guest VLAN where it
has limited rights and access. The adjacent figure should
give the user a better understanding of the Guest VLAN
process.

Limitations Using the Guest VLAN 1. Guest VLANs are only supported for port-based VLANs. MAC-based VLANs cannot undergo this procedure. 2. Ports supporting Guest VLANs cannot be GVRP enabled and vice versa. 3. A port cannot be a member of a Guest VLAN and a static VLAN simultaneously. 4. Once a client has been accepted into the target VLAN, it can no longer access the Guest VLAN.

164 DGS-3700-12/DGS-3700-12G Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Switch User Manual Guest VLAN This window is used to configure the Guest VLAN on the Switch. To view this window, click Security > 802.1X >Guest VLAN as shown below: Figure 5 - 29 Guest VLAN window
The following fields may be modified to enable the 802.1X Guest VLAN: Parameter Description VLAN Name
Enter the pre-configured VLAN name to create as an 802.1X Guest VLAN. Port List
Set the port list of ports to be enabled for the 802.1X Guest VLAN.
Click Apply to implement the 802.1X Guest VLAN. Once properly configured, the Guest VLAN Name and associated
ports wil be listed in the lower part of the window. NOTE: For more information and configuration examples for the 802.1X Guest VLAN
function, please refer to the Guest VLAN Configuration Example located on the D-Link

website.

SSL Settings Secure Sockets Layer or SSL is a security feature that wil provide a secure communication path between a host and
client through the use of authentication, digital signatures and encryption. These security functions are implemented
through the use of a ciphersuite, which is a security string that determines the exact cryptographic parameters,
specific encryption algorithms and key sizes to be used for an authentication session and consists of three levels:
1. Key Exchange: The first part of the cyphersuite string specifies the public key algorithm to be used. This
switch utilizes the Rivest Shamir Adleman (RSA) public key algorithm and the Digital Signature Algorithm
(DSA), specified here as the DHE DSS Diffie-Hellman (DHE) public key algorithm. This is the first
authentication process between client and host as they ‚Äúexchange keys‚ÄĚ in looking for a match and therefore
authentication to be accepted to negotiate encryptions on the following level.
2. Encryption: The second part of the ciphersuite that includes the encryption used for encrypting the messages
sent between client and host. The Switch supports two types of cryptology algorithms:
‚ÄĘ Stream Ciphers ‚Äď There are two types of stream ciphers on the Switch, RC4 with 40-bit keys and RC4 with 128-bit keys. These keys are used to encrypt messages and need to be consistent between
client and host for optimal use.
‚ÄĘ CBC Block Ciphers ‚Äď CBC refers to Cipher Block Chaining, which means that a portion of the
previously encrypted block of encrypted text is used in the encryption of the current block. The Switch
supports the 3DES EDE encryption code defined by the Data Encryption Standard (DES) to create
the encrypted text.
3. Hash Algorithm: This part of the ciphersuite al ows the user to choose a message digest function which wil
determine a Message Authentication Code. This Message Authentication Code wil be encrypted with a sent
message to provide integrity and prevent against replay attacks. The Switch supports two hash algorithms, MD5 (Message Digest 5) and SHA (Secure Hash Algorithm).
These three parameters are uniquely assembled in four choices on the Switch to create a three-layered encryption
code for secure communication between the server and the host. The user may implement any one or combination of

165 DGS-3700-12/DGS-3700-12G Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Switch User Manual
the ciphersuites available, yet different ciphersuites wil affect the security level and the performance of the secured
connection. The information included in the ciphersuites is not included with the Switch and requires downloading from
a third source in a file form cal ed a certificate. This function of the Switch cannot be executed without the presence
and implementation of the certificate file and can be downloaded to the Switch by utilizing a TFTP server. The Switch
supports SSLv3 and TLSv1. Other versions of SSL may not be compatible with this Switch and may cause problems
upon authentication and transfer of messages from client to host. Download Certificate This window is used to download a certificate file for the SSL function on the Switch from a TFTP server. The
certificate file is a data record used for authenticating devices on the network. It contains information on the owner,
keys for authentication and digital signatures. Both the server and the client must have consistent certificate files for
optimal use of the SSL function. The Switch only supports certificate files with .der file extensions. The Switch is
shipped with a certificate pre-loaded though the user may need to download more, depending on user circumstances. Ciphersuite This window wil al ow the user to enable SSL on the Switch and implement any one or combination of listed
ciphersuites on the Switch. A ciphersuite is a security string that determines the exact cryptographic parameters,
specific encryption algorithms and key sizes to be used for an authentication session. The Switch possesses four
possible ciphersuites for the SSL function, which are all enabled by default. To utilize a particular ciphersuite, disable
the unwanted ciphersuites, leaving the desired one for authentication. When the SSL function has been enabled, the web wil become disabled. To manage the Switch through the web
based management while utilizing the SSL function, the web browser must support SSL encryption and the header of
the URL must begin with https://. (Ex. https://10.90.90.90) Any other method wil result in an error and no access can
be authorized for the web-based management. To view this window click, Security>SSL Settings as shown below:

Figure 5 - 30 SSL Settings
To set up the SSL function on the Switch, configure the following parameters and click Apply. Parameter Description SSL Settings SSL Status Enable or Disable the SSL status on the switch. The default is disabled. Cache Timeout
This field wil set the time between a new key exchange between a client and a host using (60-86400)
the SSL function. A new SSL session is established every time the client and host go
through a key exchange. Specifying a longer timeout wil al ow the SSL session to reuse the
master key on future connections with that particular host, therefore speeding up the
negotiation process. The default setting is 600 seconds.

166 DGS-3700-12/DGS-3700-12G Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Switch User Manual SSL Ciphersuite Settings RSA with
This ciphersuite combines the RSA key exchange, stream cipher RC4 encryption with 128-RC4_128_MD5
bit keys and the MD5 Hash Algorithm. Use the pull-down menu to enable or disable this
ciphersuite. This field is enabled by default. RSA with 3DES EDE
This ciphersuite combines the RSA key exchange, CBC Block Cipher 3DES_EDE CBC SHA
encryption and the SHA Hash Algorithm. Use the pul -down menu to enable or disable this
ciphersuite. This field is enabled by default. DHE DSS with 3DES
This ciphersuite combines the DSA Diffie Hellman key exchange, CBC Block Cipher EDE CBC SHA
3DES_EDE encryption and SHA Hash Algorithm. Use the pull-down menu to enable or
disable this ciphersuite. This field is enabled by default. RSA EXPORT with
This ciphersuite combines the RSA Export key exchange and stream cipher RC4 encryption RC4 40 MD5
with 40-bit keys. Use the pull-down menu to enable or disable this ciphersuite. This field is
enabled by default. SSL Certificate Download Server IP Address
Enter the IP address of the TFTP server where the certificate files are located. Certificate File Name Enter the path and the filename of the certificate file to download. This file must have a .der
extension. (Ex. c:/cert.der) Key File Name
Enter the path and the filename of the key file to download. This file must have a .der
extension (Ex. c:/pkey.der)

NOTE: Enabling the SSL command wil disable the web-based switch management.
To log on to the Switch again, the header of the URL must begin with https://.
Entering anything else into the address field of the web browser wil result in an error

and no authentication wil be granted.

167 DGS-3700-12/DGS-3700-12G Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Switch User Manual SSH SSH is an abbreviation of Secure Shell, which is a program allowing secure remote login and secure network services
over an insecure network. It al ows a secure login to remote host computers, a safe method of executing commands
on a remote end node, and wil provide secure encrypted and authenticated communication between two non-trusted
hosts. SSH, with its array of unmatched security features is an essential tool in today‚Äôs networking environment. It is a
powerful guardian against numerous existing security hazards that now threaten network communications. The steps required to use the SSH protocol for secure communication between a remote PC (the SSH client) and the
Switch (the SSH server) are as follows:
1. Create a user account with admin-level access using the User Accounts window in the Configuration folder.
This is identical to creating any other admin-level User Account on the Switch, including specifying a
password. This password is used to logon to the Switch, once a secure communication path has been
established using the SSH protocol.
2. Configure the User Account to use a specified authorization method to identify users that are al owed to
establish SSH connections with the Switch using the SSH User Authentication Lists window. There are
three choices as to the method SSH wil use to authorize the user, which are Host Based, Password and Public Key.
3. Configure the encryption algorithm that SSH wil use to encrypt and decrypt messages sent between the SSH
client and the SSH server, using the SSH Authmode and Algorithm Settings window.
4. Final y, enable SSH on the Switch using the SSH Settings window.
After completing the preceding steps, a SSH Client on a remote PC can be configured to manage the Switch using a
secure, in band connection. SSH Settings The following window is used to configure and view settings for the SSH server. To view this window, click Security > SSH > SSH Settings as shown below:

Figure 5 - 31 SSH Settings window
To configure the SSH server on the Switch, modify the following parameters and click Apply: Parameter Description SSH Server State
Enable or disable SSH on the Switch. The default is Disabled. Max Session (1-8)
Enter a value between 1 and 8 to set the number of users that may simultaneously access the
Switch. The default setting is 8. Connection
Al ows the user to set the connection timeout. The use may set a time between 120 and 600Timeout (120-600)
seconds. The default setting is 120 seconds. Authfail Attempts
Al ows the Administrator to set the maximum number of attempts that a user may try to log on (2-20)
to the SSH Server utilizing the SSH authentication. After the maximum number of attempts
has been exceeded, the Switch wil be disconnected and the user must reconnect to the
Switch to attempt another login. The number of maximum attempts may be set between 2 and 20. The default setting is 2. Rekey Timeout
Using the pull-down menu uses this field to set the time period that the Switch wil change the

SSH Authmode and Algorithm Settings The SSH Algorithm window allows the configuration of the desired types of SSH algorithms used for authentication
encryption. There are four categories of algorithms listed and specific algorithms of each may be enabled or disabled
by checking the boxes. Al algorithms are enabled by default. To view this window, click Security > SSH > SSH Authmode and Algorithm Settings as shown below:

Figure 5 - 32 SSH Authmode and Algorithm Settings window
The following algorithms may be set: Parameter Description SSH Authentication Mode Settings Password
This parameter may be enabled if the administrator wishes to use a locally configured
password for authentication on the Switch. The default is enabled. Public Key
This parameter may be enabled if the administrator wishes to use a public key configuration
set on a SSH server, for authentication on the Switch. The default is enabled. Host-based
This parameter may be enabled if the administrator wishes to use a host computer for
authentication. This parameter is intended for Linux users requiring SSH authentication
techniques and the host computer is running the Linux operating system with a SSH
program previously installed. The default is enabled. Encryption Algorithm 3DES-CBC
Check the box to enable the Triple Data Encryption Standard encryption algorithm with
Cipher Block Chaining. The default is enabled. Blow-fish CBC
Check the box to enable the Blowfish encryption algorithm with Cipher Block Chaining. The
default is enabled. AES128-CBC
Check the box to enable the Advanced Encryption Standard AES128 encryption algorithm
with Cipher Block Chaining. The default is enabled. AES192-CBC
Check the box to enable the Advanced Encryption Standard AES192 encryption algorithm
with Cipher Block Chaining. The default is enabled. AES256-CBC
Check the box to enable the Advanced Encryption Standard AES-256 encryption algorithm
with Cipher Block Chaining. The default is enabled. ARC4
Check the box to enable the Arcfour encryption algorithm with Cipher Block Chaining. The
default is enabled.

SSH User Authentication Lists The following windows are used to configure parameters for users attempting to access the Switch through SSH. To view this window, click Security > SSH > SSH User Authentication Lists as shown below:

Figure 5 - 33 SSH User Authentication Lists window
In the example aboveright, the User Account ‚ÄúRG‚ÄĚ has been previously set using the User Accounts window in the Configuratrion folder. A User Account MUST be set in order to set the parameters for the SSH user. To Edit the
parameters for a SSH user, click on the corresponding Edit button, which wil reveal the following window to configure.

Figure 5 - 34 SSH User Authentication Lists - Edit window
The user may set the following parameters: Parameter Description User Name
Enter a User Name of no more than 15 characters to identify the SSH user. This User Name
must be a previously configured user account on the Switch. Auth. Mode
The administrator may choose one of the following to set the authorization for users
attempting to access the Switch. Host Based ‚Äď This parameter should be chosen if the administrator wishes to use a remote
SSH server for authentication purposes. Choosing this parameter requires the user to input
the following information to identify the SSH user.

170 DGS-3700-12/DGS-3700-12G Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Switch User Manual Password ‚Äď This parameter should be chosen if the administrator wishes to use an
administrator-defined password for authentication. Upon entry of this parameter, the Switch
wil prompt the administrator for a password, and then to re-type the password for
confirmation. Public Key ‚Äď This parameter should be chosen if the administrator wishes to use the
publickey on a SSH server for authentication. Host Name
Enter an alphanumeric string of no more than 32 characters to identify the remote SSH user.
This parameter is only used in conjunction with the Host Based choice in the Auth. Mode
field. Host IP
Enter the corresponding IP address of the SSH user. This parameter is only used in
conjunction with the Host Based choice in the Auth. Mode field.
Click Apply to implement changes made. NOTE: To set the SSH User Authentication parameters on the Switch, a User Account
must be previously configured. For more information on configuring local User Accounts on
the Switch, see the User Accounts section of this manual located in the Configuration

section.

Access Authentication Control The TACACS/XTACACS/TACACS+/RADIUS commands allow users to secure access to the Switch using the
TACACS/XTACACS/TACACS+/RADIUS protocols. When a user logs in to the Switch or tries to access the
administrator level privilege, he or she is prompted for a password. If TACACS/XTACACS/TACACS+/RADIUS
authentication is enabled on the Switch, it wil contact a TACACS/XTACACS/TACACS+/RADIUS server to verify the
user. If the user is verified, he or she is granted access to the Switch. There are currently three versions of the TACACS security protocol, each a separate entity. The Switch's software
supports the following versions of TACACS: TACACS (Terminal Access Control er Access Control System) - Provides password checking and
authentication, and notification of user actions for security purposes utilizing via one or more centralized
TACACS servers, utilizing the UDP protocol for packet transmission. Extended TACACS (XTACACS) - An extension of the TACACS protocol with the ability to provide more
types of authentication requests and more types of response codes than TACACS. This protocol also uses
UDP to transmit packets. TACACS+(Terminal Access Control er Access Control System plus) - Provides detailed access control
for authentication for network devices. TACACS+ is facilitated through Authentication commands via one or
more centralized servers. The TACACS+ protocol encrypts al traffic between the Switch and the TACACS+
daemon, using the TCP protocol to ensure reliable delivery
In order for the TACACS/XTACACS/TACACS+/RADIUS security function to work properly, a
TACACS/XTACACS/TACACS+/RADIUS server must be configured on a device other than the Switch, called an
Authentication Server Host and it must include usernames and passwords for authentication. When the user is
prompted by the Switch to enter usernames and passwords for authentication, the Switch contacts the
TACACS/XTACACS/TACACS+/RADIUS server to verify, and the server wil respond with one of three messages:
The server verifies the username and password, and the user is granted normal user privileges on the Switch. The server wil not accept the username and password and the user is denied access to the Switch. The server doesn't respond to the verification query. At this point, the Switch receives the timeout from the
server and then moves to the next method of verification configured in the method list.
The Switch has four built-in Authentication Server Groups, one for each of the TACACS, XTACACS, TACACS+ and
RADIUS protocols. These built-in Authentication Server Groups are used to authenticate users trying to access the
Switch. The users wil set Authentication Server Hosts in a preferable order in the built-in Authentication Server
Groups and when a user tries to gain access to the Switch, the Switch wil ask the first Authentication Server Hosts for
authentication. If no authentication is made, the second server host in the list wil be queried, and so on. The built-in
Authentication Server Groups can only have hosts that are running the specified protocol. For example, the TACACS
Authentication Server Groups can only have TACACS Authentication Server Hosts.

171 DGS-3700-12/DGS-3700-12G Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Switch User Manual
The administrator for the Switch may set up six different authentication techniques per user-defined method list
(TACACS/XTACACS/TACACS+/RADIUS/local/none) for authentication. These techniques wil be listed in an order
preferable, and defined by the user for normal user authentication on the Switch, and may contain up to eight
authentication techniques. When a user attempts to access the Switch, the Switch wil select the first technique listed
for authentication. If the first technique goes through its Authentication Server Hosts and no authentication is returned,
the Switch wil then go to the next technique listed in the server group for authentication, until the authentication has
been verified or denied, or the list is exhausted. Please note that when the user logins to the device successfully through TACACS/XTACACS/TACACS+server or
none method, the ‚Äúuser‚ÄĚ priviledge level is the only level assigned. If the user wants to get the administration privilege
level, the user must use the ‚Äúenable admin‚ÄĚ command to promote his privilege level. However when the user logins to
the device successfully through the RADIUS server or through the local method, 3 kinds of privilege levels can be
assigned to the user and the user cannot use the ‚Äúenable admin‚ÄĚ command to promote to the admin privilege level.

NOTE: TACACS, XTACACS and TACACS+ are separate entities and are not
compatible. The Switch and the server must be configured exactly the same, using the
same protocol. (For example, if the Switch is set up for TACACS authentication, so must

Figure 5 - 35 Authentication Policy Settings window
The following parameters can be set: Parameters Description Authentication Policy
Use the pul -down menu to enable or disable the Authentication Policy on the Switch. Response Timeout (0-255) This field wil set the time the Switch wil wait for a response of authentication from the
user. The user may set a time between 0 and 255 seconds. The default setting is 30
seconds. User Attempts (1-255)
This command wil configure the maximum number of times the Switch wil accept
authentication attempts. Users failing to be authenticated after the set amount of
attempts wil be denied access to the Switch and wil be locked out of further
authentication attempts. Command line interface users wil have to wait 60 seconds
before another authentication attempt. Telnet and web users wil be disconnected from
the Switch. The user may set the number of attempts from 1 to 255. The default setting
is 3.
Click Apply to implement changes made. Application Authentication Settings This window is used to configure switch configuration applications (console, Telnet, SSH, web) for login at the user
level and at the administration level (Enable Admin) utilizing a previously configured method list. To view this window, click Security > Access Authentication Control > Application Authentication Settings as
shown below:

Figure 5 - 36 Application's Authentication Settings window
The following parameters can be set: Parameter Description Application
Lists the configuration applications on the Switch. The user may configure the Login Method
List and Enable Method List for authentication for users utilizing the Console (Command Line
Interface) application, the Telnet application, SSH, and the WEB (HTTP) application. Login Method List
Using the pull-down menu, configure an application for normal login on the user level, utilizing

173 DGS-3700-12/DGS-3700-12G Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Switch User Manual
a previously configured method list. The user may use the default Method List or other
Method List configured by the user. See the Login Method Lists window, in this section, for
more information. Enable Method List Using the pull-down menu, configure an application for normal login on the user level, utilizing
a previously configured method list. The user may use the default Method List or other
Method List configured by the user. See the Enable Method Lists window, in this section, for
more information
Click Apply to implement changes made.

Authentication Server Group This window wil al ow users to set up Authentication Server Groups on the Switch. A server group is a technique used
to group TACACS/XTACACS/TACACS+/RADIUS server hosts into user-defined categories for authentication using
method lists. The user may define the type of server group by protocol or by previously defined server group. The
Switch has three built-in Authentication Server Groups that cannot be removed but can be modified. Up to eight
authentication server hosts may be added to any particular group. To view this window, click Security > Access Authentication Control > Authentication Server Group as shown
below:

Figure 5 - 37 Authentication Server Group Settings window
The Switch has four built-in Authentication Server Groups that cannot be removed but can be modified. To modify a
particular group, click on its corresponding Edit button or click the Edit Server Group tab at the top of this window,
the following screen wil be displayed.

Figure 5 - 38 Authentication Server Group Settings Edit window
To add an Authentication Server Host to the list, enter its IP address in the IP Address field, choose the protocol
associated with the IP address of the Authentication Server Host and click Add to add this Authentication Server Host
to the group.

NOTE: The user must configure Authentication Server Hosts using the Authentication
Server Hosts window before adding hosts to the list. Authentication Server Hosts must be
configured for their specific protocol on a remote centralized server before this function

can work properly. NOTE: The four built in server groups can only have server hosts running the same
TACACS daemon. TACACS/XTACACS/TACACS+ protocols are separate entities and

are not compatible with each other.

Authentication Server This window will set user-defined Authentication Server Hosts for the TACACS/XTACACS/TACACS+/RADIUS
security protocols on the Switch. When a user attempts to access the Switch with Authentication Policy enabled, the
Switch wil send authentication packets to a remote TACACS/XTACACS/TACACS+/RADIUS server host on a remote
host. The TACACS/XTACACS/TACACS+/RADIUS server host wil then verify or deny the request and return the
appropriate message to the Switch. More than one authentication protocol can be run on the same physical server
host but, remember that TACACS/XTACACS/TACACS+/RADIUS are separate entities and are not compatible with
each other. The maximum supported number of server hosts is 16. To view this window, click Security > Access Authentication Control > Authentication Server as shown below:

175 DGS-3700-12/DGS-3700-12G Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Switch User Manual IP Address
The IP address of the remote server host the user wishes to add. Port (1-65535)
Enter a number between 1 and 65535 to define the virtual port number of the authentication
protocol on a server host. The default port number is 49 for TACACS/XTACACS/TACACS+
servers and 1813 for RADIUS servers but the user may set a unique port number for higher
security. Protocol
The protocol used by the server host. The user may choose one of the following: TACACS ‚Äď Enter this parameter if the server host utilizes the TACACS protocol. XTACACS ‚Äď Enter this parameter if the server host utilizes the XTACACS protocol. TACACS+ ‚Äď Enter this parameter if the server host utilizes the TACACS+ protocol. RADIUS ‚Äď Enter this parameter if the server host utilizes the RADIUS protocol. Timeout (1-255)
Enter the time in seconds the Switch wil wait for the server host to reply to an authentication
request. The default value is 5 seconds. Key
Authentication key to be shared with a configured TACACS+ or RADIUS servers only. Specify
an alphanumeric string up to 254 characters. Retransmit (1-255) Enter the value in the retransmit field to change how many times the device wil resend an
authentication request when the server does not respond.
Click Apply to add the server host. Entries wil be displayed in the table on the lower half of this window.

NOTE: More than one authentication protocol can be run on the same
physical server host but, remember that TACACS/XTACACS/TACACS+

are separate entities and are not compatible with each other

Login Method Lists This command wil configure a user-defined or default Login Method List of authentication techniques for users logging
on to the Switch. The sequence of techniques implemented in this command wil affect the authentication result. For
example, if a user enters a sequence of techniques, for example TACACS ‚Äď XTACACS - local, the Switch wil send an
authentication request to the first TACACS host in the server group. If no response comes from the server host, the
Switch wil send an authentication request to the second TACACS host in the server group and so on, until the list is
exhausted. At that point, the Switch wil restart the same sequence with the following protocol listed, XTACACS. If no
authentication takes place using the XTACACS list, the local account database set in the Switch is used to
authenticate the user. When the local method is used, the privilege level wil be dependant on the local account
privilege configured on the Switch. When the user logins to the device successfully through TACACS/XTACACS/TACACS+server or none method, the
‚Äúuser‚ÄĚ privilege level is assigned only. If the user wants to get admin privilege level, the user must use the Enable Admin window to promote his privilege level. (See the Enable Admin part of this section for more detailed
information.) But when the user logins to the device successfully through RADIUS server or local method, 3 kinds of
privilege levels can be assigned to the user and the user cannot use the Enable Admin window to promote to admin
privilege level. To view this window, click Security > Access Authentication Control > Login Method Lists as shown below:

Figure 5 - 40 Login Method Lists window
The Switch contains one Method List that is set and cannot be removed, yet can be modified. To delete a Login
Method List defined by the user, click the corressponding Delete button. To modify a Login Method List, click on its
corresponding Edit button. To define a Login Method List, set the following parameters and click Apply: Parameter Description Method List Name
Enter a method list name defined by the user of up to 15 characters. Priority 1, 2, 3, 4
The user may add one, or a combination of up to four of the following authentication
methods to this method list: tacacs ‚Äď Adding this parameter wil require the user to be authenticated using the TACACS
protocol from a remote TACACS server. xtacacs ‚Äď Adding this parameter wil require the user to be authenticated using the
XTACACS protocol from a remote XTACACS server. tacacs+ ‚Äď Adding this parameter wil require the user to be authenticated using the
TACACS+ protocol from a remote TACACS+ server. radius ‚Äď Adding this parameter wil require the user to be authenticated using the RADIUS
protocol from a remote RADIUS server. server_group ‚Äď Adding this parameter wil require the user to be authenticated using a user-
defined server group previously configured on the Switch. local ‚Äď Adding this parameter wil require the user to be authenticated using the local user
account database on the Switch. none ‚Äď Adding this parameter wil require no authentication to access the Switch. Enable Method Lists The Enable Method List Settings window is used to set up Method Lists to promote users with user level privileges
to Administrator (Admin) level privileges using authentication methods on the Switch. Once a user acquires normal
user level privileges on the Switch, he or she must be authenticated by a method on the Switch to gain administrator
privileges on the Switch, which is defined by the Administrator. A maximum of eight Enable Method Lists can be
implemented on the Switch, one of which is a default Enable Method List. This default Enable Method List cannot be
deleted but can be configured. The sequence of methods implemented in this command wil affect the authentication result. For example, if a user
enters a sequence of methods like TACACS - XTACACS - Local Enable, the Switch wil send an authentication
request to the first TACACS host in the server group. If no verification is found, the Switch wil send an authentication
request to the second TACACS host in the server group and so on, until the list is exhausted. At that point, the Switch
wil restart the same sequence with the following protocol listed, XTACACS. If no authentication takes place using the
XTACACS list, the Local Enable password set in the Switch is used to authenticate the user. Successful authentication using any of these methods wil give the user an "Admin" privilege.

177 DGS-3700-12/DGS-3700-12G Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Switch User Manual NOTE: To set the Local Enable Password, see the next section, entitled
Local Enable Password.

Figure 5 - 41 Enable Method List window
To delete an Enable Method List defined by the user, click the correspoinding Delete button. To modify an Enable
Method List, click its corresponding Edit button. To define an Enable Login Method List, set the following parameters and click Apply: Parameter Description Method List Name
Enter a method list name defined by the user of up to 15 characters. Priority 1, 2, 3, 4
The user may add one, or a combination of up to four of the following authentication
methods to this method list: local_enable ‚Äď Adding this parameter wil require the user to be authenticated using the local
enable password database on the Switch. The user in the next section entitled Local Enable
Password must set the local enable password. none ‚Äď Adding this parameter wil require no authentication to access the Switch. radius ‚Äď Adding this parameter wil require the user to be authenticated using the RADIUS
protocol from a remote RADIUS server. tacacs ‚Äď Adding this parameter wil require the user to be authenticated using the TACACS
protocol from a remote TACACS server. xtacacs ‚Äď Adding this parameter wil require the user to be authenticated using the
XTACACS protocol from a remote XTACACS server. tacacs+ ‚Äď Adding this parameter wil require the user to be authenticated using the TACACS
protocol from a remote TACACS server. server_group ‚Äď Adding a previously configured server group wil require the user to be
authenticated using a user-defined server group previously configured on the Switch.

Local Enable Password Settings This window wil configure the local y enabled password for the Enable Admin command. When a user chooses the
"local_enable" method to promote user level privileges to administrator privileges, he or she wil be prompted to enter
the password configured here that is local y set on the Switch. To view this window, click Security > Access Authentication Control > Local Enable Password Settings as
shown below:

Figure 5 - 42 Local Enable Password window
To set the Local Enable Password, set the following parameters and click Apply. Parameter Description Old Local Enable
If a password was previously configured for this entry, enter it here in order to change it to Password
a new password New Local Enable
Enter the new password that you wish to set on the Switch to authenticate users Password
attempting to access Administrator Level privileges on the Switch. The user may set a
password of up to 15 characters. Confirm Local Enable
Confirm the new password entered above. Entering a different password here from the Password
one set in the New Local Enabled field wil result in a fail message.
If the user has configured the user privilege attribute of the RADIUS server (for example, User A has ‚ÄúAdmin‚ÄĚ
privilege) and the login is successful, the device wil assign the correct privilege level (according to the RADIUS
server) to the user. However, if the user does not configure the user privilege attribute and logs in successfully, the
device wil assign ‚ÄúUser‚ÄĚ privilege to this user.

RADIUS Accounting Settings The Accounting feature of the Switch uses a remote RADIUS server to collect information regarding events occurring
on the Switch. The following is a list of information that wil be sent to the RADIUS server when an event triggers the
Switch to send these informational packets.
‚ÄĘ Account Session ID
‚ÄĘ Username
‚ÄĘ Account Status Type
‚ÄĘ Service Type
‚ÄĘ Account Terminate Cause
‚ÄĘ NAS IP Address
‚ÄĘ Account Authentication
‚ÄĘ NAS Identifier
‚ÄĘ Account Delay Time
‚ÄĘ Calling Station ID
‚ÄĘ Account Session Time
There are three types of Accounting that can be enabled on the Switch. Network ‚Äď When enabled, the Switch wil send informational packets to a remote RADIUS server when network
events occur on the Switch. Shel ‚Äď When enabled, the Switch wil send informational packets to a remote RADIUS server when a user either logs
in, logs out or times out on the Switch, using the console, Telnet, or SSH. System - When enabled, the Switch wil send informational packets to a remote RADIUS server when system events
occur on the Switch, such as a system reset or system boot. Remember, this feature wil not work properly unless a RADIUS Server has first been configured. This RADIUS server
wil format, store and manage the information col ected here. To view this window, click Security > Access Authentication Control > RADIUS Accounting Settings as shown
below:

MAC-based Access Control MAC-based Access Control is a method to authenticate and authorize access using either a port or host. For port-
based MAC, the method decides port access rights, while for host-based MAC, the method determines the MAC
access rights. A MAC user must be authenticated before being granted access to a network. Both local authentication and remote
RADIUS server authentication methods are supported. In MAC-based Access Control, MAC user information in a local
database or a RADIUS server database is searched for authentication. Fol owing the authentication result, users
achieve different levels of authorization. Notes About MAC-based Access Control There are certain limitations and regulations regarding the MAC-based Access Control: 1. Once this feature is enabled for a port, the Switch wil clear the FDB of that port. 2. If a port is granted clearance for a MAC address in a VLAN that is not a Guest VLAN, other MAC addresses on
that port must be authenticated for access and otherwise wil be blocked by the switch.
3. A port accepts a maximum of sixteen authenticated MAC addresses per physical port of a VLAN that is not a
Guest VLAN. Other MAC addresses attempting authentication on a port with the maximum number of
authenticated MAC addresses wil be blocked.
4. Ports that have been enabled for Link Aggregation, stacking, 802.1X authentication, 802.1X Guest VLAN, Port
Security, GVRP or Web-based authentication cannot be enabled for the MAC-based Authentication. MAC-based Access Control Settings The following window is used to set the parameters for the MAC-based Access Control function on the Switch. Here
the user can set the running state, method of authentication, RADIUS password and view the Guest VLAN
configuration to be associated with the MAC-based Access Control function of the Switch.MAC-based Access Control
Global Settings To view this window, click Security > MAC-based Access Control > MAC-based Access Control Settings as
shown below:

Figure 5 - 44 MAC-based Access Control Settings window
The following parameters may be viewed or set: Parameter Description Settings MBA Global State
Click the radio buttons to globally enable or disable the MAC-based Access Control
function on the Switch. Method
Use the pull-down menu to choose the type of authentication to be used when
authentication MAC addresses on a given port. The user may choose between the
following methods: Local ‚Äď Use this method to utilize the local y set MAC address database as the
authenticator for MAC-based Access Control. This MAC address list can be
configured in the MAC-based Access Control Local Database Settings window. RADIUS ‚Äď Use this method to utilize a remote RADIUS server as the authenticator for
MAC-based Access Control. Remember, the MAC list must be previously set on the
RADIUS server and the settings for the server must be first configured on the Switch. Password
Enter the password for the RADIUS server, which is to be used for packets being sent
requesting authentication. The default password is ‚Äúdefault‚ÄĚ. Guest VLAN Name /
Click the radio button to configure the Guest VLAN Name or Guest VLAN ID. Enter Guest VLAN ID
the name of the previously configured Guest VLAN being used for this function. Guest VLAN Member Ports Enter the list of ports that have been configured for the Guest VLAN. Port Settings From Port / To Port
Enter the Port range. State
Use the pull-down menu to enable or disable the MAC-based Access Control function
on individual ports. Mode
Select Host Based or Mac Based mode. Aging Time (1-1440)
The time period during which an authenticated host wil be kept in an authenticated
state. When the aging time is timed out, the host wil be moved back to an

181 DGS-3700-12/DGS-3700-12G Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Switch User Manual
unauthenticated state. The range is between 1 and 1440 minutes. The default is 1440. Hold Time (1-300)
If a host fails to pass authentication, the next authentication wil not started within hold
time unless the user clears the entry state manual y. The default is 300.
Click Apply to implement changes.

MAC-based Access Control Local Settings The following window is used to set a list of MAC addresses, along with their corresponding target VLAN, which wil be
authenticated for the Switch. Once a queried MAC address is matched in this table, it wil be placed in the VLAN
associated with it here. The switch administrator may enter up to 128 MAC addresses to be authenticated using the
local method configured here. To view this window, click Security > MAC-based Access Control > MAC-based Access Control Local Settings
as shown below:

Figure 5 - 45 MAC-based Access Control Local MAC Settings
To add a MAC address to the local authentication list, enter the MAC address and the target VLAN name into their
appropriate fields and click Apply. To change a MAC address or a VLAN in the list, click the corresponding Edit
button. To delete a MAC address entry, enter its parameters into the appropriate fields and click Delete By MAC, to
delete a VLAN, enter its parameters into the appropriate fields and click Delete By VLAN. To search for a MAC or a
VLAN enter the information in the appropriate fields and click Find By MAC or Find By VLAN.

182 DGS-3700-12/DGS-3700-12G Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Switch User Manual Web Authentication Web authentication, also known as Web-based Access Control, is another port based access control method
implemented similarily to the 802.1X port based access control method previously stated. This function wil allow user
authentication through a RADIUS server or through the local authentication set on the Switch when a user is trying to
access the network via the switch, if the port connected to the user is enabled for this feature. The user attempting to gain web access wil be prompted for a username and password before being allowed to
accept HTTP packets from the Switch. When a client attempts to access a website, that port is placed in the
authentication VLAN set by the user. Al clients in this authentication VLAN wil be queried for authentication by the
local method or through a RADIUS server. Once accepted, the user wil be placed in a target VLAN on the Switch
where it wil have rights and privileges to openly access the Internet. If denied access, no packets wil pass through to
the user and thus, that user wil be returned to the authentication VLAN from where it came and the authentication
procedure wil have to be reattempted by the user. Once a client has been authenticated on a particular port, that port wil be placed in the pre-configured VLAN and any
other clients on that port wil be automatically authenticated to access the specified Redirection Path URL, as well as
the authenticated client. Here is an example of the basic six step process all parties of the authentication go through for a successful Web-
based Access Control process.

183 DGS-3700-12/DGS-3700-12G Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Switch User Manual Conditions and Limitations
1. The subnet of the authentication VLAN‚Äôs IP interface must be the same as that of the client. If not configured
properly, the authentication wil be permanently denied by the authenticator.
2. If the client is utilizing DHCP to attain an IP address, the authentication VLAN must provide a DHCP server or
a DHCP relay function so that client may obtain an IP address.
3. The authentication VLAN of this function must be configured to access a DNS server to improve CPU
performance, and allow the processing of DNS, UDP and HTTP packets.
4. Certain functions exist on the Switch that wil filter HTTP packets, such as the Access Profile function. The
user needs to be very careful when setting filter functions for the target VLAN, so that these HTTP packets are
not denied by the Switch.
5. The Redirection Path must be set before the Web-based Access Control can be enabled. If not, the user wil
be prompted with an error message and the Web-based Access Control wil not be enabled.
6. If a RADIUS server is to be used for authentication, the user must first establish a RADIUS Server with the
appropriate parameters, including the target VLAN, before enabling the Web-based Access Control on the
Switch. Web-based Access Control Settings This window is used to configure the Switch for Web-based Access Control Settings on the Switch. To view this window, click Security > Web Authenication >Web-based Access Control Settings as shown below:

Figure 5 - 46 Web-based Access Control Settings
To set the Web-based Access Control for the Switch, complete the following fields: Parameter Description State
Toggle the State field to either Enable or Disable for the Web-based Access Control settings
of the Switch. Method
Use the pul -down menu to choose the authenticator for Web-based Access Control. The user
may choose: local ‚Äď Choose this parameter to use the local authentication method of the Switch as the
authenticating method for users trying to access the network via the switch. This is, in fact, the
username and password to access the Switch configured using the User Account Creation
screen seen below. radius ‚Äď Choose this parameter to use a remote RADIUS server as the authenticating method

184 DGS-3700-12/DGS-3700-12G Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Switch User Manual
for users trying to access the network via the switch. This RADIUS server must have already
been pre-assigned by the administrator using the RADIUS Server window located in the
802.1X section. Logout Timer
The logout time in displayed in minutes, enter a value between 1 and 1440. (1-1440) Authentication
Enter the VLAN name which users wil be placed while authenticated by the Switch or a VLAN
RADIUS server. This VLAN should be pre-configured to have limited access rights to web
based authenticated users. Redirection Page
Enter the URL of the website that authenticated users placed in the VLAN are directed to once
authenticated. This path must be entered into this field before the Web-based Access Control
can be enabled. Port List
Specify the ports to be enabled as Web-based Access Control ports. Only these ports wil
accept authentication parameters from the user wishing limited access rights through the
Switch. When one client on a port has been authenticated for Web-based Access Control, al
clients on this port are authenticated as wel . Use the State pull-down menu to enable these configured ports as Web-based Access Control
ports.
Click Apply to implement changes made. NOTE: To enable the Web-based Access Control function, the redirection path field must have
the URL of the website that users wil be directed to once they enter the limited resource, pre-
configured VLAN. Users who attempt to Apply settings without the Redirection Page field set
wil be prompted with an error message and Web-based Access Control wil not be enabled.

The URL should follow the form http(s)://www.dlink.com NOTE: The subnet of the IP address of the authentication VLAN must be the same as that of
the client, or the client wil always be denied authentication.

NOTE: A successful authentication should direct the client to the stated web page. If the client
does not reach this web page, yet does not receive a Fail! message, the client wil already be
authenticated and therefore should refresh the current browser window or attempt to open a

different web page.

Web-based Access Control User Settings This window is used to configure the Switch for Web Authentication Settings. To view this window, click Security > Web Authenication > Web-based Access Control User Settings as shown
below:

185 DGS-3700-12/DGS-3700-12G Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Switch User Manual User Name
Enter the username of up to 15 alphanumeric characters of the guest wishing to access the
web through this process. This field is for administrators who have selected local as their web
based authenticator. VLAN Name
Enter the VLAN name of a previously configured VLAN to which the successfully
authenticated web user wil be mapped. Password
Enter the password the administrator has chosen for the selected user. This field is case
sensitive and must be a complete alphanumeric string. This field is for administrators who
have selected local as their web based authenticator. Confirmation
Re-enter the password.
Click Apply to implement changes.

NetBIOS Filtering NetBIOS is an application programming interface, providing a set of functions that applications use to communicate
across networks. NetBEUI, the NetBIOS Enhanced User Interface, was created as a data-link-layer frame structure for
NetBIOS. A simple mechanism to carry NetBIOS traffic, NetBEUI has been the protocol of choice for small MS-DOS-
and Windows-based workgroups. NetBIOS no longer lives strictly inside of the NetBEUI protocol. Microsoft worked to
create the international standards described in RFC 1001 and RFC 1002, NetBIOS over TCP/IP (NBT). If the network administrator wants to block the network communication on more than two computers which use
NETBUEI protocol, it can use NETBIOS filtering to filter these kinds of packets. If the user enables the NETBIOS filter, the switch wil create one access profile and three access rules automatically.
If the user enables the extensive NETBIOS filter, the switch wil create one more access profile and one more access
rule. NetBIOS Filtering Settings This window is used to configure the NetBIOS Filtering Setting. To view this window, click Security >NetBIOSFiltering Settings as shown below: Figure 5 - 48 NetBIOS Filtering Settings window
Enter the ports you wish to configure to filter NetBIOS packets from specified ports and click Apply.

Access profiles allow you to establish criteria to determine whether or not the Switch wil forward packets based on the
information contained in each packet's header. These criteria can be specified on a basis of Packet Content, MAC
address, or IP address. Due to a chipset limitation, the Switch supports a maximum of 12 access profiles. The rules used to define the access
profiles are limited to a total of 1536 rules for the Switch.

ACL Configuration Wizard The ACL Configuration Wizard wil aid with the creation of access profiles and ACL rules. The ACL Wizard wil create
the access rule and profile automatically. To view this window, click ACL >ACL Configuration Wizard as shown below: Figure 6 - 1 ACL Configuration Wizard window
The following parameters can be configured. Parameter Description Type
Select the type of ACL you wish to create, either normal or CPU. Profile Name
Select a unique Profile Name for this profile set. Profile ID (1-12)
Enter a unique identifier number for this profile set. This value can be set from 1 to 12. Access ID (1-128)
Type in a unique identifier number for this access. This value can be set from 1 to 128.

187 DGS-3700-12/DGS-3700-12G Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Switch User Manual From
Use the drop-down menu to select from MAC Address, IPv4 Address or IPv6. To
Use the drop-down menu to select from MAC Address, IPv4 Address or IPv6. When IPv6 is
selected the user can only enter the IPv6 source address or the IPv6 destination address at
any one time. Action
Select Permit to specify that the packets that match the access profile are forwarded by the
Switch, according to any additional rule added (see below). Select Deny to specify the packets that match the access profile to be filtered. Select Mirror to specify that packets that match the access profile are mirrored to a port
defined in the config mirror port command. Port Mirroring must be enabled and a target port
must be set. Option
Use the pull down menu to select an option, the user can choose between Rate Limiting, Change 1P Priority, Replace DSCP and Replace ToS Precedence. Apply To
Use the pull down menu to select an option, the user can choose between Ports, VLAN Name or VLAN ID and enter the appropriate information.
Click Apply to implement changes made. Access Profile List Creating an access profile is divided into two basic parts. The first is to specify which part or parts of a frame the
Switch will examine, such as the MAC source address or the IP destination address. The second part is entering the
criteria the Switch wil use to determine what to do with the frame. The entire process is described below in two parts. To view this window, click ACL > Access Profile List as shown below: Figure 6 - 2 Access Profile Lists
To add an ACL Profile, click the Add ACL Profile button, which, wil display the window below. There are four Access Profile Configuration pages; one for Ethernet (or MAC address-based) profile configuration, one for IPv4 address-
based profile configuration, one for the Packet Content and one for IPv6. You can explore the four Access Profile Configuration options by entering a Profile ID and Profile Name and using the radio button to select an ACL Type
and click Select. The user may remove al Access Profiles by clicking the Delete All button (This button wil not clear
Address Binding ACL entries, which can only be deleted through the IP-MAC Binding window). The page shown
below is the Ethernet Access Profile Configuration page.

Figure 6 - 4 Add Ethernet ACL Profile window
Click on the boxes at the top of the table, which wil then turn red and reveal parameters for configuration. To create a
new entry enter the correct information and click Create. To return to the Access Profile List page click Back. The following parameters can be configured. Parameter Description Ethernet ACL
To configure this profile select the Ethernet ACL, and use the drop down menu to choose
between tagged or untagged. Source MAC Mask
Enter a MAC address mask for the source MAC address. Destination MAC
Enter a MAC address mask for the destination MAC address. Mask Select ACL Type
Select profile based on Ethernet (MAC Address), IPv4 address, IPv6 or packet content
mask. This wil change the menu according to the requirements for the type of profile.
Select Ethernet to instruct the Switch to examine the layer 2 part of each packet
header. Select IPv4 to instruct the Switch to examine the IPv4 address in each frame's
header. Select IPv6 to instruct the Switch to examine the IPv6 address in each frame‚Äôs
header. Select Packet Content Mask to specify a mask to check the content of the packet
header. 802.1Q VLAN
Selecting this option instructs the Switch to examine the VLAN identifier of each packet
header and use this as the full or partial criterion for forwarding. 802.1P
Selecting this option instructs the Switch to examine the 802.1p priority value of each packet
header and use this as the, or part of the criterion for forwarding.

190 DGS-3700-12/DGS-3700-12G Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Switch User Manual Ethernet Type
Selecting this option instructs the Switch to examine the Ethernet type value in each frame's
header.
Click Create to view the new Access Profile List entry in the Access Profile List table shown below. To add another
Access Profile click Add ACL Profile. To delete a profile click the corresponding Delete button, to view the specific
configurations for an entry click the Show Details button. To add a rule to the Access Profile entry, click the Add/View Rules button.

Figure 6 - 5 Access Profile List (Ethernet)
To view the configurations for previously configured entry click on the corresponding Show Details Button which will
display the following window.

Figure 6 - 6 Access Profile Details (Ethernet)
To return to the Access Profile List click Show All Profiles, to add a rule to a previously configured entry click on the
corresponding Add/View Rules, which wil reveal the following window.

Figure 6 - 7 Access Profile Ethernet
To set the Access Rule for Ethernet, adjust the following parameters and click Apply. Parameter Description Access ID (1-128) Type in a unique identifier number for this access. This value can be set from 1 to 128.
Auto Assign ‚Äď Ticking this check box wil instruct the Switch to automatically assign an Access ID
for the rule being created. VLAN Mask
Al ows the entry of a VLAN Mask for a previously configured VLAN. VLAN ID
Al ows the entry of a VLAN ID for a previously configured VLAN. 802.1p (0-7)
Enter a value from 0 to 7 to specify that the access profile wil apply only to packets with this
802.1p priority value. Action
Select Permit to specify that the packets that match the access profile are forwarded by the
Switch, according to any additional rule added (see below). Select Deny to specify the packets that match the access profile are not forwarded by the Switch
and wil be filtered. Select Mirror to specify that packets that match the access profile are mirrored to a port defined
in the config mirror port command. Port Mirroring must be enabled and a target port must be set. Priority
Enter a priority value if you want to re-write the 802.1p default priority of a packet to the value
entered in the Priority field, which meets the criteria specified previously in this command, before
forwarding it on to the specified CoS queue. Otherwise, a packet wil have its incoming 802.1p
user priority re-written to its original value before being forwarded by the Switch. For more information on priority queues, CoS queues and mapping for 802.1p, see the QoS
section of this manual. Replace Priority
Enter a replace priority manual y if you want to re-write the 802.1p default priority of a packet to
the value entered in the Priority field, which meets the criteria specified previously in this
command, before forwarding it on to the specified CoS queue. Otherwise, a packet wil have its
incoming 802.1p user priority re-written to its original value before being forwarded by the Switch Replace DSCP (0- Select this option to instruct the Switch to replace the DSCP value (in a packet that meets the 63)
selected criteria) with the value entered in the adjacent field. Replace ToS
Select this option to instruct the Switch to replace the Type of Service as part of the packet

192 DGS-3700-12/DGS-3700-12G Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Switch User Manual Precedence
header. Time Range
Tick the check box and enter the name of the Time Range settings that has been previously Name
configured in the Time RangeSettings window. This wil set specific times when this access rule
wil be implemented on the Switch. Rx Rate (1-15624) Use this to limit Rx bandwidth for the profile being configured. This rate is implemented using the
following equation: 1 value = 64Kbit/sec. (ex. If the user selects an Rx rate of 10 then the ingress
rate is 640Kbit/sec.) The user many select a value between 1 and 15624 or tick the No Limit
check box. The default setting is No Limit. Counter
Specifies whether counter feature wil be enabled/disabled This is optional, the default is disabled. If the rule is not binded with flow_meter, then all packet matched wil be countered. If the rule is binded with flow_meter, then ‚Äúcounter‚ÄĚ here wil be overrided. Ports
Specifies the access rule wil take effect on one port or a range of ports. VLAN Name
Specifies the access rule wil take effect on the VLAN Name specified. VLAN ID
Specifies the access rule wil take effect on the VLAN ID specified.
Click Apply to display the following Access Rule List window.

Figure 6 - 9 Access Rule Detail Information (Ethernet)
To create an IPv4 ACL select IPv4, enter the Profile ID and Profile Name into the top half of the screen in the Add ACL Profile window and click Select the following window wil appear.

Figure 6 - 10 Add IPv4 ACL Profile
Click on the boxes at the top of the table, which wil then turn red and reveal parameters for configuration. To create a
new entry enter the correct information and click Create. To return to the Access Profile List page click Back. The following parameters can be set, for IP: Parameter Description VLAN
Selecting this option instructs the Switch to examine the VLAN part of each packet header
and use this as the, or part of the criterion for forwarding. DSCP
Selecting this option instructs the Switch to examine the DiffServ Code part of each packet
header and use this as the, or part of the criterion for forwarding. Source IP Mask
Enter an IP address mask for the source IP address. Destination IP Mask
Enter an IP address mask for the destination IP address. ICMP Type
‚ÄĘ icmp ‚Äď Specifies that the Switch wil examine the Internet Control Message Protocol
(ICMP) field within each packet.
‚ÄĘ type <value 0-255> ‚Äď Specifies that the Switch wil examine the type field within each
packet.
‚ÄĘ code <value 0-255> ‚Äď Specifies that the Switch wil examine the code field within each
packet. Protocol
Selecting this option instructs the Switch to examine the protocol type value in each frame's
header. You must then specify what protocol(s) to include according to the following
guidelines: Select ICMP to instruct the Switch to examine the Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP)
field in each frame's header.
Select Type to further specify that the access profile wil apply an ICMP type
value, or specify Code to further specify that the access profile wil apply an ICMP

194 DGS-3700-12/DGS-3700-12G Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Switch User Manual
code value.
Select IGMP to instruct the Switch to examine the Internet Group Management Protocol
(IGMP) field in each frame's header.
Select Type to further specify that the access profile wil apply an IGMP type value
Select TCP to use the TCP port number contained in an incoming packet as the forwarding
criterion. Selecting TCP requires that you specify a source port mask and/or a destination
port mask. The user may also identify which flag bits to filter. Flag bits are parts of a packet
that determine what to do with the packet. The user may filter packets by filtering certain flag
bits within the packets, by checking the boxes corresponding to the flag bits of the TCP field.
The user may choose between urg (urgent), ack (acknowledgement), psh (push), rst
(reset), syn (synchronize), fin (finish). src port mask ‚Äď Specify a TCP port mask for the source port in hex form (hex
0x0-0xffff), which you wish to filter. dst port mask ‚Äď Specify a TCP port mask for the destination port in hex form (hex
0x0-0xffff) which you wish to filter.
Select UDP to use the UDP port number contained in an incoming packet as the forwarding
criterion. Selecting UDP requires that you specify a source port mask and/or a destination
port mask. src port mask ‚Äď Specify a TCP port mask for the source port in hex form (hex
0x0-0xffff) to be filtered. dst port mask ‚ąí Specify a TCP port mask for the destination port in hex form (hex
0x0-0xffff) to be filtered. Protocol_id <0x0-0xff> ‚Äď Enter a value defining the protocol ID in the packet header to
mask. user_define_mask<hex 0x0-0xffffffff> ‚Äď Enter a value defining the mask options behind
the IP header.
Click Apply to implement changes made.

Click Create to view the new Access Profile List entry in the Access Profile List table shown below. To add another
Access Profile click Add ACL Profile. To delete a profile click the corresponding Delete button, to view the specific
configurations for an entry click the Show Details button. To add a rule to the Access Profile entry, click the Add/View Rules button.

Figure 6 - 11 Access Profile List (IPv4)
To view the configurations for previously configured entry click on the corresponding Show Details Button which will
display the following window.

Figure 6 - 12 Access Profile Details (IPv4)
To return to the Access Profile List click Show All Profiles, to add a rule to a previously configured entry click on the
corresponding Add/View Rules, which wil reveal the following window;

Figure 6 - 13 Access Profile (IPv4)
The following parameters may be configured for the IP (IPv4) filter. Parameter Description Access ID (1-128)
Type in a unique identifier number for this access. This value can be set from 1 to 128. Action
Select Permit to specify that the packets that match the access profile are forwarded by the
Switch, according to any additional rule added (see below). Select Deny to specify the packets that match the access profile to be filtered. Select Mirror to specify that packets that match the access profile are mirrored to a port
defined in the config mirror port command. Port Mirroring must be enabled and a target port
must be set. Priority (0-7)
Enter a priority value if you want to re-write the 802.1p default priority of a packet to the
value entered in the Priority field, which meets the criteria specified previously in this
command, before forwarding it on to the specified CoS queue. Otherwise, a packet wil have
its incoming 802.1p user priority re-written to its original value before being forwarded by the
Switch. Replace Priority
Enter a replace priority manual y if you want to re-write the 802.1p default priority of a packet
to the value entered in the Priority field, which meets the criteria specified previously in this
command, before forwarding it on to the specified CoS queue. Otherwise, a packet wil have
its incoming 802.1p user priority re-written to its original value before being forwarded by the

196 DGS-3700-12/DGS-3700-12G Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Switch User Manual
Switch Replace DSCP
Select this option to instruct the Switch to replace the DSCP value (in a packet that meets
the selected criteria) with the value entered in the adjacent field. Replace ToS
Select this option to instruct the Switch to replace the Type of Service as part of the packet Precedence
header. VLAN Mask
Al ows the entry of a name for a previously configured VLAN. VLAN ID
Al ows the entry of a VLAN ID for a previously configured VLAN. DSCP
Selecting this option instructs the Switch to examine the DiffServ Code part of each packet
header and use this as the criteria, or part of the criterion for forwarding. ICMP
Select ICMP to instruct the Switch to examine the Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP)
field in each frame's header. Rx Rate (1-15624)
Use this to limit Rx bandwidth for the profile being configured. This rate is implemented
using the following equation: 1 value = 64Kbit/sec. (ex. If the user selects an Rx rate of 10
then the ingress rate is 640Kbit/sec.) The user many select a value between 1 and 15624 or
tick the No Limit check box. The default setting is No Limit. Time Range Name
Tick the check box and enter the name of the Time Range settings that has been previously
configured in the Time RangeSettings window. This wil set specific times when this
access rule wil be implemented on the Switch. Counter
Enable or disable the counter settings. Ports
Specifies that the access rule wil take effect on one port or a range of ports. VLAN Name
Specifies the access rule wil take effect on the VLAN Name specified. VLAN ID
Specifies the access rule wil take effect on the VLAN ID specified.
Click Apply to display the following Access Rule List window.

Figure 6 - 15 Access Rule Detail Information
To configure the IPv6 ACL select IPv6 in the Add ACL Profile window, enter the Profile ID and Profile Name into the
top half of the screen in the Add ACL Profile window and click Select, the following window wil appear.

Figure 6 - 16 Add IPv6 ACL Profile
Click on the boxes at the top of the table, which wil then turn red and reveal parameters for configuration. To create a
new entry enter the correct information and click Create. To return to the Access Profile List page click Back. The following parameters can be set, for IPv6: Parameter Description IPv6 Class
Ticking this check box wil instruct the Switch to examine the class field of the IPv6 header.
This class field is a part of the packet header that is similar to the Type of Service (ToS) or
Precedence bits field in IPv4. IPv6 Flow Label
Ticking this check box wil instruct the Switch to examine the flow label field of the IPv6
header. This flow label field is used by a source to label sequences of packets such as non-
default quality of service or real time service packets. IPv6 TCP
Ticking this check box wil specify that the rule applies to TCP traffic. The user can enter a specific TCP Source Port Mask or TCP Destination Port Mask. IPv6 UDP
Ticking this check box wil specify that the rule applies to UDP traffic. The user can enter a specific UDP Source Port Mask or UDP Destination Port Mask. IPv6 Address IPv6 Source Address ‚Äď Enter an IPv6 address to be used as the source address mask. IPv6 Destination Address ‚Äď Enter an IPv6 address that wil be used as the destination
address mask. NOTE: At any one time the user can only choose IPv6 class and
IPv6 Flow Label together or IPv6 Address by itself.

Click Apply to implement changes made.

198 DGS-3700-12/DGS-3700-12G Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Switch User Manual
Click Create to view the new Access Profile List entry in the Access Profile List table shown below. To add another
Access Profile click Add ACL Profile. To delete a profile click the corresponding Delete button, to view the specific
configurations for an entry click the Show Details button. To add a rule to the Access Profile entry, click the Add/View Rules button.

Figure 6 - 17 Access Profile List (IPv6)
To view the configurations for previously configured entry click on the corresponding Show Details Button which will
display the following window.

Figure 6 - 18 Access Profile Details (IPv6)
To return to the CPU Access Profile List click Show Al Profiles, to add a rule to a previously configured entry click on
the corresponding Add/View Rules, which wil reveal the following window.

Figure 6 - 19 Access Profile (IPv6)
The following parameters may be configured for the IP (IPv6) filter. Parameter Description Access ID (1-128)
Enter a unique identifier number for this access. This value can be set from 1 to 128. Class
Specifies the IPv6 Class. Enter a value between 0 ‚Äď 255. Flow Label
Specifies the IPv6 Flow Label. Enter a value between 0 ‚Äď FFFFF. Action
Select Permit to specify that the packets that match the access profile are forwarded by the
Switch, according to any additional rule added (see below). Select Deny to specify the packets that match the access profile to be filtered. Select Mirror to specify that packets that match the access profile are mirrored to a port
defined in the config mirror port command. Port Mirroring must be enabled and a target port
must be set. Priority (0-7)
Enter a priority value if you want to re-write the 802.1p default priority of a packet to the
value entered in the Priority field, which meets the criteria specified previously in this
command, before forwarding it on to the specified CoS queue. Otherwise, a packet wil have
its incoming 802.1p user priority re-written to its original value before being forwarded by the
Switch. Replace Priority
Enter a replace priority manual y if you want to re-write the 802.1p default priority of a packet
to the value entered in the Priority field, which meets the criteria specified previously in this
command, before forwarding it on to the specified CoS queue. Otherwise, a packet wil have
its incoming 802.1p user priority re-written to its original value before being forwarded by the
Switch Replace DSCP
Select this option to instruct the Switch to replace the DSCP value (in a packet that meets
the selected criteria) with the value entered in the adjacent field. Replace ToS
Select this option to instruct the Switch to replace the Type of Service as part of the packet Precedence
header. Class
Entering a class wil instruct the Switch to examine the class field of the IPv6 header. This
class field is a part of the packet header that is similar to the Type of Service (ToS) or

200 DGS-3700-12/DGS-3700-12G Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Switch User Manual
Precedence bits field in IPv4. Rx Rate (1-15624)
Use this to limit Rx bandwidth for the profile being configured. This rate is implemented
using the following equation: 1 value = 64Kbit/sec. (ex. If the user selects an Rx rate of 10
then the ingress rate is 640Kbit/sec.) The user many select a value between 1 and 15624 or
tick the No Limit check box. The default setting is No Limit. Time Range Name
Tick the check box and enter the name of the Time Range settings that has been previously
configured in the Time RangeSettings window. This wil set specific times when this
access rule wil be implemented on the Switch. Counter
Enable or disable the counter settings. Ports
Specifies that the access rule wil take effect on one port or a range of ports. VLAN Name
Specifies the access rule wil take effect on the VLAN Name specified. VLAN ID
Specifies the access rule wil take effect on the VLAN ID specified.
Click Apply to display the following Access Rule List window.

Figure 6 - 21 Access Rule Detail Inforamtion (IPv6)
To configure the Packet Content ACL select Packet Content in the Add ACL Profile window, enter the Profile ID and
Profile Name into the top half of the screen in the Add ACL Profile window and click Select, the following window wil
appear.

Figure 6 - 22 Add Packet Content ACL Profile
Click on the boxes at the top of the table, which wil then turn red and reveal parameters for configuration. To create a
new entry enter the correct information and click Create. To return to the Access Profile List page click Previous Page. The following parameters can be set, for Packet Content: Parameter Description Chunk
Al ows users to examine up to 4 specified offset_chunks within a packet at one time and specifies
the frame content offset and mask. There are 4 chunk offsets and masks that can be configured. A
chunk mask presents 4 bytes. 4 offset_chunks can be selected from a possible 32 predefined
offset_chunks as described below: offset_chunk_1, offset_chunk_2, offset_chunk_3, offset_chunk_4.

Example:
offset_chunk_1 0 0xffffffff wil match packet byte offset 126,127,0,1
offset_chunk_1 0 0xffff wil match packet byte offset,0,1 Note: Only one packet_content_mask profile can be created. With this advanced unique Packet Content Mask (also known as Packet Content Access Control
List - ACL), the D-Link switch family can effectively mitigate some network attacks like the
common ARP Spoofing attack that is wide spread today. This is why the Packet Content ACL is

202 DGS-3700-12/DGS-3700-12G Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Switch User Manual
able to inspect any specified content of a packet in different protocol layers.
Click Apply to implement changes made. Click Create to view the new Access Profile List entry in the Access Profile List table shown below. To add another
Access Profile click Add ACL Profile. To delete a profile click the corresponding Delete button, to view the specific
configurations for an entry click the Show Details button. To add a rule to the Access Profile entry, click the Add/View Rules button.

Figure 6 - 23 Access Profile List (Packet Content)
To view the configurations for previously configured entry click on the corresponding Show Details Button which will
display the following window.

Figure 6 - 24 Access Profile Details (Packet Content)
To return to the CPU Access Profile List click Show Al Profiles, to add a rule to a previously configured entry click on
the corresponding Add/View Rules, which wil reveal the following window:

Figure 6 - 25 Access Profile (Packet Content)
The following parameters may be configured for the Packet Content filter. Parameter Description Access ID (1-128)
Type in a unique identifier number for this access. This value can be set from 1 to 128. Action
Select Permit to specify that the packets that match the access profile are forwarded by the
Switch, according to any additional rule added (see below). Select Deny to specify the packets that match the access profile to be filtered. Select Mirror to specify that packets that match the access profile are mirrored to a port
defined in the config mirror port command. Port Mirroring must be enabled and a target port
must be set. Priority (0-7)
Enter a priority value if you want to re-write the 802.1p default priority of a packet to the
value entered in the Priority field, which meets the criteria specified previously in this
command, before forwarding it on to the specified CoS queue. Otherwise, a packet wil have
its incoming 802.1p user priority re-written to its original value before being forwarded by the
Switch. Replace DSCP
Select this option to instruct the Switch to replace the DSCP value (in a packet that meets
the selected criteria) with the value entered in the adjacent field. Replace ToS
Select this option to instruct the Switch to replace the Type of Service as part of the packet Precedence
header. Chunk
This field wil instruct the Switch to mask the packet header beginning with the offset value
specified. Rx Rate (1-15624)
Use this to limit Rx bandwidth for the profile being configured. This rate is implemented
using the following equation: 1 value = 64Kbit/sec. (ex. If the user selects an Rx rate of 10
then the ingress rate is 640Kbit/sec.) The user many select a value between 1 and 15624 or
tick the No Limit check box. The default setting is No Limit. Time Range Name
Tick the check box and enter the name of the Time Range settings that has been previously
configured in the Time RangeSettings window. This wil set specific times when this
access rule wil be implemented on the Switch.

204 DGS-3700-12/DGS-3700-12G Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Switch User Manual Counter
Enable or disable the counter settings. Ports
Specifies that the access rule wil take effect on one port or a range of ports. VLAN Name
Specifies the access rule wil take effect on the VLAN Name specified. VLAN ID
Specifies the access rule wil take effect on the VLAN ID specified.
Click Apply to display the following Access Rule List window.

Figure 6 - 27 Access Rule Detail Information (Packet Content) NOTE: Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) is the standard for finding a
host's hardware address (MAC Address). However, ARP is vulnerable as
it can be easily spoofed and utilized to attack a LAN. For a more detailed
explanation on how ARP works and how to employ D-Link‚Äôs advanced

unique Packet Content ACL to prevent ARP spoofing attack, please see
Appendix B, at the end of this manual.

CPU Interface Filtering Due to a chipset limitation and needed extra switch security, the Switch incorporates CPU Interface filtering. This
added feature increases the running security of the Switch by enabling the user to create a list of access rules for
packets destined for the Switch‚Äôs CPU interface. Employed similarly to the Access Profile feature previously
mentioned, CPU interface filtering examines Ethernet, IP and Packet Content Mask packet headers destined for the
CPU and wil either forward them or filter them, based on the user‚Äôs implementation. As an added feature for the CPU
Filtering, the Switch allows the CPU filtering mechanism to be enabled or disabled global y, permitting the user to
create various lists of rules without immediately enabling them. Creating an access profile for the CPU is divided into two basic parts. The first is to specify which part or parts of a
frame the Switch wil examine, such as the MAC source address or the IP destination address. The second part is
entering the criteria the Switch wil use to determine what to do with the frame. The entire process is described below.

205 DGS-3700-12/DGS-3700-12G Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Switch User Manual CPU Access Profile List In the following window, the user may global y enable or disable the CPU Interface Filtering State mechanism by using
the radio buttons to change the running state. To view this window, click ACL > CPU Access Profile List as shown below: Choose Enabled to enable CPU packets to be scrutinized by the Switch and Disabled to disal ow this scrutiny.

Figure 6 - 29 Add CPU ACL Profile window for Ethernet Parameter Description Select Profile ID Use the drop-down menu to select a unique identifier number for this profile set. This value can
be set from 1 to 5. Select ACL Type Select profile based on Ethernet (MAC Address), IPv4 address, IPv6, or packet content mask.
This wil change the menu according to the requirements for the type of profile. Select Ethernet to instruct the Switch to examine the layer 2 part of each packet header. Select IPv4 to instruct the Switch to examine the IPv4 address in each frame's header. Select IPv6 to instruct the Switch to examine the IPv6 address in each frame's header. Select Packet Content Mask to specify a mask to check the content of the packet header. Source MAC
Enter a MAC address mask for the source MAC address. Mask Destination MAC Enter a MAC address mask for the destination MAC address. Mask 802.1Q VLAN
Selecting this option instructs the Switch to examine the VLAN identifier of each packet header
and use this as the full or partial criterion for forwarding. 802.1P
Selecting this option instructs the Switch to specify that the access profile wil apply only to
packets with this 802.1p priority value. Ethernet Type
Selecting this option instructs the Switch to examine the Ethernet type value in each frame's
header.
Click Apply to set this entry in the Switch‚Äôs memory. To view the settings of a previously correctly created profile, click the corresponding Show Details button on the CPU Access Profile List window to view the following window:

Figure 6 - 31 Add CPU ACL Profile window for IP (IPv4)
The following parameters may be configured for the IP (IPv4) filter. Parameter Description Select Profile ID
Use the drop-down menu to select a unique identifier number for this profile set. This value
can be set from 1 to 5. Select ACL Type
Select profile based on Ethernet (MAC Address), IPv4 address, IPv6, or packet content
mask. This wil change the menu according to the requirements for the type of profile. Select Ethernet to instruct the Switch to examine the layer 2 part of each packet header. Select IPv4 to instruct the Switch to examine the IPv4 address in each frame's header. Select IPv6 to instruct the Switch to examine the IPv6 address in each frame's header. Select Packet Content Mask to specify a mask to check the content of the packet header. 802.1Q VLAN
Selecting this option instructs the Switch to examine the VLAN part of each packet header
and use this as the, or part of the criterion for forwarding. IPv4 DSCP
Selecting this option instructs the Switch to examine the DiffServ Code part of each packet
header and use this as the, or part of the criterion for forwarding. Source IP Mask
Enter an IP address mask for the source IP address.

208 DGS-3700-12/DGS-3700-12G Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Switch User Manual Destination IP Mask
Enter an IP address mask for the destination IP address. Protocol
Selecting this option instructs the Switch to examine the protocol type value in each frame's
header. You must then specify what protocol(s) to include according to the following
guidelines: Select ICMP to instruct the Switch to examine the Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP)
field in each frame's header.
Select Type to further specify that the access profile wil apply an ICMP type value, or
specify Code to further specify that the access profile wil apply an ICMP code
value.
Select IGMP to instruct the Switch to examine the Internet Group Management Protocol
(IGMP) field in each frame's header.
Select Type to further specify that the access profile wil apply an IGMP type value.
Select TCP to use the TCP port number contained in an incoming packet as the forwarding
criterion. Selecting TCP requires a source port mask and/or a destination port mask is to be
specified. The user may also identify which flag bits to filter. Flag bits are parts of a packet
that determine what to do with the packet. The user may filter packets by filtering certain flag
bits within the packets, by checking the boxes corresponding to the flag bits of the TCP field.
The user may choose between urg (urgent), ack (acknowledgement), psh (push), rst (reset),
syn (synchronize), fin (finish). src port mask ‚Äď Specify a TCP port mask for the source port in hex form (hex 0x0-0xffff),
which you wish to filter. dst port mask ‚Äď Specify a TCP port mask for the destination port in hex form (hex 0x0-
0xffff) which you wish to filter.
Select UDP to use the UDP port number contained in an incoming packet as the forwarding
criterion. Selecting UDP requires that you specify a source port mask and/or a destination
port mask. src port mask ‚Äď Specify a UDP port mask for the source port in hex form (hex 0x0-0xffff). dst port mask ‚Äď Specify a UDP port mask for the destination port in hex form (hex 0x0-
0xffff). Protocol_id <0x0-0xff> ‚Äď Enter a value defining the protocol ID in the packet header to mask. user_define_mask <hex 0x0-0xffffffff> ‚Äď Enter a value defining the mask options behind the
IP header.
Click Apply to set this entry in the Switch‚Äôs memory. To view the settings of a previously correctly created profile, click the corresponding Show Details button on the CPU Access Profile List window to view the following window:

Figure 6 - 33 Add CPU ACL Profile window for IPv6
The following parameters may be configured for the IPv6 filter. Parameter Description Select Profile ID
Use the drop-down menu to select a unique identifier number for this profile set. This value
can be set from 1 to 5. Select ACL Type
Select profile based on Ethernet (MAC Address), IPv4 address, IPv6, or packet content
mask. This wil change the menu according to the requirements for the type of profile. Select Ethernet to instruct the Switch to examine the layer 2 part of each packet header. Select IPv4 to instruct the Switch to examine the IPv4 address in each frame's header. Select IPv6 to instruct the Switch to examine the IPv6 address in each frame's header. Select Packet Content Mask to specify a mask to check the content of the packet header. IPv6 Class
Checking this field wil instruct the Switch to examine the class field of the IPv6 header. This
class field is a part of the packet header that is similar to the Type of Service (ToS) or
Precedence bits field in IPv4. IPv6 Flow Label
Checking this field wil instruct the Switch to examine the flow label field of the IPv6 header.
This flow label field is used by a source to label sequences of packets such as non-default
quality of service or real time service packets. IPv6 Address IPv6 Source Address ‚Äď Enter an IPv6 address to be used as the source address mask. IPv6 Destination Address ‚Äď Enter an IPv6 address that wil be used as the destination
address mask. NOTE: At any one time the user can only choose IPv6 class and
IPv6 Flow Label together or IPv6 Address by itself.

Click Apply to set this entry in the Switch‚Äôs memory.

210 DGS-3700-12/DGS-3700-12G Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Switch User Manual
To view the settings of a previously correctly created profile, click the corresponding Show Details button on the CPU Access Profile List window to view the following window:

Figure 6 - 35 Add CPU ACL Profile window for Packet Content
The following parameters may be configured for the Packet Content filter. Parameter Description Select Profile
Use the drop-down menu to select a unique identifier number for this profile set. This value can ID
be set from 1 to 5. Select ACL
Select profile based on Ethernet (MAC Address), IPv4 address, IPv6, or packet content mask. Type
This wil change the menu according to the requirements for the type of profile. Select Ethernet to instruct the Switch to examine the layer 2 part of each packet header. Select IPv4 to instruct the Switch to examine the IPv4 address in each frame's header. Select IPv6 to instruct the Switch to examine the IPv6 address in each frame's header. Select Packet Content Mask to specify a mask to check the content of the packet header. Offset
This field wil instruct the Switch to mask the packet header beginning with the offset value
specified:
‚ÄĘ 0-15 ‚Äď Enter a value in hex form to mask the packet from the beginning of the packet to

211 DGS-3700-12/DGS-3700-12G Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Switch User Manual
the 15th byte.
‚ÄĘ 16-31 ‚Äď Enter a value in hex form to mask the packet from byte 16 to byte 31. ‚ÄĘ 32-47 ‚Äď Enter a value in hex form to mask the packet from byte 32 to byte 47. ‚ÄĘ 48-63 ‚Äď Enter a value in hex form to mask the packet from byte 48 to byte 63. ‚ÄĘ 64-79 ‚Äď Enter a value in hex form to mask the packet from byte 64 to byte 79.
Click Apply to set this entry in the Switch‚Äôs memory. To view the settings of a previously correctly created profile, click the corresponding Show Details button on the CPU Access Profile List window to view the following window:

Figure 6 - 36 CPU Access Profile Detail Information window for Packet Content To establish the rule for a previously created CPU Access Profile: To configure the Access Rules for Ethernet, open the CPUAccess Profile List window and click Add/View Rules for
an Ethernet entry. This wil open the following window.

Figure 6 - 38 Add Access Rule window for Ethernet
To set the Access Rule for Ethernet, adjust the following parameters and click Apply. Parameter Description Access ID (1-100) Type in a unique identifier number for this access. This value can be set from 1 to 100.

212 DGS-3700-12/DGS-3700-12G Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Switch User Manual Action
Select Permit to specify that the packets that match the access profile are forwarded by the
Switch, according to any additional rule added (see below). Select Deny to specify the packets that match the access profile to be filtered. Ethernet Type
Selecting this option instructs the Switch to examine the Ethernet type value in each frame's (0-FFFF)
header. Time Range
Tick the check box and enter the name of the Time Range settings that has been previously Name
configured in the Time RangeSettings window. This will set specific times when this access rule
wil be implemented on the Switch. Ports
Specifies the access rule wil take effect on one port or a range of ports.
To view the settings of a previously correctly configured rule, click the corresponding Show Details button on the CPUAccess Rule List windowto view the following window:

Figure 6 - 39 CPU Access Rule Detail Information window for Ethernet

213 DGS-3700-12/DGS-3700-12G Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Switch User Manual To establish the rule for a previously created CPU Access Profile: To configure the Access Rules for IP, open the CPUAccess Profile List window and click Add/View Rules for an IP
entry. This wil open the following window.

Figure 6 - 41 Add Access Rule window for IP
To set the Access Rule for IP, adjust the following parameters and click ApplyParameter Description Access ID (1-100) Type in a unique identifier number for this access. This value can be set from 1 to 100. Action
Select Permit to specify that the packets that match the access profile are forwarded by the
Switch, according to any additional rule added (see below). Select Deny to specify the packets that match the access profile to be filtered. DSCP
Selecting this option instructs the Switch to examine the DiffServ Code part of each packet
header. Enter a value between 0 and 63. Time Range
Tick the check box and enter the name of the Time Range settings that has been previously Name
configured in the Time RangeSettings window. This wil set specific times when this access rule
wil be implemented on the Switch. Ports
Specifies the access rule can take effect on one port or a range of ports.
To view the settings of a previously correctly configured rule, click the corresponding Show Details button on the CPUAccess Rule List windowto view the following window:

Figure 6 - 42 CPU Access Rule Detail Information window for IP To establish the rule for a previously created CPU Access Profile: To configure the Access Rules for IP, open the CPUAccess Profile List window and click Add/View Rules for an
IPv6 entry. This wil open the following window.

Figure 6 - 44 Add Access Rule window for IPv6
To set the Access Rule for IPv6, adjust the following parameters and click Apply. Parameter Description Access ID (1-100) Enter a unique identifier number for this access. This value can be set from 1 to 100. Action
Select Permit to specify that the packets that match the access profile are forwarded by the
Switch, according to any additional rule added (see below). Select Deny to specify the packets that match the access profile to be filtered. Class
Enter an IPv6 Class. The class can be between 0 ‚Äď 255. Flow Label
Configuring this field, in hex form, wil instruct the Switch to examine the flow label field of the
IPv6 header. This flow label field is used by a source to label sequences of packets such as non-

215 DGS-3700-12/DGS-3700-12G Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Switch User Manual
default quality of service or real time service packets. Time Range
Tick the check box and enter the name of the Time Range settings that has been previously Name
configured in the Time RangeSettings window. This wil set specific times when this access rule
wil be implemented on the Switch. Ports
Specifies the access rule can take effect on one port or a range of ports.
To view the settings of a previously correctly configured rule, click the corresponding Show Details button on the CPUAccess Rule List windowto view the following window:

Figure 6 - 45 CPU Access Rule Detail Information window for IPv6 To establish the rule for a previously created CPU Access Profile: To configure the Access Rules for IP, open the CPUAccess Profile List window and click Add/View Rules for a
Packet Content entry. This wil open the following window.

Figure 6 - 47 Add Access Rule window for Packet Content
To set the Access Rule for Packet Content, adjust the following parameters and click Apply.

216 DGS-3700-12/DGS-3700-12G Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Switch User Manual Parameter Description Access ID (1-100) Type in a unique identifier number for this access. This value can be set from 1 to 100. Action
Select Permit to specify that the packets that match the access profile are forwarded by the
Switch, according to any additional rule added (see below). Select Deny to specify the packets that match the access profile to be filtered. Offset
This field wil instruct the Switch to mask the packet header beginning with the offset value
specified: Offset 0-15 ‚Äď Enter a value in hex form to mask the packet from the beginning of the packet to
the 15th byte. Offset 16-31 ‚Äď Enter a value in hex form to mask the packet from byte 16 to byte 31. Offset 32-47 ‚Äď Enter a value in hex form to mask the packet from byte 32 to byte 47. Offset 48-63 ‚Äď Enter a value in hex form to mask the packet from byte 48 to byte 63. Offset 64-79‚Äď Enter a value in hex form to mask the packet from byte 64 to byte 79. Time Range
Tick the check box and enter the name of the Time Range settings that has been previously Name
configured in the Time RangeSettings window. This wil set specific times when this access
rule wil be implemented on the Switch. Ports
Specifies the access rule can take effect on one port or a range of ports.
To view the settings of a previously correctly configured rule, click the corresponding Show Details button on the CPUAccess Rule List windowto view the following window:

Figure 6 - 48 CPU Access Rule Detail Information window for Packet Content ACL Finder This window is used to help find a previously configured ACL entry. To search for an entry, enter the profile ID from
the drop down menu, select a port that you wish to view, define the state and click Find, the table on the lower half of
the screen wil display the entries. To delete an entry click the corresponding Delete button. To view this window, click ACL > ACL Finder as shown below:

Figure 6 - 49 ACL Finder window

ACL Flow Meter ACL Flow Metering Table is a per flow bandwidth control used to limit the bandwidth of the ingress traffic. When the
users create an ACL rule to filter packets, a metering rule can be created to associate with this ACL rule to limit traffic.
The step of bandwidth is 64kbps. Due to limited metering rules, not al ACL rules can associate with a metering rule.

Figure 6 - 50 ACL Flow Meter window
The following fields may be configured: Parameter Description Profile ID
The pre-configured Profile ID for which to configure the Flow Metering parameters. Access ID
The pre-configured Access ID for which to configure the Flow Metering parameters.
Enter the appropriate information and click Find the entries wil be displayed on the lower half of the table. To edit an
entry click the corresponding Modify button, to delete an entry click the corresponding Delete button, to add a new
entry click the Add button which wil display the following window for the user to configure.

Figure 6 - 51 ACL Flow Meter - Add window
The following fields may be configured: Parameter Description Profile ID
Use the drop down menu to select the pre-configured Profile ID that wil be used to configure the
Flow Metering parameters. Profile Name
Use the drop down menu to select the pre-configured Profile Name.

218 DGS-3700-12/DGS-3700-12G Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Switch User Manual Access ID (1-128) Enter the Access ID that wil be used to configure the Flow Metering parameters, enter a value
between 1 and 128. Mode
Select the mode to be used either trTCM or srTCM and enter the corresponding information. trTCM ‚Äď Two Rate Three Color Marker, marks packets green, yel ow or red based on two rates
and two burst sizes. It is useful when peak rates need to be enforced.
‚ÄĘ CIR(64Kbps) value 0-15624‚ÄďSpecifies the Committed Information Rate of the packet.
The unit is 64Kbps. That is to say, 1 means 64Kbps.
‚ÄĘ PIR(64Kbps) value 0-15624‚ÄďSpecifies the Peak Information Rate of the packet. The
unit is 64Kbps. That is to say, 1 means 64Kbps.
‚ÄĘ CBS(Kbyte) value 0-16384‚Äď Specifies the Committed Burst Size of the packet. The
unit is Kbyte. That is to say, 1 means 1Kbyte. This parameter is optional and the default
value is 4*1024. The max value is 16*1024.
‚ÄĘ PBS(Kbyte) value 0-16384‚ÄďSpecifies the Peak Burst Size of the packet. The unit is
Kbyte. That is to say, 1 means 1Kbyte. This parameter is optional and the default value
is 4*1024. The max value is 16*1024. srTCM ‚Äď Single Rate Three Color Marker, marks packets green, yel ow or red based on a rate
and two burst sizes. This is useful when only burst size matters.
‚ÄĘ CIR(64Kbps) value 0-15624‚Äď Specifies the Committed Information Rate of the packet.
The unit is 64Kbps. That is to say, 1 means 64Kbps.
‚ÄĘ CBS(Kbyte) value 0-16384 ‚Äď Specifies the Committed Burst Size of the packet. The
unit is Kbyte. That is to say, 1 means 1Kbyte. The maximum value is 16*1024.
‚ÄĘ EBS(Kbyte) value 0-16384‚Äď Specifies the Excess Burst Size of the packet. The unit is
Kbyte. That is to say, 1 means 1Kbyte. The maximum value is 16*1024. Action Conform ‚Äď Specifies the action when the packet is in ‚Äúgreen color‚ÄĚ mode.
‚ÄĘ Replace DSCP ‚Äď Al ows you to change the dscp of the packet ‚ÄĘ Counter ‚Äď Al ows you to set the counter of the packet. Exceed ‚Äď Specifies the action when the packet is in ‚Äúyellow color‚ÄĚ mode.
‚ÄĘ Permit ‚Äď Permits the packet. ‚ÄĘ Replace DSCP ‚Äď Al ows you to change the DSCP of the packet. ‚ÄĘ Counter ‚Äď Al ows you to set the counter of the packet. ‚ÄĘ Drop ‚Äď Drops the packet. Violate ‚Äď Specifies the action when the packet is in ‚Äúred color‚ÄĚ mode.
‚ÄĘ Permit ‚Äď Permits the packet. ‚ÄĘ Replace DSCP ‚Äď Al ows yout to change the DSCP of the packet. ‚ÄĘ Counter ‚Äď Al ows you to set the counter of the packet. ‚ÄĘ Drop ‚Äď Drops the packet.
Click Apply to implement changes made, click Back to return to the ACL Flow Meter.

Cable Diagnostic This window displays the details of copper cables attached to specific ports on the Switch. If there is an error in the
cable this feature can determine the type of error and the position where the error has occurred. To view this window, click Monitoring>Cable Diagnostic as shown below:

Figure 7 - 2 Cable Diagnostic window
Enter the port number you wish to test and click Test, the results wil be display on the lower half of the table.

CPU Utilization The CPU Utilization window displays the percentage of the CPU being used, expressed as an integer percentage
and calculated as a simple average by time interval. To view this window, click Monitoring> CPU Utilization as shown below:

Figure 7 - 3 CPU Utilization window
To view the CPU utilization by port, use the real-time graphic of the Switch and/or switch stack at the top of the web
page by simply clicking on a port. Click Apply to implement the configured settings. The window wil automatically
refresh with new updated statistics. Change the view parameters as follows: Parameter Description Time Interval
Select the desired setting between 1s and 60s, where "s" stands for seconds. The
default value is one second. Record Number
Select number of times the Switch wil be pol ed between 20 and 200. The default value
is 200. Show/Hide
Check whether or not to display Five Secs, One Min, and Five Mins.

Port Utilization The Port Utilization window displays the percentage of the total available bandwidth being used on the port. To view this window, click Monitoring>Port Utilization as shown below:

Figure 7 - 4 Port Utilization window
To select a port to view these statistics for, select the port by using the Port pull-down menu. The user may also use
the real-time graphic of the Switch at the top of the web page by simply clicking on a port. Change the view parameters as follows: Parameter Description Port
Use the drop-down menu to choose the port that wil display statistics. Time Interval
Select the desired setting between 1s and 60s, where "s" stands for seconds. The
default value is one second. Record Number
Select number of times the Switch wil be pol ed between 20 and 200. The default value
is 200. Show/Hide
Check whether or not to display Port Util.

Packet Size The Web Manager al ows packets received by the Switch, arranged in six groups and classed by size, to be viewed as
either a line graph or a table. Two windows are offered. To select a port to view these statistics for, select the port by
using the Port pull-down menu. The user may also use the real-time graphic of the Switch at the top of the web page
by simply clicking on a port. To view this window, click Monitoring >Packet Size as shown below:

Figure 7 - 6 Packet Size Table window
The following fields can be set or viewed: Parameter Description Port
Use the drop-down menu to choose the port that wil display statistics. Time Interval
Select the desired setting between 1s and 60s, where "s" stands for seconds. The default
value is one second. Record Number
Select number of times the Switch wil be pol ed between 20 and 200. The default value is
200. 64
The total number of packets (including bad packets) received that were 64 octets in length

223 DGS-3700-12/DGS-3700-12G Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Switch User Manual
(excluding framing bits but including FCS octets). 65-127
The total number of packets (including bad packets) received that were between 65 and
127 octets in length inclusive (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets). 128-255
The total number of packets (including bad packets) received that were between 128 and
255 octets in length inclusive (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets). 256-511
The total number of packets (including bad packets) received that were between 256 and
511 octets in length inclusive (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets). 512-1023
The total number of packets (including bad packets) received that were between 512 and
1023 octets in length inclusive (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets). 1024-1518
The total number of packets (including bad packets) received that were between 1024 and
1518 octets in length inclusive (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets). Show/Hide
Check whether or not to display 64, 65-127, 128-255, 256-511, 512-1023, and 1024-1518
packets received. Clear
Clicking this button clears all statistics counters on this window.
View Table
Clicking this button instructs the Switch to display a table rather than a line graph.
View Graphic
Clicking this button instructs the Switch to display a line graph rather than a table.

Memory Utilization This window is used to display the utilization of the CPU and memory on the Switch. To view this window, click Monitoring > Memory Utilization as shown below:

Packets The Web Manager allows various packet statistics to be viewed as either a line graph or a table. Three windows are
offered in the Packets folder to view and configure these settings. Received (RX) This table displays the RX packets on the Switch. To select a port to view these statistics for, select the port by using
the Port pull-down menu. The user may also use the real-time graphic of the Switch at the top of the web page by
simply clicking on a port. To view this window, click Monitoring > Packets > Received (RX) as shown below:

Figure 7 - 9 Received (RX) Table window (for Bytes and Packets)
The following fields may be set or viewed: Parameter Description Port
Use the drop-down menu to choose the port that will display statistics. Time Interval
Select the desired setting between 1s and 60s, where "s" stands for seconds. The default
value is one second. Record Number
Select number of times the Switch wil be pol ed between 20 and 200. The default value is 200.

225 DGS-3700-12/DGS-3700-12G Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Switch User Manual Bytes
Counts the number of bytes received on the port. Packets
Counts the number of packets received on the port. Unicast
Counts the total number of good packets that were received by a unicast address. Multicast
Counts the total number of good packets that were received by a multicast address. Broadcast
Counts the total number of good packets that were received by a broadcast address. Show/Hide
Check whether to display Bytes and Packets. Clear
Clicking this button clears all statistics counters on this window.
View Table
Clicking this button instructs the Switch to display a table rather than a line graph.
View Graphic
Clicking this button instructs the Switch to display a line graph rather than a table.

UMB_cast (RX) This table displays the UMB_cast RX Packets on the Switch. To select a port to view these statistics for, select the
port by using the Port pull-down menu. The user may also use the real-time graphic of the Switch at the top of the web
page by simply clicking on a port.
To view this window, click Monitoring > Packets > UMB_cast (RX) as shown below:

Figure 7 - 11 UMB_cast (RX) Table window (for Unicast, Multicast, and Broadcast Packets)
The following fields may be set or viewed: Parameter Description Port
Use the drop-down menu to choose the port that will display statistics. Time Interval
Select the desired setting between 1s and 60s, where "s" stands for seconds. The default
value is one second. Record Number
Select number of times the Switch wil be pol ed between 20 and 200. The default value is 200. Bytes
Counts the number of bytes successfully sent on the port. Packets
Counts the number of packets successfully sent on the port. Unicast
Counts the total number of good packets that were received by a unicast address. Multicast
Counts the total number of good packets that were received by a multicast address. Broadcast
Counts the total number of good packets that were received by a broadcast address. Show/Hide
Check whether or not to display Multicast, Broadcast, and Unicast Packets. Clear
Clicking this button clears all statistics counters on this window.
View Table
Clicking this button instructs the Switch to display a table rather than a line graph.
View Graphic
Clicking this button instructs the Switch to display a line graph rather than a table.

Transmitted (TX) To select a port to view these statistics for, select the port by using the Port pull-down menu. The user may also use
the real-time graphic of the Switch at the top of the web page by simply clicking on a port.

Figure 7 - 13 Transmitted (TX) Table window (for Bytes and Packets)
The following fields may be set or viewed: Parameter Description Port
Use the drop-down menu to choose the port that wil display statistics. Time Interval
Select the desired setting between 1s and 60s, where "s" stands for seconds. The default
value is one second. Record Number
Select number of times the Switch wil be pol ed between 20 and 200. The default value is

228 DGS-3700-12/DGS-3700-12G Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Switch User Manual 200. Bytes
Counts the number of bytes successfully sent on the port. Packets
Counts the number of packets successfully sent on the port. Unicast
Counts the total number of good packets that were transmitted by a unicast address. Multicast
Counts the total number of good packets that were transmitted by a multicast address. Broadcast
Counts the total number of good packets that were transmitted by a broadcast address. Show/Hide
Check whether or not to display Bytes and Packets. Clear
Clicking this button clears al statistics counters on this window.
View Table
Clicking this button instructs the Switch to display a table rather than a line graph.
View Graphic
Clicking this button instructs the Switch to display a line graph rather than a table.

229 DGS-3700-12/DGS-3700-12G Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Switch User Manual Errors The Web Manager allows port error statistics compiled by the Switch's management agent to be viewed as either a
line graph or a table. Four windows are offered. Received (RX) To select a port to view these statistics for, select the port by using the Port pull-down menu. The user may also use
the real-time graphic of the Switch at the top of the web page by simply clicking on a port.
To view this window, click Monitoring > Errors > Received (RX) as shown below:

230 DGS-3700-12/DGS-3700-12G Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Switch User Manual
The following fields can be set: Parameter Description Port
Use the drop-down menu to choose the port that wil display statistics. Time Interval
Select the desired setting between 1s and 60s, where "s" stands for seconds. The default
value is one second. Record Number
Select number of times the Switch wil be pol ed between 20 and 200. The default value is 200. CRCError
Counts otherwise valid packets that did not end on a byte (octet) boundary. UnderSize
The number of packets detected that are less than the minimum permitted packets size of 64
bytes and have a good CRC. Undersize packets usually indicate collision fragments, a nor-
mal network occurrence. OverSize
Counts valid packets received that were longer than 1518 octets and less than the
MAX_PKT_LEN. Internal y, MAX_PKT_LEN is equal to 1536. Fragment
The number of packets less than 64 bytes with either bad framing or an invalid CRC. These
are normally the result of collisions. Jabber
Counts invalid packets received that were longer than 1518 octets and less than the
MAX_PKT_LEN. Internal y, MAX_PKT_LEN is equal to 1536. Drop
The number of packets that are dropped by this port since the last Switch reboot. Symbol
Counts the number of packets received that have errors received in the symbol on the
physical labor. Show/Hide
Check whether or not to display CRCError, UnderSize, OverSize, Fragment, Jabber, Drop,
and SymbolErr errors. Clear
Clicking this button clears all statistics counters on this window.
View Table
Clicking this button instructs the Switch to display a table rather than a line graph.
View Graphic
Clicking this button instructs the Switch to display a line graph rather than a table.

Transmitted (TX) To select a port to view these statistics for, select the port by using the Port pull-down menu. The user may also use
the real-time graphic of the Switch at the top of the web page by simply clicking on a port. To view this window, click Monitoring> Errors > Transmitted (TX) as shown below:

Figure 7 - 17 Transmitted (TX) Table window (for errors)
The following fields may be set or viewed: Parameter Description Port
Use the drop-down menu to choose the port that wil display statistics. Time Interval
Select the desired setting between 1s and 60s, where "s" stands for seconds. The default
value is one second. Record Number
Select number of times the Switch wil be pol ed between 20 and 200. The default value is 200. ExDefer
Counts the number of packets for which the first transmission attempt on a particular
interface was delayed because the medium was busy.

232 DGS-3700-12/DGS-3700-12G Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Switch User Manual CRC Error
Counts otherwise valid packets that did not end on a byte (octet) boundary. LateCol
Counts the number of times that a col ision is detected later than 512 bit-times into the
transmission of a packet. ExCol
Excessive Col isions. The number of packets for which transmission failed due to excessive
collisions. SingCol
Single Col ision Frames. The number of successfully transmitted packets for which
transmission is inhibited by more than one collision. Collision
An estimate of the total number of collisions on this network segment. Show/Hide
Check whether or not to display ExDefer, CRCError, LateCol , ExColl, SingCol , and Col ision
errors. Clear
Clicking this button clears all statistics counters on this window.
View Table
Clicking this button instructs the Switch to display a table rather than a line graph.
View Graphic
Clicking this button instructs the Switch to display a line graph rather than a table. Port Access Control The following windows are used to monitor 802.1X statistics of the Switch, on a per port basis.

RADIUS Authentication This table contains information concerning the activity of the RADIUS authentication client on the client side of the
RADIUS authentication protocol. To view this window, click Monitoring > Port Access Control > RADIUS Authentication as shown below:

Figure 7 - 18 RADIUS Authentication window
The user may also select the desired time interval to update the statistics, between 1s and 60s, where ‚Äús‚ÄĚ stands for
seconds. The default value is one second. To clear the current statistics shown, click the Clear button in the top left
hand corner. The following information is displayed: Parameter Description InvalidServerAddresses
The number of RADIUS Access-Response packets received from unknown addresses. Identifier
The NAS-Identifier of the RADIUS authentication client. (This is not necessarily the same

233 DGS-3700-12/DGS-3700-12G Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Switch User Manual
as sysName in MIB II.) ServerIndex
The identification number assigned to each RADIUS Authentication server that the client
shares a secret with. AuthServerAddress
The (conceptual) table listing the RADIUS authentication servers with which the client
shares a secret. ServerPortNumber
The UDP port the client is using to send requests to this server. RoundTripTime
The time interval (in hundredths of a second) between the most recent Access-
Reply/Access-Challenge and the Access-Request that matched it from this RADIUS
authentication server. AccessRequests
The number of RADIUS Access-Request packets sent to this server. This does not
include retransmissions. AccessRetransmissions The number of RADIUS Access-Request packets retransmitted to this RADIUS
authentication server. AccessAccepts
The number of RADIUS Access-Accept packets (valid or invalid) received from this
server. AccessRejects
The number of RADIUS Access-Reject packets (valid or invalid) received from this
server. AccessChal enges
The number of RADIUS Access-Challenge packets (valid or invalid) received from this
server. AccessResponses
The number of malformed RADIUS Access-Response packets received from this server.
Malformed packets include packets with an invalid length. Bad authenticators or
Signature attributes or known types are not included as malformed access responses. BadAuthenticators
The number of RADIUS Access-Response packets containing invalid authenticators or
Signature attributes received from this server. PendingRequests
The number of RADIUS Access-Request packets destined for this server that have not
yet timed out or received a response. This variable is incremented when an Access-
Request is sent and decremented due to receipt of an Access-Accept, Access-Reject or
Access-Challenge, a timeout or retransmission. Timeouts
The number of authentication timeouts to this server. After a timeout the client may retry
to the same server, send to a different server, or give up. A retry to the same server is
counted as a retransmit as well as a timeout. A send to a different server is counted as a
Request as wel as a timeout. UnknownTypes
The number of RADIUS packets of unknown type which were received from this server
on the authentication port PacketsDropped
The number of RADIUS packets of which were received from this server on the
authentication port and dropped for some other reason.

Figure 7 - 19 RADIUS Account Client window
The user may also select the desired time interval to update the statistics, between 1s and 60s, where ‚Äús‚ÄĚ stands for
seconds. The default value is one second. To clear the current statistics shown, click the Clear button in the top left
hand corner. The following information is displayed: Parameter Description InvalidServerAddresses
The number of RADIUS Accounting-Response packets received from unknown
addresses. Identifier
The NAS-Identifier of the RADIUS account. (This is not necessarily the same as
sysName in MIB II.) ServerIndex
The identification number assigned to each RADIUS Accounting server that it
shares a secret with. ServerAddress
The (conceptual) table listing the RADIUS accounting servers with which it shares a
secret. ServerPortNumber
The UDP port it is using to send requests to this server. RoundTripTime
The time interval between the most recent Accounting-Response and the
Accounting-Request that matched it from this RADIUS accounting server. Requests
The number of RADIUS Accounting-Request packets sent. This does not include
retransmissions. Retransmissions
The number of RADIUS Accounting-Request packets retransmitted to this RADIUS
accounting server. Retransmissions include retries where the Identifier and Acct-
Delay have been updated, as well as those in which they remain the same. Responses
The number of RADIUS packets received on the accounting port from this server. MalformedResponses
The number of malformed RADIUS Accounting-Response packets received from
this server. Malformed packets include packets with an invalid length. Bad
authenticators and unknown types are not included as malformed accounting
responses. BadAuthenticators
The number of RADIUS Accounting-Response packets, which contained invalid
authenticators, received from this server. PendingRequests
The number of RADIUS Accounting-Request packets sent to this server that have
not yet timed out or received a response. This variable is incremented when an
Accounting-Request is sent and decremented due to receipt of an Accounting-
Response, a timeout or a retransmission. Timeouts
The number of accounting timeouts to this server. After a timeout it may retry to the
same server, send to a different server, or give up. A retry to the same server is
counted as a retransmit as well as a timeout. A send to a different server is counted
as an Accounting-Request as well as a timeout. UnknownTypes
The number of RADIUS packets of unknown type which were received from this
server on the accounting port.

235 DGS-3700-12/DGS-3700-12G Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Switch User Manual PacketsDropped
The number of RADIUS packets, which were received from this server on the
accounting port and dropped for some other reason.

Authenticator State The following section describes the 802.1X Status on the Switch. To view this window, click Monitoring > Port Access Control > Authenticator State as shown below:

Figure 7 - 20 Authenticator State window (for MAC-based 802.1X)

Figure 7 - 21 Authenticator State window (for Port-based 802.1X)
This window displays the Authenticator State for individual ports on a selected device. A polling interval between 1s
and 60s seconds can be set using the drop-down menu at the top of the window and clicking OK. The information on this window is described as follows: Parameter Description MAC Address
The MAC Address of the device of the corresponding index number. Auth PAE State
The Authenticator PAE State value can be: Initialize, Disconnected, Connecting, Authenticating,
Authenticated, Aborting, Held, Force_Auth, Force_Unauth, or N/A. N/A (Not Available) indicates
that the port's authenticator capability is disabled. Backend State
The Backend Authentication State can be Request, Response, Success, Fail, Timeout, Idle,
Initialize, or N/A. N/A (Not Available) indicates that the port's authenticator capability is disabled. Port Status
Control ed Port Status can be Authorized, Unauthorized, or N/A.

236 DGS-3700-12/DGS-3700-12G Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Switch User Manual Authenticator Statistics This window contains the statistics objects for the Authenticator PAE associated with each port. An entry appears in
this table for each port that supports the Authenticator function. To view this window, click Monitoring > Port Access Control > Authenticator Statistics as shown below:

Figure 7 - 22 Authenticator Statistics window (for MAC-based 802.1X)

Figure 7 - 23 Authenticator Statistics window(for Port-based 802.1X)
The user may also select the desired time interval to update the statistics, between 1s and 60s, where ‚Äús‚ÄĚ stands for
seconds. The default value is one second. The following fields can be viewed: Parameter Description Port
The identification number assigned to the Port by the System in which the Port resides. Frames Rx
The number of valid EAPOL frames that have been received by this Authenticator. Frames Tx
The number of EAPOL frames that have been transmitted by this Authenticator. Rx Start
The number of EAPOL Start frames that have been received by this Authenticator. TxReqId
The number of EAP Req/Id frames that have been transmitted by this Authenticator. RxLogOff
The number of EAPOL Logoff frames that have been received by this Authenticator. Tx Req
The number of EAP Request frames (other than Rq/Id frames) that have been transmitted by
this Authenticator. Rx RespId
The number of EAP Resp/Id frames that have been received by this Authenticator.

237 DGS-3700-12/DGS-3700-12G Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Switch User Manual Rx Resp
The number of valid EAP Response frames (other than Resp/Id frames) that have been
received by this Authenticator. Rx Invalid
The number of EAPOL frames that have been received by this Authenticator in which the
frame type is not recognized. Rx Error
The number of EAPOL frames that have been received by this Authenticator in which the
Packet Body Length field is invalid. Last Version
The protocol version number carried in the most recently received EAPOL frame. Last Source
The source MAC address carried in the most recently received EAPOL frame.

Authenticator Session Statistics This window contains the session statistics objects for the Authenticator PAE associated with each port. An entry
appears in this table for each port that supports the Authenticator function. To view thiswindow, click Monitoring > Port Access Control > Authenticator Session Statistics as shown below:

238 DGS-3700-12/DGS-3700-12G Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Switch User Manual
The user may select the desired time interval to update the statistics, between 1s and 60s, where ‚Äús‚ÄĚ stands for
seconds. The default value is one second. The following fields can be viewed: Parameter Description Port
The identification number assigned to the Port by the System in which the Port resides. Octets Rx
The number of octets received in user data frames on this port during the session. Octets Tx
The number of octets transmitted in user data frames on this port during the session. Frames Rx
The number of user data frames received on this port during the session. Frames Tx
The number of user data frames transmitted on this port during the session. ID
A unique identifier for the session, in the form of a printable ASCII string of at least three
characters. Authentic Method The authentication method used to establish the session. Valid Authentic Methods include:
(1) Remote Authentication Server ‚Äď The Authentication Server is external to the Authenticator‚Äôs
System. (2) Local Authentication Server ‚Äď The Authentication Server is located within the Authenticator‚Äôs
System. Time
The duration of the session in seconds. Terminate Cause The reason for the session termination. There are eight possible reasons for termination.
1) Supplicant Logoff 2) Port Failure 3) Supplicant Restart 4) Reauthentication Failure 5) AuthControlledPortControl set to ForceUnauthorized 6) Port re-initialization 7) Port Administratively Disabled 8) Not Terminated Yet UserName
The User-Name representing the identity of the Supplicant PAE.

Authenticator Diagnostics This window contains the diagnostic information regarding the operation of the Authenticator associated with each
port. An entry appears in this table for each port that supports the Authenticator function. To view this window, click Monitoring > Port Access Control > Authenticator Diagnostics as shown below:

Figure 7 - 26 Authenticator Diagnostics window
The following fields can be viewed: Parameter Description Port
The identification number assigned to the Port by the System in which the Port resides. Connect Enter
Counts the number of times that the state machine transitions to the CONNECTING state
from any other state. Connect LogOff
Counts the number of times that the state machine transitions from CONNECTING to
DISCONNECTED as a result of receiving an EAPOL-Logoff message. Auth Enter
Counts the number of times that the state machine transitions from CONNECTING to
AUTHENTICATING, as a result of an EAP-Response/Identity message being received from
the Supplicant. Auth Success
Counts the number of times that the state machine transitions from AUTHENTICATING to
AUTHENTICATED, as a result of the Backend Authentication state machine indicating
successful authentication of the Supplicant (authSuccess = TRUE). Auth Timeout
Counts the number of times that the state machine transitions from AUTHENTICATING to
ABORTING, as a result of the Backend Authentication state machine indicating
authentication timeout (authTimeout = TRUE). Auth Fail
Counts the number of times that the state machine transitions from AUTHENTICATING to
HELD, as a result of the Backend Authentication state machine indicating authentication
failure (authFail = TRUE). Auth Reauth
Counts the number of times that the state machine transitions from AUTHENTICATING to
ABORTING, as a result of a reauthentication request (reAuthenticate = TRUE). Auth Start
Counts the number of times that the state machine transitions from AUTHENTICATING to
ABORTING, as a result of an EAPOL-Start message being received from the Supplicant. Auth LogOff
Counts the number of times that the state machine transitions from AUTHENTICATING to
ABORTING, as a result of an EAPOL-Logoff message being received from the Supplicant. Authed Reauth
Counts the number of times that the state machine transitions from AUTHENTICATED to

240 DGS-3700-12/DGS-3700-12G Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Switch User Manual
CONNECTING, as a result of a reauthentication request (reAuthenticate = TRUE). Authed Start
Counts the number of times that the state machine transitions from AUTHENTICATED to
CONNECTING, as a result of an EAPOL-Start message being received from the Supplicant. Authed LogOff
Counts the number of times that the state machine transitions from AUTHENTICATED to
DISCONNECTED, as a result of an EAPOL-Logoff message being received from the
Supplicant. Responses
Counts the number of times that the state machine sends an initial Access-Request packet
to the Authentication server (i.e., executes sendRespToServer on entry to the RESPONSE
state). Indicates that the Authenticator attempted communication with the Authentication
Server. AccessChal enges
Counts the number of times that the state machine receives an initial Access-Challenge
packet from the Authentication server (i.e., aReq becomes TRUE, causing exit from the
RESPONSE state). Indicates that the Authentication Server has communication with the
Authenticator. OtherReqToSupp
Counts the number of times that the state machine sends an EAP-Request packet (other
than an Identity, Notification, Failure, or Success message) to the Supplicant (i.e., executes
txReq on entry to the REQUEST state). Indicates that the Authenticator chose an EAP-
method. NonNakRespFromSup Counts the number of times that the state machine receives a response from the Supplicant
to an initial EAP-Request, and the response is something other than EAP-NAK (i.e., rxResp
becomes TRUE, causing the state machine to transition from REQUEST to RESPONSE,
and the response is not an EAP-NAK). Indicates that the Supplicant can respond to the
Authenticator‚Äôs chosen EAP-method. Bac Auth Success
Counts the number of times that the state machine receives an Accept message from the
Authentication Server (i.e., aSuccess becomes TRUE, causing a transition from
RESPONSE to SUCCESS). Indicates that the Supplicant has successfully authenticated to
the Authentication Server. Bac Auth Fail
Counts the number of times that the state machine receives a Reject message from the
Authentication Server (i.e., aFail becomes TRUE, causing a transition from RESPONSE to
FAIL). Indicates that the Supplicant has not authenticated to the Authentication Server.

Browse ARP Table This window displays current ARP entries on the Switch. To search a specific ARP entry, enter an Interface Name or
an IP Address at the top of the window and click Find. Click the Show Static button to display static ARP table
entries. To clear the ARP Table, click Clear Al . The view this window, click Monitoring> Browse ARP Table as shown below:

VLAN The following windows are used to configure the VLAN settings of the Switch.

Browse VLAN This window al ows the VLAN status for each of the Switch's ports to be viewed by VLAN. Enter a VID (VLAN ID) in
the field at the top of the window and click the Find button. To view this window, click Monitoring >VLAN > BrowseVLAN as shown below:

Figure 7 - 28 Browse VLAN window

242 DGS-3700-12/DGS-3700-12G Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Switch User Manual Show VLAN Ports This window al ows the VLAN status for each of the Switch's ports to be viewed by VLAN. Enter a VID (VLAN ID) in
the field at the top of the window and click the Find button. To view this window, click Monitoring> VLAN > ShowVLAN Ports as shown below:

Figure 7 - 29 Show VLAN Ports window

IGMP Snooping The following windows are used to configure the IGMP Snooping settings of the Switch.

Browse IGMP Router Port This window displays which of the Switch‚Äôs ports are currently configured as router ports. A router port configured by a
user (using the console or Web-based management interfaces) is displayed as a static router port, designated by S. A
router port that is dynamically configured by the Switch is designated by D, while a Forbidden port is designated by F.
Enter a VID (VLAN ID) in the field at the top of the window and click the Find button. To view this window, click Monitoring> IGMP Snooping >Browse IGMPRouter Port as shown below:

Figure 7 - 30 Browse IGMP Router Port window IGMP Snooping Group This window al ows the Switch‚Äôs IGMP Snooping Group Table to be viewed. IGMP Snooping allows the Switch to read
the Multicast Group IP address and the corresponding MAC address from IGMP packets that pass through the Switch.
The number of IGMP reports that were snooped is displayed in the Reportsfield. To view this window, click Monitoring> IGMP Snooping >IGMP Snooping Group as shown below:

Figure 7 - 31 IGMP Snooping Group window
Enter the appropriate information and click Find, the information wil be shown in the IGMP Snooping Group Table. The following field can be viewed: Parameter Description VLAN Name
The VLAN ID of the multicast group. VLAN List
The VLAN ports of the multicast group. (e.g.:1,4-6) Group IP Address
The IP address of the multicast group.

NOTE: To configure IGMP snooping for the Switch, go to the L2 Features folder and
select IGMP Snooping > IGMP Snooping Settings.

Figure 7 - 32 IGMP Snooping Forwarding Table window
Enter the VLAN Name or VLAN ID you wish to view and click Find, the information wil be displayed in the lower half
of the window.

Browse IGMP Snooping Counter This window is used to view the current IGMP snooping statistics on the Switch. To view this window, click Monitoring> IGMP Snooping >BrowseIGMP Snooping Counter as shown below:

Browse MLD Router Port This window displays which of the Switch‚Äôs ports are currently configured as router ports in IPv6. A router port
configured by a user (using the console or Web-based management interfaces) is displayed as a static router port,
designated by S. A router port that is dynamically configured by the Switch and is designated by D, whereas a
Forbidden port is designated by F. Enter a VID (VLAN ID) in the field at the top of the window and click the Find
button. To view this window, click Monitoring> MLD Snooping >BrowseMLDRouter Port as shown below:

Figure 7 - 34 Browse MLD Router Port window

MLD Snooping Group The following window allows the user to view MLD Snooping Groups present on the Switch. MLD Snooping is an IPv6
function comparable to IGMP Snooping for IPv4. The user may browse this table by VLAN Name present in the
Switch by entering that VLAN Name in the empty field shown below, and clicking the Find button. The number of MLD
reports that were snooped is displayed in the Reportsfield. To view this window, click Monitoring> MLD Snooping >MLD Snooping Group as shown below:

Figure 7 - 35 MLD Snooping Group window
Enter a VLAN Name or VLAN List and Group IP Address in the appropriate field and click the Find button.

MLD Snooping Forwarding Table This window is used to display the current MLD snooping forwarding information on the Switch. To view this window, click Monitoring> MLD Snooping >MLD Snooping Forwarding Table as shown below:

Figure 7 - 42 Browse CFM Port MP List window
The following parameters can be configured: Parameter Description Port
The port to which the MAC address below corresponds. Level (0-7)
The MD level of the entry you wish to view. Direction
The direction of the MEP. Inward indicates an inward facing MEP. Outward indicates an outward facing MEP. VLAN ID
The VLAN identifier of the entry you wish to view.
Click Find to see the entry displayed in the table.

248 DGS-3700-12/DGS-3700-12G Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Switch User Manual MAC Address Table This allows the Switch's dynamic MAC address forwarding table to be viewed. When the Switch learns an association
between a MAC address and a port number, it makes an entry into its forwarding table. These entries are then used to
forward packets through the Switch. To view this window, click Monitoring> MAC Address Table as shown below:

Figure 7 - 43 MAC Address Table window
The functions used in the MAC address table are described below: Parameter Description Port
The port to which the MAC address below corresponds. VLAN Name
Enter a VLAN Name for the forwarding table to be browsed by. MAC Address
Enter a MAC address for the forwarding table to be browsed by. Find
Al ows the user to move to a sector of the database corresponding to a user defined port, VLAN,
or MAC address. Clear Dynamic
Clicking this button will al ow the user to delete all dynamic entries of the address table. Entries View All Entry
Clicking this button wil allow the user to view all entries of the address table. Clear All Entry
Clicking this button wil allow the user to delete all entries of the address table.

Browse VLAN Counter Statistics This window is used to view the VLAN properties including received packets and received byte statistics. To view this window, click Monitoring> Browse VLAN Counter Statistics Table as shown below:

Figure 7 - 44 Browse VLAN Counter Statistics window

249 DGS-3700-12/DGS-3700-12G Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Switch User Manual
The functions used in the VLAN Counter Statistic table are described below: Parameter Description VID List (e.g.:1,4-
Specifies the VLAN ID list that you wish to view. 6) VLAN Name
Specifies the VLAN Name. VID (1-4094)
Specifies the VLAN ID. Port List
Specifies the ports that are attached to the VLAN.
Enter the appropriate information and click Find, the informationwil be displayed in the VLAN Counter Statistics Table.
To remove an entry enter the appropriate information and click Clear, to remove all entries click Clear Al .

251 DGS-3700-12/DGS-3700-12G Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Switch User Manual Historical Counter & Utilization This folder contains two windows to view statistics about packets sent and received by the Switch and Historical
Utilization of the CPU and memory.

Browse Historical Counter This window is used to display statistics about the packets sent and received by the Switch. The counters are set up in
15 minute and one day intervals. There is a maximum of five 15 minute historical statistic entries supported for each
port, with one being the most recent 15 minutes of data. The Switch also displays statistics based on a per day basis,
with a maximum of two historical statistic entries supported. To view this window, click Monitoring> Historical Counter & Utilization > Browse Historical Counter as shown
below:

Figure 7 - 47 Browse Historical Counter window
The following parameters may be configured: Parameter Description Port
Specifies the port you wish to view. Packet/Error
Specifies information regarding valid packets or error packets. 15 Minutes/1 Day Choose whether to view information relating to 15 minute intervals or 1 day intervals. 15 Minutes ‚Äď Specifies statistics based on 15 minute intervals. 1 Day ‚Äď Specifies statistics based on one day intervals. Slot 1-5
Specifies the slot number to display. 1-5 ‚Äď Specifes that the 15 minute intervals wil be displayed in chronological order with 1 being
the most recent. 1-2 ‚Äď Specifies that the daily intervals wil be displayed in chronological order with 1 being the
most recent.
Enter the appropriate information and click Find.

252 DGS-3700-12/DGS-3700-12G Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Switch User Manual Browse Historical Utilization This window displays information regarding the historical utilization of the CPU and memory. The counters are set up
in 15 minute and one day intervals. There is a maximum of five 15 minute historical utilization entries supported for
each port, with one being the most recent 15 minutes of data. The Switch also displays utilization information based
on a per day basis, with a maximum of two historical statistic entries supported. To view this window, click Monitoring> Historical Counter & Utilization > Browse Historical Utilization as shown
below:

Figure 7 - 48 Browse Historical Utilization window
The following parameters may be configured: Parameter Description CPU/Memory
Specify CPU or Memory to display the historical utilization information. 15 Minutes/1 Day Choose whether to view information relating to 15 minute intervals or 1 day intervals. 15 Minutes ‚Äď Specifies historical utilization information based on 15 minute intervals. 1 Day ‚Äď Specifies historical utilization information based on one day intervals. Slot 1-5
Specifies the slot number to display. 1-5 ‚Äď Specifes that the 15 minute intervals wil be displayed in chronological order with 1 being
the most recent. 1-2 ‚Äď Specifies that the daily intervals wil be displayed in chronological order with 1 being the
most recent.
Enter the appropriate information and click Find the information wil be displayed in the CPU Utilization table.

System Log This window is used to view the Switch's history log, as compiled by the Switch's management agent. To view this window, click Monitoring> System Log as shown below:

Figure 7 - 49 System Log window
The Switch can record event information in its own logs, to designated SNMP trap receiving stations, and to the PC
connected to the console manager. Click Next to go to the next page of the System Log window. Clicking Clear Log
wil al ow the user to clear the Switch History Log. The information in the table is categorized as:

253 DGS-3700-12/DGS-3700-12G Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Switch User Manual Parameter Description Log Type
Choose the type of log to view. There are two choices: Regular Log ‚Äď Choose this option to view regular switch log entries, such as logins or firmware
transfers. Attack Log ‚Äď Choose this option to view attack log files, such as spoofing attacks. Index
A counter incremented whenever an entry to the Switch's history log is made. The table displays
the last entry (highest sequence number) first. Date-Time
Displays the time in days, hours, minutes, and seconds since the Switch was last restarted. Log Text
Displays text describing the event that triggered the history log entry.

The four Save windows include: Save Configuration 1, Save Configuration 2, Save Log, and Save All. Each
version of the window wil aid the user in saving configurations to the Switch‚Äôs memory. The options include:
‚ÄĘ Save Configuration_ID_1 to save the configuration file indexed as Image file 1. To use this file for configuration
it must be designated as the Boot configuration.
‚ÄĘ Save Configuration_ID_2 to save the configuration file indexed as Image file 2. To use this file for configuration
it must be designated as the Boot configuration.
‚ÄĘ Save Log to save only the current log. ‚ÄĘ Save Al to save the current configuration file indexed as Image file 1 and save the current log.

Save Configuration ID 1
Open the Save drop-down menu at the top of the Web manager and click Save Configuration ID 1 to open the
following window:

Figure 8 - 1 Save Configuration ID 1 window

255 DGS-3700-12/DGS-3700-12G Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Switch User Manual Save Configuration ID 2
Open the Save drop-down menu at the top of the Web manager and click Save Configuration ID 2 to open the
following window:

Figure 8 - 2 Save Configuration ID 2 window Save Log
Open the Save drop-down menu at the top of the Web manager and click Save Log to open the following window:

Figure 8 - 3 Save Log window Save All
Open the Save drop-down menu at the top of the Web manager and click Save Al to open the following window:

Figure 8 - 5 Configuration File Backup & Restore window Upload Log File A history and attack log can be uploaded from the Switch to a TFTP server. To upload a log file, enter a Server IP
address, Interface Name and file/path name and then click Upload or Upload Attack Log. Figure 8 - 6 Upload Log File window Reset The Reset function has several options when resetting the Switch. Some of the current configuration parameters can
be retained while resetting all other configuration parameters to their factory defaults. NOTE: Only the Reset System option wil enter the factory default parameters into the Switch's
non-volatile RAM, and then restart the Switch. Al other options enter the factory defaults into the
current configuration, but do not save this configuration. Reset System wil return the Switch's

configuration to the state it was when it left the factory NOTE: The serial port‚Äôs baud rate wil not be changed by the reset command. It wil not be restored
to the factory default set ing.

Reset gives the option of retaining the Switch's User Accounts and History Log while resetting all other configuration
parameters to their factory defaults. If the Switch is reset using this window, and Save Changes is not executed, the
Switch wil return to the last saved configuration when rebooted.

257 DGS-3700-12/DGS-3700-12G Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Switch User Manual Figure 8 - 7 Reset System window Download Firmware The following window is used to download firmware for the Switch. Figure 8 - 8 Download Firmware window
Enter the Server IP address, the Interface Name, the path/file name and select the desired Image ID. Click Download
to initiate the file transfer. Reboot System The following window is used to restart the Switch.

Figure 8 - 9 Reboot System window
Clicking the Yesradio button wil instruct the Switch to save the current configuration to non-volatile RAM before
restarting the Switch. Clicking the Noradio button instructs the Switch not to save the current configuration before restarting the Switch. Al
of the configuration information entered from the last time Save Changes was executed wil be lost. Click the Reboot button to restart the Switch.

258 DGS-3700-12/DGS-3700-12G Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Switch User Manual Appendix A Mitigating ARP Spoofing Attacks Using Packet Content ACL Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) is the standard method for finding a host's hardware address (MAC address)
when only its IP address is known. This protocol is vulnerable because it can spoof the IP and MAC information in the
ARP packets to attack a LAN (known as ARP spoofing). This document is intended to introduce ARP protocol, ARP
spoofing attacks, and the counter measure brought by D-Link's switches to counter the ARP spoofing attack.

‚ÄĘ How Address Resolution Protocol works In the process of ARP, PC A wil , firstly, issue an ARP request to query PC B‚Äôs MAC address. The network structure is
shown in Figure-1.

The ARP request wil be encapsulated into Ethernet frame and sent out. As can be seen in Table-2, the ‚ÄúSource
Address‚ÄĚ in the Ethernet frame wil be PC A‚Äôs MAC address. Since an ARP request is sent via a broadcast, the
‚ÄúDestination address‚ÄĚ is in the format of an Ethernet broadcast (FF-FF-FF-FF-FF-FF).

When the switch receives the frame, it wil check the ‚ÄúSource Address‚ÄĚ in the Ethernet frame‚Äôs header. If the address
is not in its Forwarding Table, the switch wil learn PC A‚Äôs MAC and the associated port into its Forwarding Table.

Forwarding Table Port1 00-20-5C-01-11-11 In addition, when the switch receives the broadcast ARP request, it wil flood the frame to al ports except the source
port, port 1 (see Figure -2). Figure - 2
When the switch floods the frame of ARP requests to the network, all PCs wil receive and examine the frame but only
PC B wil reply to the query as the destination IP address of PC B matches (see Figure-3).

When PC B replies to the ARP request, its MAC address wil be written into ‚ÄúTarget H/W Address‚ÄĚ in the ARP payload
shown in Table-3. The ARP reply wil be then encapsulated into the Ethernet frame again and sent back to the sender.
The ARP reply is in a form of Unicast communication. H/W Protocol H/W Protocol Operation Sender Sender Target Target type type address address H/W address protocol H/W address protocol length length address address

The switch wil also examine the ‚ÄúSource Address‚ÄĚ of the Ethernet frame and find that the address is not in the
Forwarding Table. The switch wil learn PC B‚Äôs MAC and update its Forwarding Table. Forwarding Table Port1 00-20-5C-01-11-11 Port2 00-20-5C-01-22-22

261 DGS-3700-12/DGS-3700-12G Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Switch User Manual How ARP spoofing attacks a network ARP spoofing, also known as ARP poisoning, is a method to attack an Ethernet network which may al ow an attacker
to sniff data frames on a LAN, modify the traffic, or stop the traffic altogether (known as a Denial of Service - DoS
attack). The principle of ARP spoofing is to send the fake, or spoofed ARP messages to an Ethernet network.
Generally, the aim is to associate the attacker's or random MAC address with the IP address of another node (such as
the default gateway). Any traffic meant for that IP address would be mistakenly re-directed to the node specified by
the attacker.

IP spoofing attack is caused by Gratuitous ARP that occurs when a host sends an ARP request to resolve its own IP
address. Figure-4 shows a hacker within a LAN to initiate ARP spoofing attack.

Figure-4

In the Gratuitous ARP packet, the ‚ÄúSender protocol address‚ÄĚ and ‚ÄúTarget protocol address‚ÄĚ are fil ed with the same
source IP address. The ‚ÄúSender H/W Address‚ÄĚ and ‚ÄúTarget H/W address‚ÄĚ are fil ed with the same source MAC
address. The destination MAC address is the Ethernet broadcast address (FF-FF-FF-FF-FF-FF). Al nodes within the
network wil immediately update their own ARP table in accordance with the sender‚Äôs MAC and IP address. The
format of Gratuitous ARP is shown in Table-5.

A common DoS attack today can be done by associating a nonexistent or specified MAC address to the IP address of
the network‚Äôs default gateway. The malicious attacker only needs to broadcast ONE Gratuitous ARP to the network
claiming it is the gateway so that the whole network operation wil be turned down as all packets to the Internet wil be
directed to the wrong node.

Likewise, the attacker can either choose to forward the traffic to the actual default gateway (passive sniffing) or modify
the data before forwarding it (man-in-the-middle attack). The hacker cheats the victim‚Äôs PC to think that it is a router
and cheats the router to think it is the victim. As can be seen in Figure-5 al traffic wil be then sniffed by the hacker but
the users wil not notice anything happening.

Example topology Configuration: The configuration logic is listed below: 1. Only when the ARP matches the Source MAC address in Ethernet, the Sender MAC address and Sender IP
address in the ARP protocol can pass through the switch. (In this example, it is the gateway‚Äôs ARP.)
2. The switch wil deny all other ARP packets which claim they are from the gateway‚Äôs IP.

The design of Packet Content ACL on the DGS-3700 Series enables users to inspect any offset_chunk. An
offset_chunk is a 4-byte block in a HEX format which is utilized to match the individual field in an Ethernet frame. Each
profile is al owed to contain up to a maximum of 4 offset_chunks. Furthermore, only one single profile of Packet
Content ACL can be supported per switch. In other words, up to 16 bytes of total offset_chunks can be applied to each
profile and a switch. Therefore, careful consideration is needed for planning the configuration of the valuable
offset_chunks.

In Table-6, you wil notice that the Offset_Chunk0 starts from 127 and ends at the 2nd byte. It can also be found that
the offset_chunk is scratched from 1 but not zero.

266 DGS-3700-12/DGS-3700-12G Series Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Switch User Manual Appendix B System Log Entries The following table lists all possible entries and their corresponding meanings that wil appear in the System Log of
this Switch. Category Event Description Log Information Severity
System
System started up
System started up
Critical

Login failed through Web from Login failed through Web from <userIP> due to AAA Warning
user due to AAA server
server timeout or improper configuration (Username:
timeout or improper
<username>,MAC:<mac>)
configuration.

Enable Admin failed through Enable Admin failed through Web from <userIP> due Warning
Web from user due to AAA
to AAA server timeout or improper configuration
server timeout or improper
(Username: <username>,MAC:<mac>)
configuration.

Login failed through
Login failed through Web(SSL) from <userIP> due to Warning
Web(SSL) from user due to
AAA server timeout or improper configuration
AAA server timeout or
(Username: <username>, MAC: <mac>)
improper configuration

277 Appendix C Glossary 1000BASE-SX: A short laser wavelength on multimode fiber optic cable for a maximum length of 500 meters 1000BASE-LX: A long wavelength for a "long haul" fiber optic cable for a maximum length of 10 kilometers 1000BASE-T: 1000Mbps Ethernet implementation over Category 5E cable. 100BASE-FX: 100Mbps Ethernet implementation over fiber. 100BASE-TX: 100Mbps Ethernet implementation over Category 5 and Type 1 Twisted Pair cabling. 10BASE-T: The IEEE 802.3 specification for Ethernet over Unshielded Twisted Pair (UTP) cabling. aging: The automatic removal of dynamic entries from the Switch Database which have timed-out and are no longer valid. ATM: Asynchronous Transfer Mode. A connection oriented transmission protocol based on fixed length cel s (packets). ATM is
designed to carry a complete range of user traffic, including voice, data and video signals. auto-negotiation: A feature on a port, which al ows it to advertise its capabilities for speed, duplex and flow control. When
connected to an end station that also supports auto-negotiation, the link can self-detect its optimum operating setup. backbone port: A port which does not learn device addresses, and which receives all frames with an unknown address.
Backbone ports are normally used to connect the Switch to the backbone of your network. Note that backbone ports were
formerly known as designated downlink ports. backbone: The part of a network used as the primary path for transporting traffic between network segments. bandwidth: Information capacity, measured in bits per second that a channel can transmit. The bandwidth of Ethernet is
10Mbps, the bandwidth of Fast Ethernet is 100Mbps. baud rate: The switching speed of a line. Also known as line speed between network segments. BOOTP: The BOOTP protocol al ows you to automatically map an IP address to a given MAC address each time a device is
started. In addition, the protocol can assign the subnet mask and default gateway to a device. bridge: A device that interconnects local or remote networks no matter what higher-level protocols are involved. Bridges form a
single logical network, centralizing network administration. broadcast: A message sent to all destination devices on the network. broadcast storm: Multiple simultaneous broadcasts that typical y absorb available network bandwidth and can cause network
failure. console port: The port on the Switch accepting a terminal or modem connector. It changes the parallel arrangement of data
within computers to the serial form used on data transmission links. This port is most often used for dedicated local
management. CSMA/CD: Channel access method used by Ethernet and IEEE 802.3 standards in which devices transmit only after finding the
data channel clear for some period of time. When two devices transmit simultaneously, a col ision occurs and the col iding
devices delay their retransmissions for a random amount of time. data center switching: The point of aggregation within a corporate network where a switch provides high-performance access
to server farms, a high-speed backbone connection and a control point for network management and security. Ethernet: A LAN specification developed jointly by Xerox, Intel and Digital Equipment Corporation. Ethernet networks operate
at 10Mbps using CSMA/CD to run over cabling. Fast Ethernet: 100Mbps technology based on the Ethernet/CMSA/CD network access method. Flow Control: (IEEE 802.3z) A means of holding packets back at the transmit port of the connected end station. Prevents
packet loss at a congested switch port. forwarding: The process of sending a packet toward its destination by an internetworking device. ful duplex: A system that allows packets to be transmitted and received at the same time and, in effect, doubles the potential
throughput of a link. half duplex: A system that allows packets to be transmitted and received, but not at the same time. Contrast with full duplex. IP address: Internet Protocol address. A unique identifier for a device attached to a network using TCP/IP. The address is
written as four octets separated with full-stops (periods), and is made up of a network section, an optional subnet section and a
host section. IPX: Internetwork Packet Exchange. A protocol al owing communication in a NetWare network.

278 LAN - Local Area Network: A network of connected computing resources (such as PCs, printers, servers) covering a relatively
small geographic area (usually not larger than a floor or building). Characterized by high data rates and low error rates. latency: The delay between the time a device receives a packet and the time the packet is forwarded out of the destination port. line speed: See baud rate. main port: The port in a resilient link that carries data traffic in normal operating conditions. MDI - Medium Dependent Interface: An Ethernet port connection where the transmitter of one device is connected to the
receiver of another device. MDI-X - Medium Dependent Interface Cross-over: An Ethernet port connection where the internal transmit and receive lines
are crossed. MIB - Management Information Base: Stores a device's management characteristics and parameters. MIBs are used by the
Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) to contain attributes of their managed systems. The Switch contains its own
internal MIB. multicast: Single packets copied to a specific subset of network addresses. These addresses are specified in the destination-
address field of the packet. protocol: A set of rules for communication between devices on a network. The rules dictate format, timing, sequencing and
error control. resilient link: A pair of ports that can be configured so that one wil take over data transmission should the other fail. See also
main port and standby port. RJ-45: Standard 8-wire connectors for IEEE 802.3 10BASE-T networks. RMON: Remote Monitoring. A subset of SNMP MIB II that allows monitoring and management capabilities by addressing up to
ten different groups of information. RPS - Redundant Power System: A device that provides a backup source of power when connected to the Switch. server farm: A cluster of servers in a centralized location serving a large user population. SLIP - Serial Line Internet Protocol: A protocol, which allows IP to run over a serial line connection. SNMP - Simple Network Management Protocol: A protocol original y designed to be used in managing TCP/IP internets.
SNMP is presently implemented on a wide range of computers and networking equipment and may be used to manage many
aspects of network and end station operation. Spanning Tree Protocol (STP): A bridge-based system for providing fault tolerance on networks. STP works by al owing you to
implement parallel paths for network traffic, and ensure that redundant paths are disabled when the main paths are operational
and enabled if the main paths fail. stack: A group of network devices that are integrated to form a single logical device. standby port: The port in a resilient link that wil take over data transmission if the main port in the link fails. switch: A device, which filters, forwards and floods packets based on the packet's destination address. The switch learns the
addresses associated with each switch port and builds tables based on this information to be used for the switching decision. TCP/IP: A layered set of communications protocols providing Telnet terminal emulation, FTP file transfer, and other services for
communication among a wide range of computer equipment. Telnet: A TCP/IP application protocol that provides virtual terminal service, letting a user log in to another computer system and
access a host as if the user were connected directly to the host. TFTP - Trivial File Transfer Protocol: Al ows you to transfer files (such as software upgrades) from a remote device using your
switch's local management capabilities. UDP - User Datagram Protocol: An Internet standard protocol that allows an application program on one device to send a
datagram to an application program on another device. VLAN - Virtual LAN: A group of location- and topology-independent devices that communicate as if they are on a common
physical LAN. VLT - Virtual LAN Trunk: A Switch-to-Switch link which carries traffic for all the VLANs on each Switch. VT100: A type of terminal that uses ASCII characters. VT100 screens have a text-based appearance.

279 Appendix D Password Recovery Procedure This section describes the procedure for resetting passwords on D-Link Switches. Authenticating any user who tries to access networks is necessary and important. The basic authentication method used to
accept qualified users is through a local login, utilizing a Username and Password. Sometimes, passwords get forgotten or
destroyed, so network administrators need to reset these passwords. This section wil explain how the Password Recovery
feature can help network administrators reach this goal.

The following steps explain how to use the Password Recovery feature on D-Link devices to easily recover passwords. Complete these steps to reset the password:
1.
For security reasons, the Password Recovery feature requires the user to physically access the device. Therefore
this feature is only applicable when there is a direct connection to the console port of the device. It is necessary for
the user needs to attach a terminal or PC with terminal emulation to the console port of the switch.
2.
Power on the switch. After the runtime image is loaded to 100%, the Switch wil allow 2 seconds for the user to
press the hotkey [^] ( Shift + 6 ) to enter the ‚ÄúPassword Recovery Mode‚ÄĚ. Once the Switch enters the ‚ÄúPassword
Recovery Mode‚ÄĚ, al ports on the Switch wil be disabled.

3.
In the ‚ÄúPassword Recovery Mode‚ÄĚ only the following commands can be used. Command Parameters
reset config
The reset config command resets the whole configuration wil be
back to the default value
reboot
The reboot command exits the Reset Password Recovery Mode and
restarts the switch. A confirmation message wil be displayed to al ow
the user to save the current settings.
reset account
The reset account command deletes al the previously created
accounts.
reset password
The reset password command resets the password of the specified
user. If a username is not specified, the password of all users wil be

The Local Loopback Ports Settings are used to start or stop the internal loopback test on selected ports, or set to/recover external loopback mode. When internal loopback is enabled, the device starts to send test packets to the port, and keeps monito...